TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME IV
Interim Guidelines for the Interpretation of Air Quality Standards.
MDAD. 5/13/74. OAQPS No. 1.2-008 (Revised 5/74).
Procedures for Flow and Auditing of Air Quality Data. -MDAD. 5/29/74.
OAQPS No. 1.2-013 (Revised 5/74).
A Description of the Analytical Techniques and Associated--SAROAD Method
Codes Used in Storing Data in the National Aerometric..Data Bank. "MDAD.
5/30/74. OAQPS No. 1.2-017 (Revised 5/74).
Designation of Unacceptable Analytical Methods of Measurement for Criteria
Pollutants (Supercedes OAQPS Guideline Dated 2-8-74," Designation of
Criteria Pollutant Analytical Methods as Acceptable/not Acceptable for
Purposes of Data Anal'ysis"). MDAD. 5/13/74.- OAQPS No. 1.2-018
(Supersess i on). ———
Air Quality Monitoring Site Description Guideline (Draft). MDAD. 7/74.
OAQPS No. 1.2-019.
Guidelines for the Interpretation of Air Quality Standards. MDAD. 8/74.
OAQPS No. 1.2-008 (Final).
Guidance for Decentralization and Continued Operation ••"of-the NASN--('Draft).
MDAD. 9/74. OAQPS No. 1.2-020.
Guidelines for Air Quality Maintenance Planning and .Analysis, Volume I:
Designation of Air Quality Maintenance Areas, CPDD. 9/74. 'OAQPS
No. 1.2-016 (Revised). %
-------
GUIDELINE SERIES
OAQPS NO. 1.2-008 (Revised)
INTERIM GUIDELINES FOR THE
INTERPRETATION OF AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
US. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
0$
May 13, 1974
SUBJECT: "Interim Guidelines for the Interpretation
of Air Quality "Standards"
FROM: Robert E. Neligan, Director
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
TO: See Below
I am enclosing a revised copy of our guideline document entitled
"Guidelines for the Interpret?^on of Air Quality Standards." As
you know, this document was circulated in draft form for review, and
we received extensive comments from numerous sources including our
regional offices and various state and local agencies. The present
version incorporates many of these comments; and since in some cases
these changes have resulted in different recommendations, I would
like to release this updated version as an interim guideline. This
should serve to indicate that the previous draft version is superseded
and therefore clarify our position on these issues. Prior to doing
this, however, I would appreciate receiving a final review from you
indicating either your concurrence or what .changes you feel are essen-
tial before we issue the document as an interim guideline.
Since you and members of your staff have provided valuable input
in the preparation of this document, I will briefly indicate the major
points of the reviews we have received:
(1) Although few agreed totally with the document, almost all
reviewers indicated that they were glad to see such a document attempted.
(2) Many commentators indicated a preference for "parts per million"
rather than "yg/m3." At the present time we are remaining with the "yg/m3"
since this has been indicated as Agency policy.
(3) Overwhelmingly negative reviews were received on the use of
3-fixed 8-hour periods rather than running averages. Many held that
the use of running averages had not caused any major difficulties for
them. In addition to other factors, this input and the recommendation
of Dr. John Knelson of HSL/NERC have resulted in our change on this
position. Therefore, the present document suggests running 8-hour averages,
(4) Reviews were negative on permitting compliance with "once per
year" standards to be established by every sixth day sampling. Some
suggested that this v/as tantamount to redefining the standard. Our
present position is that intermittent sampling data is sufficient to
show comp-liance unless predictive equations show that the standard
was exceeded. In such a case, more frequent monitoring might be
required, but no violation would be declared solely on the basis of
predicted values.
EPA Fern 1320-6 (Rov. 6-72)
-------
-2-
These points are, of course, discussed in more detail in the
document. Once again, I appreciate the assistance you have given
us in this matter.
Robert E. Nellgan
Enclosure
Addressees
Donald Goodwin, Director, ESED
Joseph Padgett, Director, SASD
-Jean Schuencsan, Director, CPDD
B. J. Steigerwald, Director, OAQPS
Donald Walters, OAQPS
Edward Tuerk, OAWH
-------
GUIDCLIflES FOR THE INTERPRETATION
OF AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
March 1974
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
-------
INTRODUCTION
This guideline document discusses a series of issues concerning
the interpretation of air quality ikVa as it relates to the National
Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS). The issues presented deal
with points of interpretation that have frequently resulted in
requests for further clarification. This document states each issue
with a recommendation and a discussion indicating our current
position. It is hoped that this document will serve as a useful step
in the evolutionary development of a uniform and consistent set of
criteria for relating ambient air quality data to the NAAQS.
-------
ISSUE 1: Given that there are a number of monitoring sites within an
Air Quality Control Region (AQCR), does each of these sites
have to meet the National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS)? In particular, if only one of these sites exceeds
a standard, does that mean that the AQCR is in nonconfonr.ance
of the standards even though all other sites meet the
standard?
Recommendation
Each monitoring site within the AQCR,must meet the standard or
the region is in nonconformance with that standard.
Discussion
The NAAQS1 were defined to protect human health and welfare. The
presence of one monitoring site within an AQCR violating any given
standard indicates that receptors are being exposed to possibly harmful
pollutant concentrations.
Concentrations in excess of standard values at a single monitoring
station may result from the effect of a small, nearby source which is
Insignificant in terms of the total emission inventory, or the station
in violation may be so located that the probability that individuals
would be exposed for prolonged periods is negligible. Such circum-
stances do hot mitigate the recommended interpretation of the question
raised by this issue since NAAQS are generally interpreted as being set
to protect health and welfare regardless of the population density.
Although air quality improvement should be stressed in areas of maximum
concentrations and areas of highest population exposure, the goal of
ultimately achieving standards should apply to all locales. Data from
monitoring sites are the only available measure of air quality and must
be accepted at face value. Attention is thus focused on the selection
of monitoring sites in terms of the representativeness of the air they
sample. This is discussed in more detail in the guideline series
document entitled "Guidance for Air Quality Monitoring Network Design
and Instrument Siting," (OAQPS Ho. 1.2-012). Consideration should be
given to the relocation of monitoring stations not meeting the guideline
criteria.
-------
ISSUE 2: How many significant figures should be employed when making
comparisons with the f.'AAQS and what system of units should
be used?
Re c o rr.m e n d_a t i b r^
Comparisons with the standards should be made after converting
the raw data to nicrograms (or milligrams) per cubic meter. All
comparisons are made after rounding tho air quality value to the
nearest integer value in nicrograms per cubic meter (or milligrams per
cubic meter for carbon monoxide). The rounding convention to be
employed is that values whose fractional part is greater than 0.50
should be rounded up and those less than 0.50 should be rounded down.
Any value whose fractional part equals 0.50 should be rounded to the
nearest even integer. The -foilowing examples should clarify these
points.
Computed Value Rounded Value
79.50 80
80.12 80
80.50 80 •
80.51 81
81.50 82
Discussion
By letting the standard itself dictate the number of significant
figures to be used in comparisons, many computational details are
minimized while still maintaining a level of protection that is con-
sistent with the standard. It should be noted that the parenthetical
expressions given in the MAAQS indicating parts per million, (ppm) may
be used as a guide but in some cases, such as the annual standard for
sulfur dioxide, may require additional significant figures to be
equivalent.
-------
ISSUE 3: Short-term standards are specified as concentrations which
are not to be exceeded more than once per year. How is
this to be interpreted when analyzing data obtained from
' multiple monitoring sites?
Recommendation ' .
Each site is allowed one excursion above the standard per year.
If any site exceeds the standara more than once per year, a violation
has occurred.
Discussion
By examining each site separately, data processing problems are
lessened and, more importantly, regions employing more than the
required minimum number of monitoring sites would not be unduly
penalized. 7- .
-------
ISSUE 4: How should compliance with the NAAQS by July 1975 and 1977
be determined?
Recoii~endaticn
Base the preliminary determination of compliance on adherence
to the implei.entation plan emission reduction schedules. Confirm
compliance with ','AAQS by air quality surveillance during the
calendar year 1976. Hov/ever, noncompliance with short-term standards
can be determined during the last six months of 1975 if two concentra-
tions in excess of the standards occur. Similarly, for AQCRs or
states which do not have to achieve NAAQS until 1977, compliance
would be based on data obtained in 1978.
Discussion
Implementation plans based on bringing many individual or cate-
gories of sources into cor.pliance with emission regulations by
July 1975 have been granted at least conditional approval. Hov/ever,
a twelve-month period of air quality surveillance is required to
determine annual average air quality values. Further, the calendar
year has been recommended as the time unit for the calculation of
annual average concentrations (see Issue 5). Obviously the calendar
year of data required to demonstrate that annual NAAQS have been
achieved by the control activities fully implemented by July 1975
cannot begin before 1 January 1976. Noncompliance with short period
standards can be determined in less than a calendar year by the
occurrence of two concentrations in excess of the NAAQS. Before an
AQCR can be said to be in compliance with short-term•NAAQS, a full
twelve-month period of air quality surveillance records, encompassing
all four seasons, must be available for examination.
-------
ISSUE 5: What period of record of air quality data is necessary
to establish the status of an AQCR with respect to the NAAQS?
Recommendation •
Each AQCR should be treated as a separate case in establishing
its status with respect to the NAAQS (this issue should be considered
in conjunction with Issue 4).
Discussion
Although each AQCR would be examined individually, the gradual
establishment of precedents would eventually provide consistency.
This option would consider differences in monitoring coverage,
meteorology, the type and mix of sources, and unusual economic
circumstances. Case by case treatment would allow greater flexibility
in examining borderline cases, such as annual averages which fluctuate
around the standard, or short-tern excursions above the air quality
standards. Use of this option is illustrated by tha following examples;
(1) S02 concentrations during the heating season in a northern AQCR
are lower than the short-tern standards. If it can be shown that the
number of hearing degree days, the industrial activity, and the
dilution capacity of the atnosphere favored the occurrence of high
S02 concentrations, then the status of the AQCR with respect to the
NAAQS would be evaluated accordingly, (2) eight-hour average CO
concentrations in an AQCR fluctuate about the standard. The period
of record was unusually favorable for the dispersion of pollutants.
Hence, a longer and more representative period of record is required
to evaluate the status of this AQCR with respect to the NAAQS.
-------
ISSUE 6: The NAAQS are defined in*terms of a year, i.e., annual mean
concentrations and short-term concentrations not to be
exceeded ncre than one.? per year. What is meant by the term
-"year" and how frequently should air quality summaries be
prepared to conform to that definition?.
Recommendation
The tern "year" means a calendar year and air quality summaries
should be prepared for that period.
Discussion
While pollutant exposures may overlap calendar years, the use of
a calendar year for air quality summaries remains a simple and conven-
tional practice. Indeed, inquiries concerning air quality are most -
frequently expressed in terms of a calendar year. The data do not
v/arrant quarterly evaluation of compliance or noncompliance with NAAQS,
nor would it be reasonable to revise emission control requirements on
a quarterly basis. This of course does not remove the need for
continual appraisal of air quality on a quarterly or monthly basis to
assess both status and progress with respect to the standards. Such
efforts are obviously useful and sometimes necessary to ensure that
standards are met on a calendar year basis.
-------
ISSUE 7: The flAAQS for CO and SOg include eight-hour and three-hour
averages, respectively. For such standards how is the
time interval defined?
Recommendation
Compliance with these standards should be judged on the basis of
running averages starting at each clock-hour. However, in determining
violations of the standard the problem of overlap must be considered.
This point can best be illustrated by consideration of the 8-hour CO
average. In order to exceed the 8-hour CO standard twice there must
be two 8-hour averages above the standard and the time periods for
these averages nust not contain any common hourly data points. A
simple counting procedure for this interpretation for 8-hour CO is to
proceed sequentially through the data and each time a violation is
recorded the next seven clock hours are ignored and then the counting is
resumed. In this way there is no problem with overlap.
Discussion
This issue has generated considerable interest concerning the
relative mints of fixed versus running averages. At the present time
the computational advantages of the fixed interval approach are out-
weighed by the following properties of running averages: (1) running
averages afford more protection than fixed averages and this additional
margin appears warranted, (2) running averages more accurately reflect
the dosage to receptors and (3) running averages provide more equitable
control from one region to another due to differences in diurnal
patterns.
While the proposed counting scheme determines the number of times-
the standard is exceeded the second highest value is commonly used for
planning purposes. In the case of 8-hour CO this should be computed
by determining the maximum 8-hour average and then selecting the
Second highest 8-hour average that does not overlap the time interval
associated with the max.imum.
•In discussing this issue there are certain related points that
are worth mentioning. It should be noted that a clcck-hour is the
smallest time interval suggested for reporting data and that 24-hour
averages are interpreted as daily averages. Factors influencing these
suggestions include computational complexity, differences in reporting
Intervals for various measurement methods, and the need to maintain
both uniform and consistent control from one region to another.
-------
Issue 8: The chances of detecting violations of 24-hour maximum
standards depend considerably upon the frequency with which
the air is inonttored. . In view of this, how should data
obtained from intermittent monitoring be interpreted?
Recommendation
, *
Sampling at monitoring sites which yields only partial annual
coverage is not necessarily sufficient to show compliance with "once
per year" standards. Although noncompliance will not be declared on
the basis of predicted values, it is possible that predicted values in
excess of the standard may necessitate more frequent sampling at a
particular site.
Discussion
Ideally, continuous monitoring of all pollutants would be conducted.
However, except for those -pollutants specified in Federal regulations,
EPA does not currently require continuous monitoring. Thus, one is
left with either (1) predictive equations employing data from partial
annual coverage, or (2) the data collected through partial annual
coverage. Since the accuracy of predictive equations is not well
established, the remaining alternative is to judge compliance on the
basis of partial annual coverage; however, states at their option,
could sample more frequently than the required minimum. Partial annual
coverage schedules make detection of short-term violations difficult.
The entries in the following table are the probabilities of choosing
tv/o or more days on which excursions have occurred for different numbers
of actual excursions above the standard and different sampling frequen-
cies. The assumption underlying these probabilities is that a monitoring
site excursions above the standard occur randomly over the days of the
year.
Probability
of selecting two or
Actual Number of excursions
•
.
2
4
6 •
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
more days when site 1s
Sampling Frequency -
6J/3££ 122/M5.
0.03 0.11
0.13 0.41
0.26 0.65
0.40 0.81^
0.52 0*n •'
0.62 0.95
0.71 0.97
0.78 0.98
0.83 0.99
0.87 0.99
0.91 0.99
0.93 0.99
0.95 . 0.99
above standard
days per year
IBJ/SJai
0.25
0.69
0.89
0.96 c.
'° .0^5" ' ' '
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.93
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
-------
From this table it is clear that the frequency of sampling must
be considered in judging compliance v/ith "once per year" standards.
The present recommendation was selected so that more frequent monitoring
does not inherently penalize a given area. At the same time a certain
degree of flexibility in the use of predictive equations such as the one
discussed by Larsen ("A Mathematical f'.odel for Relating Air Quality
Measurements to Air Quality Standards," EPA Publication No. AP-89) is •
left to those who evaluate compliance. At the present time it is
difficult to suggest a predictive equation that has equal validity at
all sites. It is felt that this determination should be made on a case
by case basis after a detailed evaluation of the site in question.
-------
ISSUE 9: How should partic'jlate matter, CO and other pollutant
concentrations resulting from severe recurring dust storms,
forest fires, volcanic activity and other natural sources
be taken into account in determining compliance with NAAQS?
Recommendation
Regardless of the source, ambient pollutant concentrations
exceeding a fJAAQS constitute a violation.
Discussion
Ambient pollutant concsntrations exceeding the NAAQS and resulting
from emissions from natural sources constituted violation. However.,
such violations should not be used as a basis for developing or
revising an existing, across-the-board control strategy.
-------
ISSUE 10: Sho.uld all available'air quality data or only those
derived from air quality surveillance systems, as
specified in a state implementation plan (SIP), be
used to determine compliance with NAAQS?
Recommendation
All available valid air quality data representative of the
exposure of receptors can be used to determine compliance with NAAQS.
This includes data obtained from the air quality surveillance system
specified in the applicable SIP, data obtained from the National Air
Surveillance Network (NASfl), data obtained by industry monitoring
stations, data obtained from monitoring stations installed and
operated by concerned citizens, etc.
Discussion
NAAQS have been established to protect the health and welfare
of the population. If the NAAQS have validity, the violation of
a standard at any point in the AQCPx is significant. Even though a
station is not part of the established surveillance network, if
acceptable methods, procedures, calibrations and recordings have been
used and' can be verified, and the station is located in accordance with
applicable criteria for representativeness, the data from that station
should be used for the determination of conformity with NAAQS.
-------
ISSUE 11: Hay monitoring for certain pollutants be restricted to
only a portion of the day? For example, in the case
of oxidant, which has a clear diurnal pattern, would it
suffice to monitor only during the hours from 8 a.m. to
6 p.m. E.S.T.?
Recommendation
Partial daily monitoring of pollutants subject to short-term
NAAQS is not allowed (except nonmethane hydrocarbons where 6-9 a.m.
is specified in the NAAQS). All hours of the day must be monitored,
except perhaps for one hour missed during instrument calibration, and
reported, and will be used in evaluating compliance.
Discussion
While specific pollutants show rather consistent diurnal patterns
of concentration, particularly when mean hourly values are considered,
the concentration patterns are subject to modification with both seasonal
and short period changes of meteorological conditions. This is most
noticeable when a region is subjected to episode conditions. In
addition, the actual local time of occurrence of periods of high concen-
trations will vary from AQCR to AQCR and perhaps from monitoring station
to monitoring station within an AQCR. Extensive study of patterns and
trends exhibited by pollutant concentrations within each AQCR would be
required to select the portion of the day to be monitored if partial
monitoring were allowed. Further, monitoring data for the full twenty-
four hour period will help determine the extent and duration of
episodes and contribute to the determination of the need for emergency
control measures.
It should be noted that automatic monitoring devices used to
obtain sequential hourly data are seldom amenable to shut-down and
subsequent start-up without a warm-up and stabilization period.
-------
GUIDELINE SERIES
OAQPS NO. 1.2-013
(Revised 5/74)
PROCEDURES FOR FLOW AND AUDITING
OF AIR QUALITY DATA
US. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
X> MAY»01974
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE ' 1
1. Introduction • 1
2. Data Flow Procedures 3
2.1 Current Data Flow System 3
2.2 Current Data Editing 7
2.3 Current Data Validation and Certification 8
2.4 Current Data Verification 12
2.5 Future Data Flow System 12
2.6 Future Data Editing 14
2.7 Future Data Validation - - - 14
3. Regional Office Air Quality Data Responsibilities 15
3.1 Current Areas of Responsibility 16
3.2 Future-Areas of Responsibility 30
V
4. Current Techniques for SIP Progress Evaluation 32
-------
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE -PAGE
1. Current Air Quality Data .Flow System 4
2. Future Data Flow 13
3. Data Anomaly Processing Flow 24
4. Typical SCL Annual Pattern 28
5. Typical SO,, Annual Pattern With Constant
Baseline Drift . 28
6. Typical S02 Annual Pattern With Abrupt Baseline
Change 28
7. Typical S02 Annual Pattern With Seasonal Abnormality 28
8. Influence of Nearby Source on SOg Annual Pattern
9. Plan Revision Management System 33
-------
1
PREFACE
--~^Jhe Monitoring and Data- Analysis Division of the Office of Air
Duality Planning and Standards has prepared this report entitled
•
"Procedures for Flow and Auditing of Air Quality .Data" for use by the Regional
Offices of the Environmental ProtBttitm Arreiicyr-'-Ttte-purpose of the
report is to provide guidance information on current data auditing
techniques that should be followed as part of the procedure for in-
putting air quality data into the National Aerometric Data Bank. The
primary audience for this report is the administrative -and management
personnel in the Regional Office whose need is limited to a general
overview of the system rather than detailed information concerning
specific elements. The AEROS (Aerometric and Emissions Reporting
System) contact personnel will continue to receive specific detailed
information directly from the National Air Data Branch, TOAD. Adherence
to the guidance presented in the report will, hopefully, ensure mutually
compatible ambient air quality data for all States and Regions and should
also facilitate data evaluation and interpretation. Further, any risks
involved in policy decisions concerning National Ambient Air Quality
Standards should be minimized. This report is intended to update and
expand upon the previously issued Interim Guidance Peport on "Evaluation
of Suspect Air Quality Data."
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
"-" The purpose of this Guideline, the ftft!ia in a series to be issued
by the f'onitoruttNjsnd Data Analysis Division (MPAD) of the Office of
Air Duality Planninp-and-Standards, is-to .provide the Regional Offices
of EPA with Guidance on data auditing technioues that should be
•
followed as part of the procedure for inputting air quality data into
the National Aerometric Data BanK' Information and suggestions are
presented for both the current and planned computer systems concerning:
' Data Flow
• Data Editing
* Data Validation
* Data Correction Procedures and Certification
' Data Verification
' Statistical Flagging Techniques
In conjunction with this Guideline, the MDAD is also developing sophisti-
cated data edit, validation and quality control programs which should help
smooth the transition between current and planned Regional Office air
quality data responsibilities.
This report will serve on an interim basis until more explicit and
detailed-guidance is developed by the Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
as a result of the expected interaction with the Regional Offices on air
This document supercedes a previously issued interim report entitled
"Evaluation of Suspect Air Duality Data" OAOPS # 1.2-006 issued in
' August 1973.
Information presented in this reoort is also intended to alert the
Regional Offices of their increasing responsibilities with respect to
air quality data as a result of the planned upgrading of the EPA/RTF
computer system.
-------
-2-
cuality data handling techniques and procedures. For purposes of
definition the following terms are listed as they are used in this
\
report:
Data Check (Data Screen, Screening)
The comparing of a piece of data to a specified entity.
The comparison may be manual (visual), or automatic (com-
puterized). The entity may be a code or location (edit)
or a value (validation).
Data Auditing
The systematic checking of identifying information and data
before or after it resides on the Aerometric and Emissions
Reporting System. Includes WIT, VALIDATION, VERIFICATION,
ANOMALY, INVESTIGATION, and CERTIFICATION.
Data Edit (Edit Check)
The comparing of data and its unique identification to a set
of specifications concerning format, alphabetic and numeric
requirements and coding requirements,- etc., either manually or
automatically.
Data Validation (Validation Screen)
The comparing of data values to a set of predetermined criteria
concerning minimum and maximum limits, deviation from average
values, percent change overtime, etc., either manually or
automatically. ..
Data Anomaly (Anomalous Pata)
Any data or data summary about which some problem exists or
about which there arises a question as to its integrity of
Data Flag (Flagging) • (
Calling attention to and uniquely identifying data for (
fu-ther' action, the flagging maybe done manually or automatic;.l 1
-------
'^- ^ . -3-
ir.formation. Anomalous data .icy i-n identified (flaocied
by a report) either rsriually or odorcatlcally by edit checks,
%
validation or any other flapping technique.
Data Verification
The total process involved in determining the existence of
data which, while not on TWB, he's 'hwrrii^icated as existing
by knowledgeable sources.
Data Certification
The process by which data currently residing on NADB is deter-
mined to be correct and complete or is receded by individuals
sufficiently knowledgeable to have background authority and
data to represent the source.
2. DATA FLOW PROCEDURES
This Section presents' the current procedures for processing air
quality data. These procedures include, as required, data editing,
validation, verification, certification and flagging technioues for SIP
*
progress evaluation.
2.1 Current Data Flow System
The general flow of air quality data from the States
through the Regional Offices to the National Aerometric Data
Bank is presented in Figure 1. The steps in the system are
as follows:
a. The State agency submits air ouality data to the
appropriate FPA Regional Office as part of the State Imple-
mentation Plan reporting procedures. These reports which
ere forwarded on a ouarterly basis contain the air duality
-------
,.; / ' i
/
•JO
c
0>
Floy (Including edit)
Air Quality and But a a ion* Data
Regional Office
KEDS/SARQAD Contacts
Rational Air Data Branch
Data Procesftng Section
Inventory
of rate
Received
Interactive
Terminal
Display
-------
-5-
ita and r.ew site c'c^cripticrs for the State's air monitorinp
stationVy The data nv,y be sent in more frequently than
quarterly if desirtd, but must he submitted to the Regional
Office in SAROAD fornat on either coding forms, punched cards,
or magnetic tape. r?ta for all operational stations as
described in the SIP's, beginning with that used in plan
preparation, must be submitted. It is strongly encouraged
that all reliable dcta obtained by the State which satisfies
the criteria established for monitoring network adequacy be
submitted.
b. The NEDS/SARCAD contact in the Regional Office arranges
for keypunching of forms if necessary and then mails the data to
the MDAD's National Air Data Branch in card or tape form.
c. Air Quality data submitted to the National Air Data
Branch should have the following characteristics:
1. Data must be coded in SAROAD format.
11. Data values less than the monitoring minimum de-
tectable sensitivity should be reported as a "zero"
value. A value equal to half the minimum detectable
sensitivity will' be substituted when calculating
summary statistics for continuous data.
111. It is desirable that the data be representative of
o
a 'consecutive three-month period for which at least
75 oercent of the data values are valid. A non-
detectable measurerent, I.e., a value below the
minimum detectable sensitivity (Limits of Detection),
-------
-6-
•: '/!,-; .c':>r>jd valid. Summary rldtistics are not
:"UT :!"i'l~v machine computed i ,r greater t!^n
•' r-">~.tvt of the Vc. 1 id-measur"!r.:-iits are below the
;••• r!fi,T 'jc?"oc table ^."central irn. However, if the
o-itt'-u. :-'->i not met, the data sl.culd still be sub-
r.nU?-' i -vcicularly -for cvaluet'icr. of maxiniw value
star.dtrds, For noncontiguous 24-hour data there
should !-.<•• ?.t least five data points in the quarter,
with at least two -rronths being reported and a mini-
mum of two data values in the month with the least
number of data value reported.
iv. Data must rc-nresent &n interval of one-hour or
greater — shorter interval data must be averaged
over an hour.
v. Data must be representative of the conditions of
the site for the period of time specified; irodifi-
cation of the environment in which the site is
located must be reported to the f-'DAD by the State
and/or the Regional Office.
d. Data are processed using the SAROAD edit program and
the error messages generated are provided to the AEROS contact.
e. Investigation and correction of potential errors is
accomplished by the Regional Office in conjunction with the
States using procedures described later in this document.
\
Corrected data are submitted to the National Air Data Dank for
file updating. i
-------
-7-
2.2 Current Tata Editing
The inccning air cuality data, in SAROAD format, is
subjected to various checks by the National Aerometn'c Date
~~-- Bank's conputer programs. The data vill fail to pass the
edit programs for the following reasons:
a. h'o existing site description. Before any data are
accepted, the site file must contain the information from
the site identification form. The program checks the 12-digil
site code on the data and if no corresponding record is availa-
ble in the site file, the data are rejected. Therefore, the
site identification must be entered before data from a new site
can be accepted.
b. No existing description of sampling or analytical
method. The program automatically rejects data if a record
of the method used to generate the data is not available.
c. Mo match on the pollutant-method-interval-unit
combinations for these codes. Anything else v/ill be rejected.
For example, there is no monthly interval suspended particu-
late data using a hi-vol sampler and gravimetric analysis.
d. Any data field other than "Agency" or "Interval"
which has been coded in alphabetic rather than numeric
characters.
e. Data on the wrong form, such as trying to send 24-
hour data on the hourly data form.
f. Incorrect start hour. For hourly data the start hour
must be 00 or'12. For tv.'0-hour data thrcuoh twelve-hour data
-------
-8-
1egitir>?te values arc oivcn on pace 36 of the SARCAD Users
fanual. Per twenty-four hour or greater data, legitimate
values are from 00 to 23. Anything else is automatically
rejected.
•
g. Data incorrect. Data are checked for meaningful
days. Examples of meaningless days are February 30 or April 31.
Some data had to be rejected because the year was designated as
1977. Eventually, the capability to flag data which have a date
other than the current quarter will be added. Hov/ever, this
capability will be delayed until all back data are incorporated
in the system.
h. Imbedded non-numeric characters in values. There is
a four digit field for the value. For example, values which
have blanks between digits, such as two zeros, a blank, and an
eight instead of three zeros and an eight would be rejected.
i. Decimal place indicator not between 0 and 5. The data
which are currently being generated all have fewer than five
decimal places.
2.3 Current Data Validation and Certification
Currently, the manual procedure used by the MDAD in the
identification of potentially anomalous data values depends,
to a large extent, en chance discovery by someone scanning a
computer printout of either raw data or suirmary statistics.
• Automatic procedures have not yet been developed for computer
applications.
-------
-9-
This process of detecting Questionable data values will be
supplanted when the data system is transferred to the I'nivac
. computer in August, 1974. Potentially anomalous values will
be objectively identified as a step in the addition of all
new data to the file. Both parametric and non-parametric tests
could be applied to the incoming data and a listing printed of
all values that meet one or another of the test criteria for
flagging. Examples of such tests are given below.
Non-par?.netri c tests
* Values that are larger than the arithmetic mean of the
data by some preassigned factor (such as 2).
' Values that are some factor* say 1.5 times larger than
.the estimated assigned 99th percentile of the data.
* Hourly values that differ from adjacent values by more
vthan some preassigned ratio, suggesting some abrupt
change in baseline or a transient interference.
* Chebyschev type tests, wherein values that are more than
four standard deviations away from the mean are to be
considered suspect.
Parametric tests
Efficient use of these tests depends on knowledge of the
frequency distribution of the quantity being measured. Example
of su'ch tests are presented below. (The sensitivity of these
tests can be determined analytically from the frequency'distri-
i bution.) .,
-------
-10-
' Detection cf any values that an larger f-y seme factor
(e.g., 1.5} than tho' ^xpocted value of the cissigned 90th
percentile of the distribution under question.
' The finding that the averaoe of K >_ 5 successive values
p
falls outside the (y + 3o) limit, where y end a are the
"Vi<
mean and the variance of the distribution under Question.
Note: The difference between the non-narametric test and the para-
metric test is that in the former, the assigned percentile is esti-
mated from the data, v;hereas in the latter it is theoretically
obtained.
Validation of the pollutant measurements involves technical
judgment about what constitutes Questionable data, and is expected
to be applied systematically in the form of a set of criteria
defining, for each pollutant, what constitutes an unusual or anomalous
value or an abnormal fluctuation. Excursions outside of expected
bounds should be flagged or tabulated but cannot be automatically
rejected or deleted. They must be brought to the attention of the
contributing agency for correction.
Definitions of what constitute unusual values or abnormal
fluctuations are required for each pollutant. These criteria
should be defined by people familiar with the characteristic behavior
of the pollutants and the instruments used to measure them. Realis-
tically, these criteria for idontifying questionable values should
be open to revision. Once developed, these criteria can be readily
incorporated as a standard element in the data bank's editing and/or
validation procedures.
-------
-11-
Certificetion by States is acccnrlir.hrd by uslnc available SAT'',
output to determine the accuracy and ccnpleteness of all submitted
data. Particular rrnhasis should be placed on the following:
a. Site identification information
b. Methods of collection end analysis
c. Integrity of the actual data
All three items must be coded and represented on the data bank as
accurately as possible to insure the nropor interpretation and
evaluation of the data.
Certification may be triggered by either of two mechanisms:
First, any time there are FDIT or VALIDATION reports flagging either
incorrect data or date cf-G curc^-cr.^-c mature, implicit certifica-
tion is required. This means that the data must be corrected and
resubmitted, if necessary; otherwise, for data which has been
flagged as being possibly invalid, no action is necessary if the
data is correct as it was submitted.
The second trigger for certification may be dependent upon
time or the number of anomalies being reported for a specific
subset of data. It may be determined that an anency should inspect
a set of data to certifv it as beino correct and complete. In this
situation, and it will always be identified as such, the appropriate
agency must make any corrections necessary to the data and must
always respond in writing that the data are correct as they stand
or that the corrections which have been attached will solve the
problem.
-------
-12-
2.4 Current Data Verification
Currently the entire procedure of data verification is
being handled through contra'ctu-al resources. This involves
the use of reference publications to determine the probable
•
existence of additional air quality data. Once NADB is aware
of this data the necessary steps are taken with the appropriate
agency to coordinate the submission of the data to the National
Aerometric Data Bank.
2.5 Future Data Flow System
As previously mentioned, it is expected that the Regional
Offices will assume more responsibility with respect to the
validation of air quality data. This will be accomplished by
their taking a central role in the screening of air quality
data before it is inputted into the National Aerometric Data
Bank. The screening will involve not only editing the coding
format but also the validation of the measurements.
During the transition period of shifting more responsibility
to the Regional Offices, it is anticipated, at least initially,
that the MDAD will do minimal revalidation of the data. Also,
the flagging technique for measuring SIP progress will still be
employed and the National Air Data Branch will assume the ulti-
mate responsibility of entering the "correct" SAROAD data into
the National Aerometric Data'Bank (Figure 2).
-------
' V / /
CO
ro
i
-s
ra
o
d
State/tool Agencies
Flov (Including edit and validation)
Air Quality and Emissions Data
Regional Office
NEDS/SARGAD Contacta
Kattonal Air Data Branch
Data Processing Section
Interactive |
Display )
I
-------
/ 2.6 Future Data Editing
v One of the Mohest priorities within ITAD concerns making
available-all-Edit and Validation programs to each Regional
Office. It has been determined that this can best be accom-
plished by providing terminal edit capability on the PTCC-
UNIVAC lllC.
The procedure to be followed would involve either trans-
mitting or mailing the AQ report in a computer readable mediurr
(cards or tape) to RTCC. Once the data has arrived, the edit/
validation programs could be executed via the Regional Office
terminal with the error diagnostics being returned via the
medium speed remote terminal. This output could then be returned
to the appropriate agency as required.
After a successful edit of the data has been completed the
culled data would be identified to NADB who would concatenate
several Regional Office data sets into a single update. Any
additional errors generated by the actual update (i.e., duplicate
data) would be routed directly to the appropriate Regional Office.
2.7 Future Data Validation
As data are audited by the Terminal Edit/Validation program
it is planned that, in addition to the edit rejection listing
being produced, a special report will be generated which auto-
matically will identify data vhich seem for one reason or
. another to be invalid. This data although identified in the
validation report will nevertheless be updated onto the SARCAD 4
-------
-15-
Due to storaoe constraints there are no plans for these
data to be further "flagced" while stored. It is imperative
. that the data be checked immediately to determine its validity
by the submitting agency, If the data are confirmed to be
correct no further action is necessary. If, however, the data
are incorrect then the agency must immediately code the neces-
sary changes and/or deletions and submit these to the appropriate
Regional Office.
In addition to the types of validation tests already
discussed the following list illustrates the computerized
hourly validation checks under consideration:
CO 100 ppm
S02 2 ppm
Ozone (Total Oxidant) • .7 ppm
Total Hydrocarbons 10 ppm
Non-methane Hydrocarbons 5 ppm
N02 2 ppm
NO 3 ppm
NO 5 ppm
4\
3
Total Suspended Particulate 2000 g/m
3. REGIONAL OFFICE AIR QUALITY DATA RESPONSIBILITIES
This Section presents recommendations and suggestions as to those
methods and techniques which the Regional Offices can employ to validate
air quality data. The Monitoring and Data Analysis Division recognizes
that some of the areas of responsibility are beyond the capability of some
of the Regional Offices at this time. In these cases, the KDAD will
-------
-16-
provide technical and ether assistance on an as needed basis in order
that the current and planned data flew system operate in the most
efficient and effective manner possible.
~~3.1 Current Areas of Responsibility
At this time, there are various tasks which the Regional
Offices perform in the validation of air quality data. These
include the following:
a. Preliminary Data Inspection
The Regional Office can make a visual screening of the -
SARCAD sheets before forv.-arding the data to M^D. Ensuring
that the site identification and descriptions, pollutant,
sampling and analytical method, interval, units and decimal
•
point locations are properly filled in on both the 24-hour
and hourlySAROAD coding form will greatly reduce the edit
and resulting correspondence between MDAD and the Regional
Offices. If a particular agency shows a history of care-
lessness in correctly filling out their SAROAD sheets, the
Regional Office may want to check these sheets for their
"correctness" as discussed in Section 2 rather than just
for their completeness.
If the data submitted to the Regional Office from the
States are in the form of punched cards, the Regional Office
can visually inspect the batch to make sure that pertinent
columns are punched and aligned correctly. The Regional
Office may find it desirable to actually print out or list
the data"from selected agencies before forwarding the cards
-------
-17-
to fT/f. :j' :4. •'?.':- ?.rr.> •;. . ' .. -.. : -{^ tape?,
is littU x'..c Kt. io- ul Offu. .-i .'j, •=> * present,
forward it en.
b. Intt-vrooat'' ':•?. Eanl., I- •
Sens exisn'r.^ cAivOAD oii'^'.i rr-: ,-v»nable v.M..h the
Regional Office f?y find hel;-.",'1 i-1 ,'vc ". ^.ting thrir :.ir
quality c'ata. The Regional OTice cc,i rjou=st cui^it from
the data bank and ret Quarterly and i^-i'ly frequency dis-
tribution lists for pach sampling stev!j;-i. The output
includes the site c'oscn'ptior f.t the tcp cf each pscjc end
a frequency distribution for each polluldnt, year or
quarter-year. The number of observations, rrinimum, toximun:,
and the percentile values are listed for oech polluu-nt-
quarter-year. The arithmetic mean, geometric mean, and
geometric standard deviation are given only for those
pollutant-quarter-years v:hich n^pet National Aeroipetric
Data Pank criteria.
The frequency distributions are available on a national,
EPA regional and State basis. Other options include the
ability to request the distribution for limited numbers of
pollutants, years or cuarters.
These and other outputs and remote batch and inter-
active access methods are more fully defined and discussed
2
in the SAROAD Terminal Users Manual , and the Regional
Office NEDS/SAPOM contact should be contacted for addi-
tional information.
-------
-18-
Thc Regional Cffice v/ill, in the future, be able to
make comparisons between ireasured air quality data and
that which they, and/or the State and local, agencies,
intuitively feel is reasonable for that geographical area,
station end pollutant.
c. Check Anomalous Data
Anomalous or questionable data values may arise from
the data flow system as a result of the following procedures:
edit checks, validation screen and the application of the
flagging technique. The Regional Office has the responsi-
bility of either accepting, rejecting or modifying the data
value or oVBraqe in ouestior..r In this regard, the Regional
Office has the option of requesting that the originating
agency determine the validity of the data or provide certain
information and documentation so that they may make the
final determination.
The procedure used to check out any specific data
value prior to the initiation of an anomaly request to
NADB could depend on: the Regional Office's assessment
of the originating agency in terms of its capability,
quality control program, and previous performance. MDAD
suggests that the following sequence of steps be followed
in order to check out anomalous data values or composite
averages. In all cases, it should be recognized that any
agency which alters, manipulates or transcribes a data
value in any v/ay is potentially capable of introducing an
-------
-19-
error. V'hen a data value is identified as being ouestionaHe,
the responsible acency must determine whether or not the data
value maintained its integrity throughout the anercy's data
acquisition and processing system.
The data should be traced through the SARCAD system,
the Regional Offices, State agency and/or local agency to
its original recording, whether it be a value from a computer
readout, paper tape printer, strip chart, or a report from the
chemist in the laboratory. The types of errors usually found
in the internal check are: typing, key punching, tabulating
and transposition, mathematical (such as addition, multipli-
cation and transcribing). Further discussion of these errors
and methods to reduce their frequency may be found in already
published guideline documents. '
If no errors have been identified in the internal check,
at all aaency levels, the verification and evaluation process
should continue down two similar but separate paths. Which
path is chosen depends on v;hether the data in question is a
single value or a composite average.
i. Fvaluating Specific Air Quality Deta Values
' Instrument Calibration, Specifications and Operations
The operation and calibration of continuous instru-
ments is of the utmost importance in the production
of valid air ouality data. The instrument cali-
bration should be reviewed for the time period in
ouestion, both before and after the suspect data
-------
-rc-
rcirt. It should be determined if the instru-
r«nt was cpr-r?tina vithin prc-detcrmined
r-crfonrorco specifications such as drift,
creratina'tep'oerature fluctuations, unattended
ororetionel pc-riods, etc. These performance
specifications -for automatic monitors are defined
and nublished in the Federal Peojsber and sum-
3 4
ir-orized in various guideline documents. ' These
specifications are likely, hov/ever, to be super-
ceded by those published in the October 12, 1973,
issue of the Federal Rrristcr on proposed
Ecuivalency Peculations. Guidelines on air quality
control practices and error tracing techniques are
also available.
* Defo're and £ftcr Readings
If the instrument generating the data was found to
be "in control," the values immediately before and
after should be determined. Comparisons between the
percent and/or oross deviations could be made. Ideally,
this difference in concentration should be determined
through a statistical analysis of historical data.
Tor example, it may be determined that a difference
of 0.05 ppm in SC^ concentration for successive hourly
averages occurs very rarely (less than one percent of
the time). The criteria for what constitutes an
excessive chf.noe may also be linked to the time of day.
-------
For cxcrplo, an hcirly chorine of CO of 1C ppn bctv/ccn
6 n~ and 7v />M may ho common hut v/ould be suspect if
it occurred t-etv-ctn 2 AM and 3 AM,3'5
Other Instruments at the Same Location
Observing the behavior of other instruments at
the satre location vould give the evaluator a quali-
tative insight into the possible reasons for the
anomalous reading. If all of the instruments showed
a general increase, meteorological factors might be
considc-red while a dramatic deviation over the same
short period of time may indicate an electrical
problem or an air conditioning malfunction. On the
other hand, if the other instruments behaved normally,
a temporary influence of a single pollutant or single
pollutant source may be suspected.
Similar Instruments at Adjacent Locations
Comparing the behavior of other instruments in the
vicinity which monitors the same pollutant could
further elucidate the situation. For example, if
the adjacent instruments (upwind and downwind)
exhibited the same aeneral trend, an area problem in
which the maximum effect was over the station of
interest, would be indicated. However, if the adjacent
stations seemed to peak either before or after the
time the suspect value was recorded, the station may
, have been under the influence of plume fumigation
-------
-22-
which wandered according to wind direction influt-r,. .>.
Micrometeorological influences should not be over-
• locked cither. -The, station rray be .under the influtv,;.:
of subsidence effects from the urban heat island or
• -i o
upslope-downslope influences. *
' Meteorological Conditions
No attempt to explain an anomalous air quality data
point would be complete without a consideration of
the meteorological conditions present at the time of
the reading. A passing front and strong inversion,
extended calms or strong winds are conditions which
7 8
have a great impact on air quality. ' Influences of
precipitation, temperature and season could be included
to interpret the reasonableness of the data as well.
' Time-Series Check
Investigating a time series plot of the data might
reveal a repetitious pattern during similar time
periods. An extreme excursion might thus be explained.
For example, the instrument may be extremely tempera-
ture sensitive and may be under the influence of the
sun shining between buildings from 2 PN1 to 4 PM each
afternoon. Similarly, for example, every Thursday r.ay
be delivery day for an adjacent supermarket v/here the
delivery trucks spent the bulk of the day idling in
the vicinity of the sampler probe.
-------
-23-
* Physical Site Location
From time-to-time local air quality influences may
. change and edvorsely affect a given air monitoring
station's representativeness. Examples of this might
be an adjacent apartment house or supermarket changing
from garbage haul-away to an incinerator. Urban
renev/al may also render the location temporarily un-
•»
representative. It may be beneficial for each agency
or Regional Cf*ice to maintain a map and photograph
of each si".: shewing influencing site characteristics.
. — .- --*• •*
These coulci be updated on a periodic basis. The site
s
location, sampling orobe material and configuration
should also be within the bounds of those specified
3
in published guidelines. Figure 4 presents a step-
wise review and guide to the verification of specific
data values. It should provide the Regional Offices
with an overall picture of the suggested processing
of State and local air duality data.
ii. Evaluating Annual Air Duality Averages
' Summary Statistics
If no calculation or recording errors have been found,
those summary statistics which describe the average
should be checked. These may include both reotretric
and arithmetic means, standard deviations, and the
frequency distribution in percent!les. Both the \
-------
Keject
data
Error
Found
Error
found
Error
TouncT
Frror
Found
Anomalous D
IKi LJ.OiM.L
Static n.t
MDAD
Internal
Ched:
Error
Corrected
Error not
'found
Contcict
Regional
Office
Regional
Offir3
internal
Cherk
Error
Corrected
Error not
found
V
Contact State
and/or Local
\gency
State and
Local
Internal
Check
Error
Corrected
Instruront
Ca] ibrcition
Operation
3 p c:: i f i c a t i o n r>
Frror
Corrected
\r
-------
X
REJECT \
DATA /
^/
GREATER \ '. ' ' ."-T/
^t Tu/.\ : , .r,^...,..r,
•' " ' I A""1 L ''''
rT-» .. ... .
1;0
/\
REJECT X
DATA S
\/
X^
REJECT \.
* REVERSE
^, TREND
^INDICATED
Y
REVERSE
TREND
OTHER
iNSTRunir;;
SA1-1E
LOCATION
1 SUB
I
SIMILAR
T-nrATrnxT
i'
/
i-'o : ,
t • -' ^'~
\ ^C:
STAI\TIATI::G
TRENO
NDICATUD
S i ,. --r
t
INDICATED
INOTCATED
J
SUUSTAIITIAVING
TREND
INDICATED
UNFAVORABLE
<^
TGUARD
OCCURREIJCE
METEOROLOGICAL
NEUTRAL
~~TOT!7fKiLP
OCCURRENCE
REVERSE
CYCLE
F7vVORABLE
TOWARD
£CU.OJiriC E
TIME-SERIES
CYCLE
N0
CYCLE
i pn^*Tr'i"rTTT^
1 X Vy^, - * , . *j
\7 CYCLE
SITE
Dnvr.r.Ty.s
PHYSICAL
SITE, pi'.or.i
CO
t-, ,
o ,
i-3 ;
i-.
?!
!
\
SITE IS OK
-------
si- •> ' v,;-;r.r.s and th? ; ."'n : ". ".'' t!
:
f •,''-,- !vl. '.•>'. ro neotroiri-
. --r.n'tive to i : .< : •••r-v- •;/ *.
tic../ o* lr,c ^'..'u-s correspoiV".'.! i.i. T!.? l-.ic'M-jr
con;i Us voi.lci ol.c show the ir,f i'^r,:-. t.f sb;- .....
hirh vpluc-s. Cn -J.\* average, star '.'<:- r-.'i f'^viaru:.1 '..v
not nsntrally ci a.'ice much from year- to-j-oar.
List Indiviciu.l Volues
If the sumir.sry statistics indicate thsi: ihe mean v/'s
heavily influrnc?d by a feu high vali^'C, or in thr.
absence of sun-i^sry statistics, the individual drri:
values vhich comprised the averane should be listed.
From inspection of this list, it can be determined
if the averarie was influenced by a relatively few
large values or v-.hether the bulk of the data appears
to br consistently high. If the former appears tc be
the situation, each individual data value should be
treated according to the Guidelines for specific cir
quality data points presented above, In the latter
case, proceed to the next step in the verification of
annual averapes.
Physical Site Inspection
The physical site location should be evaluated in tc-rirs
of its representativeness of the pollutant of interest,
-------
-26-
i
' the avcracnrg tirr
-------
-27-
not be arbitrarily assumed that any such shift
is wrong. For instance, the analytical method
may have boor changed to the standard reference
method, sources of interferences may have been
eliminated or the operators ir.ay be following the
procedure correctly for the first time, figure 7
presents a seasonal abnormality in the expected
pattern. It should be kept in mind that a devia-
tion from the expected pattern can be negative as
well as positive. Figure 8 demonstrates how the
expected pattern can be smoothed (masked) by a
•rrsarby source whose —-"csions are fairly constant
throughout the year. The pattern may also show
part of the year as "normal" and part of the year
"masked" if there are pronounced seasonal wind
direction changes. For those pollutants such as
oxidants whose peak values occur during a single
season a plot of weekly or bi-weekly averages through
the period of interest v/ould provide more information
on the cyclical patterns than monthly averages.
Check Prior Data for Trend
Plotting at least four previous annual averages
along with the current year and visually inspecting
the graph could give the evaluator a qualitative
insight into whether the current annual average is
a significant deviation from or an extension of the
projected trend.
-------
_$IUF.I'R_.DJQXID.L.
1-- -•' t
I . .,. . I —
I-'-.' ~- ..T^JL." i —ii.
"
zjrrlr^i ~) rr£:.r~ pX1"-
~--','"'.]"..'...^s^r
. ... ._ . _.
v ~
:~i:i!:-:Vrv£y'^^
w^^/^^^^-mm^^^
'"
-------
-29-
Compare With Surrounding Stations
If there are enough surrounding sites to develop
air quality isopletns of the area, the evaluator
could see hov/ the annual average in question fits
In with the overall picture. For instance, if the
point in question was midway between the isopleth
lines representing 80 and 60, but the recorded value
v/as 50% greater than expected, i.e., 105, an ab-
normality may be expected.
This comparative technique may also be used in areas
where there are not enough sites to directly plot air
quality isopleths but where a predictive air quality
model has been developed and verified with a limited
number of actual data values. In these cases, for
example, deviations of +^100% could be suspect.
Meteorology
The annual average should be interpreted in conjunc-
tion with meteorological conditions for the year in
question. For example, if the winter of the year in
question were the coldest in 50 years or the overall
degree days were SQ% above the 20-year norm, an
increased S0« average would be expected. Suspended
particulate values can be greatly affected by wind
direction and a disproportionate wind rose (atypical
for the area) could help explain unusual values.
Comparing the appropriate meteorological parameters
-------
N
\
/
-30-
' such as rainfall, wind speed, number and length of
inversion, temperature and degree days to their long-
term averages, i.e., 20- or 50-year norms, before
attempting to change implementation plans is'suggested.
d. Data Bank Add/Correct/Delete Procedures.
As Regional Office interaction with the SAROAD data
bank increases, there will be an increasing need to become
proficient with the procedures used to update the bank with
new data, correct existing data and delete data which are
incorporated in the data bank but have been found to be in
error. There are then three types of transactions which can
be processed by the SAROAD data bank: add, correct, and
delete. In each case data in SAROAD format must be submitted
on a separate tape or set of cards and must be identified both
on the tape and by an accompanying memorandum.
Documentation of each of the transaction types, describing
the processing which the data goes through and indicating the
limitations of each type of transaction has been provided to
the Regional Office by MDAD (Slaymaker's memorandum of June 6,
1973).
The Regional Office should use the previously discussed
procedures to determine if identified suspect data should be
updated, corrected or deleted by means of these transactions.
- 3.2 Future Areas of Responsibility
Future areas of Regional Office responsibility with i
respect to air quality data include:
-------
-31-
a. Quality Control
Quality control practices in the operation of air
monitoring instruments, laboratory analysis and data handling
procedures is of the utmost importance in producing valid
air quality data. The Regional Offices should therefore
encourage quality control programs at the State and local
level. To aid the "Regional TJffices in this effort, the
Quality Assurance and Environmental Monitoring Laboratory,
NERC/RTP, has and is developing various manuals describing
1n detail, procedures to be followed during the course of
sampling analysis and data handling for various pollu-
The Control Programs Development Division has developed
a general guideline for State and flbcal Kuality control pro-
grams entitled "Quality Control Practices in Processing Air
Pollution Samples." This guideline should help the Regional
Office establish a general quality control program at the
State and local level.
b. ' Edit and Validation Checks
When MDAD develops the data validation programs and turns
both the editor and data validation programs over to the
Regional Offices, it is expected that the Regional Offices
will assume the lead in initiating edit and validation checks
on the incoming data. High quality data should then be trans-
mitted to the National Aerometric Data Bank via upgraded
i
remote access computer terminals.
-------
-32-
4. CURRENT TECHNIPl'FS FOR SIP PROGRESS FWLUATION
<
Vlt is difficult to develop comprehensive guidance on exactly how
to determine whether a control strategy will need to be revised, . While
there rray be a few situations where it is obvious that a plan revision
is necessary, in general it will be a difficult task to determine that a
plan is inadequate to attain the standards prior to the established attain-
ment date. The problem is to determine whether AOCR's are progressing
satisfactorily in relation to the emission limitations contained within
the SIP. To this end, a Plan Revision Management System (PP.MS) was
developed to track the progress being made by States in implementing
their SIP. PRMS provides a means for effectively combining information
contained in SAROAD (air Quality) NEDS (source emissions), and CDS (enforce-
ment and compliance information) to compare measured progress against
expected progress.
This system is designed to monitor the progress of actual air quality
levels, obtained from the quarterly reports, in relation to the anticipated
air quality reductions which should occur as a result of compliance with
approved emission limitations. If the difference between the observed ard
projected air quality levels exceed certain specified limits, then the
site is "flagged" as a "potential problem." A number of flacginq levels
or tolerance limits are incorporated in the system to indicate that the
site either has acceptable proqress or is having a minor, moderate, or major
problem toward attainment of the f!AAQS. The tolerence limits were
developed through the application of statistical ouality control techniques
which allow for the many variables associated with measured air ouality
1 >
concentrations. (See Fidure 9)
-------
-33-
pi «.| rv»"-T'^" »"".ir IT CYCV<:M
r L.. i i>..... w » .'i/v, i/vL-., -il J J 1.) i c.ri
Perticulc'te Mutter
Enn'ssicns
(1000 tons/year)
150
TOO
50
1974 1975 1975 19/7
Air quality
150
100
50
Tolerance limits
Projected air
quality
1970 1971
1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 19)7
Calendar Year
"Moesursd air quality
Step
7/1 Col culr.Ucn of mission roi.'ictio^ f'.TDj, E'.n's'no'i '^-y
;3 PIM;C ' -if •••" .-ir c'.iVIty
•• f, Ef.i .!>]-,:/, ..::'. o~ ul viMii:.' 1 :..:•.-, or L;'.:.:.' u-if:
-------
-34-
Once a "potential r'ooV.n r-jpion" is identified, OAQFS will notify
the appropriate Pegic'-ai Office. This will te done on a semiannual basis.
The Regional Office vrill te rosr.oisible for investigation and further
assessment of the problem. The regional Office should also report tr.eir
findings to OAQPS indicating the action they have taken or plan to take.
While the PRMS will provide 3 irechanisn-; to identify "potential problem
regions" from an analytical point of view, the Regional Offices should be
more intimately aware of the status of Pegions within their States. Thus,
the Regional Offices may be aware of other AOCR's not currently being
analyzed by the PRMS which should be reviewed to determine if the plan is
adequate to attain the flAAQS by the specified data for attainment.
Initially, there are 17 AQCR's contained in the PRMS. An additional
50 Regions v/ere included in the system in January 1974. The additional
50 Regions that were selected for analysis were based on recommendations of
the Regional Offices as to those AQCR's which should be reviewed to insure
that adequate progress is being made toward attainment of the standards.
By mid-1974, 50 more AQCR's are scheduled to be included in the PRMS. Thus,
by July 1974, 117 Regions will be analyzed. The Regional Offices should
indicate to OAQPS those AOCR's that they believe should be reviewed to
determine the possible need for plan revisions.
It is understood that air quality levels throughout an AQCR are
highly variable and that each monitoring site within the region must
have levels at or below the national standards by the specified date
for attainment to be in compliance with the Act. The PRf'S analyzes all
monitoring sites within SAROAD for the particular AOCR in question to
-------
-35-
v,
determine if adecuate nrooress is beina made. Thus, the system is capable
of defining the problem en a much srellnr scale than the entire AQCR.
While most of the reaion^rey be shewing adequate progress, a few sites,
•
located in areas of maximum concentration, may be deviatinp from the.
desired air Quality levels. Review of these sites vill allow the Agency
to take a much closer look at the real problem areas. Because the R.O.
may only be required to review a very few problem sites, more effort can
be placed upon those areas within an AOCR which appear to be having the
most difficulty in attaining the standards. It is believed at this time
that it will not be necessary in most cases to require a major plan
revision for an entire AOCR. The revision or additional action can be
tailored to a minimum number of sources to give the maximum amount of
benefit toward attainment of the standards. Thus, a review to determine
the adequacy of the progress for a region should be done on a site by site
basis. The following two pages present the PRMS responsibilities and the
associated action procedures.
-------
PRMS Responsibilities
i
OAQPS ResponsibiTitles
\
o Calculate initial emission/time curve
• • •
j
o Develop initial projected air quality curve (Proportional model)
o Perform the computer analysis of measured vs projected air quality
* »
o Notify each Regional Office of possible deficiencies
o Prepare a summary of the PRMS analysis for the Administrator's
•
Progress Report
° Offer technical assistance to the Regional Office in investigating
identified deficiencies
o If requested, rerun computer analysis with additional data provided
by the Regional Office
Regional Office Responsibilities
° Investigate areas with possible deficiencies
o Inform OAQPS of the results of the investigation
o If a new projected air'quality curve is determined to be necessary,
it shoVld be developed by the R.O.'s and submitted to OAQPS for
«
a rerun of the PRMS analysis.
o If a plan revision is determined to be necessary by the R.O., inform
the State of the type of revision necessary to correct the plan
•
deficiency.
-------
"ACTION PROCEDURES
I
A.; Data Review Actions
/
( 1. The air quality data should be reviewed and work should pro-
ceed to certify the data if possible.
2. The monitoring site should be'visited to determine if the
monitor is properly located.
•
3. The meteorological conditions associated with the sampling
period in .questions should be reviewed to determine if any
abnormal conditions could have effected the air quality
levels.
4. The site location is source oriented and a unique projected
curve for that site should be developed to better analyze
the data."'
5. A more detailed projected curve should be developed for the
entire air quality control region.
B. Program Actions
1. A review of the compliance schedules for the AQCR should be
conducted to determine if any sources have failed to meet any schedulec
.-.. •
milestones or final compliance dates.
. •
2. The State should be notified that a more effective implementation of
the new source review procedures is needed to restrict growth in
certain areas.
3. A special study should be initiated to determine the cause of the
• *
present air quality problem and the results are expected by .
C. 'Legal Actions
* • .
1. EPA/State enforcement action is necessary
i \
2. Plan revisions is determined to be necessary and the State has
I
been notified of the need for the revision.
I
3. The State's plan revision has not been submitted or opprovod
i
and work has boen initiated by CPA to develop the norcssary
-------
-36-
REFFPEtJCES
1. SAROAC Users Manual, Office .of Air Programs Publication No. APTD 0663,
EPA, Research Triangle Park, II. C., July 1971.
2. ~SAROAD Terminal Cser's Manual, Office of Air Programs, Publication
Mo. EPA-450/2-73-C04, EPA, Research Triangle Park, N.C., October 1973.
3. "Field Operations Guide for Automatic Air Monitoring Equipment,"
Office of Air Programs, Publication No. APTD 0736, EPA, Research
Triangle Park, N.C., November 1971.
•
4. "Guidelines for Technical Services of a State Air Pollution
Samples," Office of Air Programs, Publication No. APTD 1347, EPA,
Research Triangle Park, N.C., November 1972.
5. "Quality Control Practices in Processing Air Pollution Samples,"
Office of Air Programs, Publication No. APTD 1132, EPA, Research
Triangle Park, N.C., March 1973.
6". Federal Register, Vol. 36, No. 228, November 25, 1971, page 22404.
7. Lowry, W.P. and R.W. Eoubel, "Meteorological Concepts in Air
Sanitation," Type-Ink., Corvallis, Oregon, 1967.
8. Symposium; Air Over Cities, Public Health Service, SEC Technical
Report A-62-5, Cincinnati, Ohio, November 1961.
9. Guidelines for Development of a Quality Assurance Program, Office of
Research and Monitoring, Quality Assurance and Environmental Monitoring
Laboratory, Publication N.C. EPA-P4-73-028, EPA, Research Triangle
Park, N.C., June 1973.
a. Reference Method for the Continuous Monitors of Carbon
Monoxide in the Atmosphere.
b. Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulates
in the Atmosphere (High Value Method).
c. Reference Method for Measurement of Photochemical Oxidants.
d. Reference Method for the Determination of Sulfur Dioxide in
the Atmosphere.
10.' OAQPS #1.2-011 Guidelines for Determining the Need for Plan Revisions
to the Control Strategy Portion of the Approved SIP.
11. Plan Revision Management System, System Summary, May 1974, USEPA, OAQPS,
CPDD, Research Triangle Park, N.C.
-------
GUIDELINE SERIES
OAQPS NO.
1.2-017
(Revised 5/74)
A DESCRIPTION OF THE ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES
AND ASSOCIATED SAROAD METHOD CODES USED IN
STORING DATA IN THE NATIONAL AEROMETRIC
DATA BANK
VS. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
\ Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
. ^ Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
SUBJECT:^ Description of the Analytical Techniques
and Associated SAROAD Codes Used in Storing
Data in the National Aerometric
FROM: OAQPS #1.2-017 , M
DATE: 3 1 MAY 1374
TO:
Robert E. Neligan, Director w^"
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
Surveillance and Analysis Division Directors, Regions I-X
Air and Water Analysis Division Directors, Regions I-X
Enclosed is a copy of guideline document OAQPS #1.2-017.
The previous draft has been revised based on comments from
the Regional Offices and NERC-RTP. The document relates
SAROAD pollutant method codes with analytical techniques
for which data have been submitted since 1969.
The principal purpose of this guidance is to establish
uniformity in reporting data to the NADB as well as to
prevent data from being reported under the wrong code. It
is extremely important that air quality data be reported
under the correct code number because all of our analyses
and air quality trend statistics are derived from these
code numbers. Incorrectly coded data may lead to incorrect
statements that a site has exceeded standards.
The Regional Office must take the lead and supervise a
survey of the various monitoring techniques and SAROAD method
coding used at each site under their jurisdiction to verify
if they differ from those described in this guideline. We
would appreciate a reply from your office when you have
surveyed the sites under your jurisdiction.
Should a technique or code be used that is not described
in this document, please follow the instructions found on
page 2 and report any differences to the Chief of the Data
Processing Section, NADB, Durham, North Carolina (919/688-8247)
If there are any further questions or comments, please
contact Mr. William Cox of the Monitoring and Reports Branch
(919/688-8312). - . .
Robert E. Neligan
Enclosure
EPA Farm 1320-6 (Rev. 6-72)
-------
A Dr:r;cniPTTOM or THE ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES AND
AHSCCIATUD SAROAD 'ir/THO!) CODES uSEI; IN
STORING DATA IN THE NATIONAL AERCMETRIC DATA BANK
OAQPS 1.2-017
.March 1974
Revised
30, 1974
Monitorircr and Reports Branch
Office of Air Quaixty Planning and Standards
and
a]ity Asrmrancc and Environmental Monitoring Laboratory
Olfica or P.o.-DoarcJi and Dcvolopncnl:
National :",:;vircnnunl:;il Research Center
U. S. Enviroixnental 1'rotection Agency
Research Triunylc Park, ijorth Carolina 27711
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Introduction •' 1
Suspended Particulates 3
Benzene Soluble Organic 3
Soiling Index 4
Light Scatter 4
Radioactivity 4 '
Metals, by Hi-Vol, AA, Emission Spectra 6
Arsenic 9
Mercury 9
Water Soluble Particulates 10
Benzo(A)Pyrene 15
Dustfall Procedures 16
Carbon Monoxide 23
Sulfur Dioxide 24
Hydrogen Sulfide 27
Sulfation Rate Procedures 28
Fluoride Ion 31
Nitrogen Oxides 32
Ammonium 36
Hydrocarbons v 38
Aldehyde . 39
Oxidants 40
Ozone 43
-------
The purpose of this document is to bring together for
the first time a SAROAD code number with a description of
the analytical technique used in gathering data stored in the
National Aerometric Data Bank (NADB). It has long been
needed. The SAROAD code numbers and methods in this
compilation are only those for which data have been sub-
mitted since 1969. The titles of the methods (in capital
letters following the code number) are those which were
assigned in the past and which appear in the computer
printout of Common Parameters and Methods (the "Farm File"),
similar to Code Table 4 of the SAROAD Users Manual.
It is to be emphasized that we do not endorse all of
the procedures described herein. Some are known to yield
-.erroneous or misleading data. Nor do we endorse a par-
ticular manufacturer's instrument even though the name is
referred to in a title. The rule governing the compilation
was: every method used since 1969 together with its Farm
File title is to be included for the purposes of completeness.
Beneath each SAROAD number and title there is a brief
description of the sampling and analysis principles followed
by references which the reader should consult for details.
Whenever possible, we have given references to those pub-
lications which we think should be readily available to
field workers. In no case have we included enough details
for a worker to start an analysis program which will produce
valid data. The references must be consulted.
Instrumental techniques have not been thoroughly re-
ferenced and the instrument user should consult the pro-
cedure prepared by the manufacturer.
-------
Through this publication we hope to achieve some degree
of uniformity in reporting data to the NADB. If, for example,
data have been submitted to the Bank under a given code number,
but the description of that method as found in this compilation
is different from the method v;hich was actually used to obtain.
the data, then the reporter must do one of three things:
a. he must begin submitting data under the proper
code number which agrees with the method actually
used; (data previously reported must be re-reported
under the correct code);
b. the reporter irrast change his methodology to agree
with the method described and data then submitted
using that code number; or
c. a new code number must be applied for.
We encourage the persons who submit data to the NADB
to verify with the laboratory personnel that the SAROAD codes
used agree with the analytical procedures described herein.
If there are problems or questions, we urge you tor call the
chief of the data processing section, NADB, Durham, N.C.
(FTS 919/688-8247); or your SAROAD contact or quality control
coordinator in the Regional Office. Also, we will welcome
your pointing out any errors and/or omissions in the text.
There are a few blanks which we have not been able to fill
in.
-------
11101 91 SUSPENDED PARTICULATE - HI-VOL - GRAVIMETRIC
Air is drawn at 40 to 60 ft-.3/min through a glass
fiber filter/ by means of a blower, and the sus-
pended particles having a diameter between 100
and 0.1 ym are collected. The suspended particulate
is calculated by dividing the net weight of the
particulate by the total air volume sampled and
reported in density units as yg/m . Heavy
loading of suspended particulate, oily particulates,
or high humidity can cause reduced air flow
through the filter. Therefore/ flow rates should
be measured before and after the sampling period.
1. "Rules and Regulations/" Federal Register/
Vol 36/ No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C., (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22388.
2. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air
Sampling and Analysis," American Public Health
Association, Washington, D.C., 1972, p 356.
3. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD-0741, .
Office of Technical Information and Publications,
Research Triangle Park/ North Carolina, 1971,
p 17.
11103 91 BENZENE SOLUBLE ORGANICS - HI-VOL BENZENE EXTRACTION
An 8% aliquot of the filter is placed in a soxhlet
extractor and extracted with 75 ml of benzene for 6 h.
The benzene is evaporated and the residue is weighed and
reported in aerometric units; yg/m . Errors may result
from non-volatile material in the benzene used for
extraction.
1. Stanley, T. W., J. E. Meeker and M. J. 'Morgan, (1967),
Environ. Sci. and Tech. 1, (11), 927.
2. "Air'Quality Data for 1967," EPA APTD-0741, Office
of Technical Information and Publications/ Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina, 1971, pp 17-18.
-------
11201 81 SOILING INDEX CCOH) - TAPE SAMPLER TRANSMITTANCE
Air is drawn throxigh a 1 in. diameter spot on a con-
tinuous strip of filter paper. The measurement is based
on light transmission through the spot having the col-
lected matter on it,1 and reported in COH's (coefficient
of haze) per 1000 linear foot of sampled air. The
standard is a clear spot on the paper. The inlet air
funnel must be kept upside down, and sampling lines
must be kept short.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book-
of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 420.
2. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA APTD-0741, Office
of Technical Information and Publication, Research
Triangle Park,^North Carolina, 1971, p 20.
11202 91 SOILING INDEX (RUD) - TAPE SAMPLER - REFLECTANCE
The sampling procedure is similar to that of 11201 81.
Measurement of .the soiling is based on light reflectance
from the spot and is reported in RUD's (reflectance
unit density).
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book
of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 420.
11203 11 LIGHT SCATTER NEPHELOMETER
Air enters an optically black metal tube at 5 cfm. Light
of 410 nm is scattered from particles in the air stream.
The amount of light scattered at 90° from the main beam
is measured by a photomultiplier tube.
11302 91 RADIOACTIVE-GROSS-BETA-HI-VOL PROPORTIONAL COUNTER
The radioactive matter on a filter paper is counted with
a beta sensitive detector to establish the gross concen-
tration of beta emitters in the sampled ambient air. The
daughter products of natural radon and thoron in the at-
mosphere can be minimized by waiting three days until they
-------
have decayed. A self-absorption correction must be made
if inert matter on the filter interferes.
1. Intcrsociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling and
Analysis," American Public Health Association, Wash., D.C.,
1972, p 379. ' •
2. Settler, L. R. and G. I. Coats, (1964), "The Determi-
nation of Airborne Radioactivity,'" Amer. Tnd. Hygiene
Assoc., J. 22, 64.
3. Schulte, H. F., Monitoring Airborne Radioactivity,
"Air Pollution," Vol II, 2nd Ed., A. C. Stern, Ed.,
Academic Press, New York, N. Y., 1968, p 393.
-------
12101-12185 ATOMIC ABSORPTION (AA)
Aliquots of samples from the low temperature ashing
procedure are sprayed into a reducing flame by an
atomizer, where metal ions a.re reduced to the atomic
state. The atoms absorb monochromatic light pro-
duced by a lamp having a cathode made of the element
to be measured. The light absorbed by the atoms in
the flame is a measure of their concentration. The
influence of one element on the excitation potential of
- .another does not interfere. The analysis of Al, Sb,
- 4
•>- ', ks, Be, Bi, Ba, Cd, Ca, Cr, Co, Cu, Fe, Pb, Mn, Mo,
Ni, Hg, Sn, Ti, V, and Zn is. done by AA. The AA
is more sensitive than emission spectra for most
metals.
1- VI. Slavin, "Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy,"
Interscience Publishers, Iflew York, 1968, pp 69-74.
2. Perkin Elmer Corp., Methods Manual-Analytical
Methods for Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry,
The Perkin Elmer Corp., 1968.
3. F. J. Welcher, Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis,
D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc., Princeton, New Jersey,
1966, p 105.
4. Thompson, R. J., G. B. Morgan, and L. J. Purdue,
(1970) , "Analysis of Selected Elements in Atmospheric
Particulate Matter by Atomic Absorption," Atomic
Absorption Newsletter 9f (No. 3), 55.
12102-12185 EMISSION SPECTRA
A solution containing metallic ions is placed between
two electrodes and subjected to 13-15 kilovolts AC
discharge. The spark so created generates enough
heat to atomize the ions and the high voltage excites
many electrons per atom. Spectra characteristic of
each element are formed when the electrons return to
-------
their normal energy levels. Internal standards are
used to reference a known spectral line so that other
lines can be located.. NASN uses indium and yttrium
o.s internal standards'. Metals >as Sb, Be, Bif Ba,
Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Fe, Pb, Mn, Mo, Ni, Sn, Ti, Sin, V,
and Zn are analyzed by emission spectra.
1. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, J. A. Dean, "In-
strumental Methods of Analysis," D. Van Nostrand
Company, Inc. 4th Edition, 1965, p 280.
2. P. J. Welcher,"Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis,"
D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc., Princeton, New Jersey,
1966, p 141.
3. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD 0741, (1971),
Office of Technical Information and Publication, Research
Triangle Park, N.C., 1971, p 19.
12102-12185 LOW TEMPERATURE ASHING PROCEDURE
Particulates are ashed to remove organic matter. A 1 or
2 in. by 7 in. strip of the exposed glass filter (or a
composite of 5-8 strips) is heated at 150°C for 1 h. at
1 torr with an 02 flow of 3000 ml/h. The ashed filter
is fluxed for 3 h. with 8 ml of 20% HC1 and 32 ml of
40% HN03. The acid extract is concentrated to 1 or 2
ml by evaporation, centrifuged, and the residue is
washed three times with dilute HC1. Samples from non-
urban air are then diluted with distilled H20 to 3 ml/2
in. strip and samples from urban air are diluted to 4.4
2
ml/9 in. of filter taken. Samples so prepared are
ready for emission spectra analysis,' but must be diluted
10 fold for AA analysis.
1. Thompson, R. J., G. B. Morgan and L. J. Purdue,
(1970) "Analysis of Selected Elements in Atmospheric
Particulate Matter by Atomic Absorption," Atomic
Absorption Newsletter 9, 54.
-------
8
12102-12185 MUFFLE FURNACE PROCEDURE
Prior to the invention of the low temperature- asher,
organic material was removed by heating samples to
500°C for 1 h. in a muffle furnace. Samples are then
extracted twice for 1 h. with 40 ml of 1:1 redistilled
HNO3 at a temperature just below boiling. The solution
is filtered, evaporated to 4 ml and diluted to 10.4
ml with H20. The samples are then analyzed by the
emission spectrograph. Metals as Sb, As, Be, Bi, Cd,
Cr, Co, Cu, Fe, Pb, Mn, Mo, Ni> Sn, Ti, V, and Zn are
measured by this procedure. This procedure may volatilize
some portion of some of the metals and thus result in
an unknown fraction recovered.
-------
12103 93 ARSENIC - HI-VOL NASN-ARSINE-COLORIMETRIC
The arsenates and oxides of arsenic are extracted from a
2 in. square exposed filter by digestion for 1 hr with .
30 ml of 6 N HC1 at 90°C, and then reduced to the trivalent
state with KI and SnCl2. Arsine is then generated by Zn
and HC1 Gutzeit procedure. The evolved arsine passes
through a H2S scrubber and into an absorber containing silve
diethyldithiocarbamate. The resulting red complex is
measured spectrophotometrically at 535 nm. Antimony like-
wise forms stibine which also complexes with the- carbamate
but at low concentrations does not interfere with arsenic
determination. High concentrations of Ni, Cu, Cr/ and
Co interfere with arsine formation. Many interferences
can be minimized by using an internal standard of added
arsenic.
1. Inter society Committee, '.'Methods of Air Sampling and
Analysis," American P;iblic Health Association, Wash., B.C.,
1972, p 289.
12142 92 MERCURY - ACID IC1 ATOMIC ABSORPTION
This is a flameless AA technique. The total mercury is
collected through a glass impinger in 30 ml of 0.1N
acidic iodine monochloride at a flow-rate of 200 ml/min.
HglT is reduced to elemental mercury by hydroxylamine
hydrochloride in basic solution which is aerated to
vaporize the mercury. The vapor is passed into a quartz
absorption cell where it absorbs light at 253.7 nm. This
method is not applicable to atmosphere containing less than
3
50 ng I!g/m of air due to high and erratic-blanks.
1. Hatch, R. W. and W. L. Ott, (1968), "Determination
of Sub-Microgroia Quantities of Mercury by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry," Anal. Chem. 40, p 2085.
2. Lynch, A. L., R. F. Stalzer, and D. T. Lefferts, (1968),
"Methyl and Ethyl Mercury Compounds — Recovery from Air
and Analysis," Am. Ind. Hygiene Assoc. J., 79.
-------
10
12202 91 FLUORIDE-III-VOL WILLARD-KINTER/SPECIFIC ION ELECTRODE
The Willard-Winter distillation is carried out to remove
interfering ions. Two 1 3/4 in. diameter circles of the
filter are placed in a platinum dish, covered with 10 ml of
> •
Ca(OII)2 suspension (2.5% Ca by weight), and evaporated to
dryness over a steam bath. The residue is heated for
30 min. in an oven at 150°C, and ignited in a muffle
furnace at 550°C for 5-6 h. The ash is mixed with
Ig AgC104 and steam distilled using 10 ml of 60% HC104
at 135°C. A total of 190 ml of distillate is collected.
The fluoride ion concentration is then measured with a
specific ion electrode. See 42513 91.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol lu, Interscience
Publishers, Inc., New York, N.Y., p 200.
12203 91 CHLORIDE-HI-VOL-THIOCYANATE
Chloride in the aqueous extract of the hi-vol oarticulate
sample forms mercuric chloride and liberates SCN ion
from mercuric thiocyanate. The SCN~ ion forms a colored
j.j. j. • • —
complex with Fe ion from ferric ammonium sulfate. The
complex is measured colorimetrically at 416 run.
1. R. B. Fisher, "Quantitative Chemical Analysis,"
W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, Pa. 1957, p 238.
2. Morgan, G. B., E. C. Tabor, C. Golden, and H. Clements,
Automated Laboratory Procedure for the Analysis of Air
Pollutants 66-p 108B, Technicon Industrial Systems,
Tarrytown, N.Y., p 536.
12301 91 AMMONIUM - HI-VOL NESSLER "
Ammonium ion is removed from an 8% aliquot of the filter by
fluxing the filter in 50 ml of II20 for 30 min, then placed
in a Nessler tube with 4 ml of Nessler reagent. Should
-------
11
the solution become cloudy, Rochelle salt solution (10g of
KNaC4H4Og.4II20 in 20.0 ml of .01N NaOH) is added dropwiso
with shaking. The absorption is read using a No. 54 filter
with a 50 ml glass cell, using a reagent blank as reference.
(Rochelle salt prevents Ca and Mg precipitation at the high
pH of the Nessler reagent).
1. M. B. Jacobs, (I960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience
Publishers, Inc., New York, p 216.
2. G. B. Morgan, E. C. Tabor, C. Golden, and H. Clements
Automated Laboratory Procedures for the Analysis of Air
Pollutants 66-p 108B, Technicon Industrial Systems,
Tarrytown, N. Y., p 536.
12301 92 AMMONIUH-HI-VGL SODIUM PHENOLATE
Ammonium ions are extracted from a 3/4 in. by 8 in. strip
of the exposed filter by fluxing with 25 ml of H2O. The
filtrate is diluted to 50 ml and sodium phenolate and
sodium hypochlorite are added producing a blue complex when
pH is above 7.0. The absorbance is read spectrophotonietrica
at 626 nm.
1. Russell, J. A., (1944), "The Colorimetric Estimation
of Small Amounts of Ammonia by the Phenol-Hypochlorite
Reaction," J. Biol. Chem. 156, 457.
2. Morgan, G. B., E. C. Tabor, C. Golden, and H. Clements,
• Automated Laboratory Procedure for the Analysis of Air
Pollutants 66-p 108B, Technicon Industrial Systems,
Tarrytown, N. Y., p 536.
3. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD 0741,
Office of Technical Information and Publication, Research
Triangle Park, N.C., 1971, p 18.
-------
12
1230G 91 niTrj\TE-III-VOL 2,4 XYLENOL
Nitrate nitrates 2,4-xylenol. The nitrated 2,4-xylcnol
is separated from other water soluble colored substances
by NaOH and toluene. A 3/4 in. strip of the filter is
fluxed in 25 ml of H20, filtered (Whatman No. 1), and washed
until 50 ml of filtrate is obtained. A 5 ml sample and
15 ml of 85% H2SO are mixed, cooled, and 1 ml of 1% xylenol
is added. The solution is heated at 60°C for 0.5 h and
diluted to 80 ml. Then, 10 ml of toluene is added and the
mixture is shaken for 2 min. in a separatory funnel. The
lower layer is discarded, 10 ml of 0.4N NaOH added, and
the funnel again shaken for 5 min. The lower aqueous layer
is drawn through cotton into a cuvette. The absorbance
is measured at 435 nm.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air Pollutants,
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare 999-AP-
11, Robert A. Taft "Sanitary'"Engineering Center, Cincinnati,
Ohio, May 1965, p 1-1.
2. Pate, J. B., E. C. Tabor, (1962), "Analytical Aspects
of Glass Fiber Filters," Am. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J. 23.
3. Barnes, H., (1950), "A Modified 2,4-Xylenol Method for
Nitrate Estimation," Analyst 75, 388.
12306 92 NITRATE-HI-VOL REDUCTION-DIAZO COUPLING
The nitrate is reduced to nitrite by alkaline hydrazine,
converted to HNO, which diazotizes sufanilamide, and couplec
£+
with N (l-naphthyl)-ethylenediamine dihydrochloride which
absorbs light at 535 nm.
1. Morgan, G. B., E. C. Tabor, C. Golden and H. Clements,
Automated Laboratory Procedure for the Analysis of Air
Pollutants 66, p 108B, Technicon Industrial System,
Tarrytown, N. Y., p 536.
-------
. 13
2. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD 0741,
Office of Technical Information and Publication, Research
Triangle Park, N.C., 1971, p 18.
1230693 NITRATE-III-VOL SPECIFIC ION'ELECTRODE '
The aqueous extract of a hi-vol glass fiber filter is
analyzed for nitrate ion by means of a specific ion
electrode.
12345 91 PHOSPHATE - HI-VOL-MOLYBDATE • STANNOUS CHLORIDE
Phosphate ions in the water extract of the filter are
precipitated as ammonium molybdophosphate in an acid
medium, which is then reduced to a molybdenum blue com-
plex with stannous chloride. The absorbance is read at
650 nm.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of '
ASTH Standards," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, pp 41-49.
2. Lundell, G.' E. and J. I. Hoffman, (1923), "Notes on
the Determination of Phosphate," Ind. and Eng. Chem. Anal.
Ed. 15, 71.
12403 91 SULPATE - HI-VOL COLORLMETRIC
Water soluble sulfate is reacted with excess reagent con-
taining equivalent amounts of methylthvmol blue and BaCl0.
++ = =
Ba and SO. ions form BaSO. leaving a [SO.] equivalent
of free methylthymol blue. If the pH is changed from 2.8
to 12.4 by KOH, Ba ion forms a chelate with the free dye.
The unchelated dye is yellow and absorbs light at 460 nm.
1. Morgan, G. B., E. C» Tabor, C. Golden and II. Clements
Automated Laboratory Procedure for the Analysis of Air
Pollutants 66, p 108B, Technicon Industrial Systems
Tarrytown, N. Y., p 538.
-------
14
2. A. L. Lazrus, K. C. Hill and J. P. Lodge, "A New
Colorimctric Microdctcrmination of Sulfate Ion in Raiiwatcr,"
personal communication, Division of Atmospheric Sur-
veillance, Research Triangle Park, N.C., 1965.
3. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD '0741, " '
Office of Technical Information and Publication, Research
Triangle Park, N.C., 1971, p 19.
12403 92 SULPATE-HI-VOL TURBIDU1ETRIC
The water soluble sulfate extract of the filter forms BaS04
in a BaCl2 solution. Suspended BaSO, particles scatter
light, and the diminished intensity of a light beam is
measured by a turbidimeter.
An aliquot of the filter extract is chosen so that the
sample contains- the equivalent of 1 to 20 pg/m of S07.
To the sample diluted to 20 ml, 1 ml of ION HC1 is'added,
followed by 4 ml of a glycerol/absolute ethanol solution
(l:2v/v). After mixing, the absorbance is measured at
500 nm and compared with H2O. Then 0.25g of BaCl2 crystals
are added and shaken to dissolve the crystals. After
standing for 40 min. at 20°.C, the absorbance is measured
again.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air Pollutants,"
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare 999 AP-11,
Robert A. Taft Sanitary Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio,
May 1965, p 1-1.
2. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of
ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, pp 50-53.
12602 91 HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION - HI-VOL pH METER
The water soluble extract of the filter is tested by a
pH meter and the hydrogen ion is calculated from the pH
value.
-------
17242 91 BEHZOLMPYRENE - HI-VOL THIN LAYUR CHrArIATOG?J\?Iiy
This is a technique whereby the benzene soluble organics
arc separated by means of thin layer chromatography. The
isolated benzo(A)pyrene as indicated by comparison with a •
standard is removed from the thin layer plate and excited
with radiant energy of 470 ran. The fluorescence is measured
at 540 nm.
1. Intersociety Committee/ "Methods of Air Sampling and
Analysis," American Public Health Association, Wash., D.C.,
1972, p 159.
-------
21101 51 TOTAL DUSTFALL r BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC
A 1 gallon container having a mouth diameter of 4.4 in.
is placed in a copper can (5 in. high and 5 in. diameter) on
stand,(4 ft. above a roof and four stories from the ground).
Five hundred to 1500' ml of antifreeze-treated water is placed
in the container. The collected sample is filtered using
Whatman No. 4111 paper which is then dried and weighed.
The filtrate is evaporated at 105°C, the residue weighed,
and both weights added for total dustfall.
1. M. B. Jacobs, "The Chemical Analysis of Air Pollutants,"
Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience Publishers, Inc.,
New York, N.Y., (1960), p 37. -
21101 71 TOTAL DUSTFALL - BUCKET - GRAVIMETRIC (APCA)
The dust falls into a glass or stainless steel container,
5 in. in diameter and 10-15 in. high. The top of the con-
tainer is maintained at from 8 to 50 ft. above the ground
and 4 ft. above any surface. Neighboring roof surfaces
must subtend an angle of 30° or less from the horizontal.
Distilled water should be maintained in the container and
a quaternary ammonium salt is added (1 to 2 mg/1) to suppress
algal growth. Isopropyl alcohol may be added as antifreeze.
The 30 day sample is filtered through a 20 mesh screen to
remove extraneous material and treated as method 21101 51
except that samples having antifreeze are evaporated to
dryness at 105°C, 300 ml distilled water is added, and the
sample again evaporated to dryness.
1. "Recommended Standard Method for Containing Dustfall
Survey (APMI-a)," (Nov. 1955), APCA Journal 5, (No. 3),
p 176.
21101 81 DUSTFALL - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (ASTM)
A 6 in. diameter, 12-18 in. high, glass, plastic* or
stainless steel cylinder, mounted with a bird ring, is
-------
17
uoc to collect the dustfall. The analysis is the same as
method 21101 71.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (.1971) , "Annual Book of .
ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 425.
2. Nader, J. S., (1958), "Dust Retention Efficiencies
of Dustfall Collector," APCA Journal 8, p 35.
21102 81 ORGANIC FRACTION - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (ASTM)
The water insoluble residue and the filter from method
21101 81 are dried, weighed, placed in a soxhlet apparatus,
and extracted for 2 h using 50 ml of benzene. Benzene
should remain in the flask at all times. The remaining
residue and paper are dried at 105°C and weighed to
report the weight loss as organic fraction, BSO (benzene
soluble organics). •
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of
ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 427.
21113 71 INORGANIC FRACTION - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (APCA)
-------
18
21113 81 IIIOPvGANIC FRACTION - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (ASTM)
The combined weight of water insolubles and soluble
matter corrected for any solid present in a distilled water
blank.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of
ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing-and Material,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 428.
21114 71 WATER SOLUBLE WEIGHT - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (APCA)
The sample is filtered through a 20 mesh screen to remove
extraneous material and if antifreeze was used, the filtrate
is evaporated to dryness over a steam bath or in an oven
at 105°C. Thirty ml of distilled H20 is added, heated to
boil, and the sample filtered through an alundum crucible.
If no antifreeze was used, the sample is adjusted to 300
ml and filtered through the crucible. The filtrate is
evaporated to a small volume. The filtrate is placed in
a weighed platinum crucible (if fluoride is present) or
else a borosilicate dish and evaporated to 25 ml. It is
evaporated slowly to dryness on a steam bath or in an oven
at 105°C. Dryings are repeated for 3 h periods until
constant weight is obtained.
1. "Recommended Standard Method for Continuing Dustfall
Survey, (APMI-a)," (Nov. 1955), APCA Journal 5 (No. 3), 177.
21114 81 WATER SOLUBLE WEIGHT - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (ASTM)
The soluble material, described as the water soluble weight
in method 21101 81,is evaporated in a tared platinum dish if
fluoride or caustic materials are present or else a boro-
-v •
silicate dish. The dish is heated slowly until 25 ml
remain. Then a steam bath or a thermoregulated hot plate
is used to evaporate to dryness at a temperature of 99°C.
Drying is continued in an oven at 105°C until a constant
-------
19
weiyht in obtained. Tha water soluble weight: is the
difference between this constant weight and tiare.
1. V>Tater, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971) , "Annual Book
of AST11 Standards," American Society for Testing and
Materials,. Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 427.
21115 51 WATER INSOLUBLE WEIGHT - BUCKET .JACOBS METHOD
The collected sample is filtered through a 20 mesh sieve,
and the coarse material discarded. The insoluble material
in the sample is collected on a 9 cm Whatman No. 41 H
filter. Alternatively, a. tared gooch crucible equipped with
a light asbestos mat or an alundum crucible could be used.
The weight of the dry solid is reported as water in-
soluble weight.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience Publiche
Inc., Hew York, N.Y., p 38.
21115 71 WATER INSOLUBLE WEIGHT - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (APCA)
The water soluble weight was obtained to report the total
dustfall, method 21101 71. The sample is filtered
through a 20 mesh screen, the volume made to 300 ml, boiled,
and filtered through a weighed 35 ml alundum filter crucible.
The crucible is dried in an oven at 105°C for 3 h, cooled,
and the drying is repeated to constant weight. The increased
weight of the crucible is reported as water insoluble weight.
1. "Recommended Standard Method for Continuing Dustfall
Survey (APMI-a), (Nov. 1955), APCA Journal 5 (No. 3), 176.
21115 81 WATER INSOLUBLE WEIGHT - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (ASTM)
The material collected on a dried and weighed filter from
method 21101 81, is dried in a weighing bottle overnight
at 105°C. The net weight less the weight of the filter
paper and weighing bottle is the water insoluble weight.
-------
20
1. ,,'atcr, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Dook
ol AGTM Standards," American Society for Testing and Matcria
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 213, p 427.
2111G 71 TOTAL WEIGHT ASH - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (APCA)
The water insolubles and the water solubles are ignited
in a dish at red heat for 20 to 30 min, cooled in a
desiccator, reheated and cooled until a constant weight
is obtained. The dish must have been pretreated in the
same manner. The excess weight is the total weight ash.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience
Publishers Inc., New York, N.Y., p 47.
21116 81 TOTAL WEIGHT ASH - BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC (ASTM)
The total weight ash is the weight of the insoluble and
soluble materials after the removal of BSO and the com-
bustible materials.
-------
i.JL
22311 92, 2212C 92, 22132 92, and 22.136 92
COPPER, IKON, MANGANESE, NICKEL - BUCKHT ATOMIC APSORPTION
Thirty ml of IIN03/II20 (1/1) is added to the ductfall
in a beaker, heated below boiling for 1 h, and concentrated
to remove excess UNO.,: The solids are removed by
centrifuging. The solution is analyzed by AA.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of
ASTM Standards/" American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 678.
22403 81 SULFATES - BUCKET TURBIDIMETRIC (ASTM)
Turbid samples are filtered and the temperature adjusted
to between 15 and 30°C. Ten ml glycerin solution (glycerin/
H20, 1/1), and 5 ml of NaCl solution (24Og of NaCl and 20 ml
cone. HCl/liter) are added to 50 ml of the sample. A 40 mm
cell filled witK the treated sample is used as the blank
sample by setting the colorimeter to zero absorbance at 380-
400 nm. The cell sample is combined with the remaining
treated sample, 0.3g of BaCl^^H-O crystals added, and the?
mixture stirred for 1 min. After standing for 4 min the
mixture is stirred again for 15 sec. The cell is then
filled with the turbid solution and absorbance measured
again at the same wavelength as the blank sample.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of
ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 51.
22G02 81 pH (DUSTFALL) - BUCKET pH METER
Total acidity of the water soluble portion of the total dust-
fall is obtained by using a pH meter, or less accurately
by use of pH test paper,
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience Publisher
Inc., New York, N.Y., p 40.
-------
22
25101 81 DUU'iTALL CO.'iPAJSTIBLE-BUCKET GRAVIMETRIC - SOO-DLG.
C. LOSS CA
After the BSO has been remove from the water insoluble
material, the material and the filter paper are ashed at"
500 °C in a tared crucible and the weight loss is reported as,
"Combustibles and volatile participates other than benzene
soluble. "
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book of
ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 428.
-------
: a. w i : I
42101 12
42101 21
«. AIMVJM r.'j-joxicn - I::STPU:IZ:ITAL -
INFRA-RED |
The non-disperive infrared instrument has a sample
cell, a reference cell, and a detector. The detector
is divided by a flexing diaphragm into two equal
cells filled with equal concentrations of CO. The
reference cell is. filled with a CO free air.
When infrared radiation is 'passc^ into the sample
cell some of the radiation is absorbed by CO
in this cell in proportion to the concentration
of CO and the rest is transmitted to the detector.
In the detector, the radiation causes the CO to
expand flexing the diaphragm in proportion to the
transmitted infrared radiation. Since the reference
cell is filled with zero CO air, the reference cell
side of the detector exerts a constant pressure on the
diaphragm. When the CO is introduced into the sample
cell, unequal amounts of residual radiation reaches
the two compartment of the detector causing an unequal
expansion of the detector gas. This unequal expansion
causes the diaphragm to deflect, creating a change of
electrical capacitance in an external circuit, and
ultimately an amplified signal which is suitable for
input to a servo-type recorder. The detector is calibrated
by placing CO standards in the sample cell and recording
the electrical signals.
1. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228, (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22391.
CARBON MONIXIDE - INSTRUMENTAL - COULOMETRIC
Atmospheric air is drawn through a heated £2^5
where
I2 is liberated.
The I2 is directed
into an electrochemical cell where I2 is measured
coulometrically.
1. Beckman Instrumention', Bulletin 3000 4411-4,
Beckman Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, California.
CARBON MONOXIDE - INSTRUMENTAL - FLAME IONIZATION
Ambient air is passed through two gas chromatographic
columns in series, the first retains most pollutants
but pabscs CO and C!l4, and the second passes only
CO. The CO then flows through a Ni catalyst where
-------
it is converted to Cl!4 which is measured by a flame
ionization detector. The resulting measured current
is related to the CO concentration of the input
ambient air by dynamic calibration with known CO
concentration standards.
1. Rotterdam, Warsaw, and Bucharest, "The Status
of Instrumentation in Air Pollution Control," Environ-
mental Control Seminar Proceeding, U.S. Department
of Commerce, (May 5-June A, 1971), p 217.
42102 11 CARBON DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL INFRARED ABSORPTION
This procedure is similar to the NDIR procedure for carbon
monoxide, 42101 11, except that water does not have to
be removed from the air stream.
42401 11 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-WEST GAEKE-COLORIMETIC
A continuous analyzing system is setup such that
the ambient air flows through a glass beaded absorp-
tion column concurrently with 0.02M sodium tetrachloro-
mercurate. Dichlorosulfitomercurate ion is formed
reacted with acid-bleached pararosaniline and
formaldehyde to produce a red-purple pararosaniline
methylsulfonic acid which is quantitatively measured
colorimetrically. The zero (100%T) baseline is
established with pure reagents for 1 h and the in-
strument is then dynamically calibrated with known
S02 concentration standards. Air flow rate and
reagent flow rate must be calibrated and maintained
accurately.
42401 13 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-CONDUCTIHETRIC
Sulfur dioxide is absorbed in acidic H202 whi<"h
oxdizes the S02 to H2S04. The resulting change
in conductivity can be measured, compensated for
temperature, and related to the input S02 concentration
by dynamic calibration with known S02 concentration
standards. However, specificity is poor because any
materials that alter the conductivity of the reagent
are potential interfering agents.
1. Beckmrm Air Quality Acralyzer Operating and
Service Manual, Scientific and Process Inst. Div.,
-------
42401 14
42401 15
42401 16
Fullcrton, California, 1GTW352, (Aug. 1966).
2. Thomas, M.D., (1932), "Automatic Apparatus for
the Determination of Small Concentrations of Sulfur
Dioxide in Air," Anal. Chem. 5, 253.
3. M. B. Jacobs, "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience
Publishers, Inc., New York, N.Y., (I960), p 394.
4. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book
of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 272.
SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-COULOMETRIC
The air to be measured is passed through a cell
containing a neutral buffered iodide or bromide
electrolyte where an electrical current or potential
maintains a constant concentration of free 12 or Br2.
When SC-2 in the input air reacts with the 12 or Br2,
the change in electrical current or potential necessary
to restore or maintain the original concentration of
12 or Br2 (coulometric titration) is a quantitative
measure of the SC>2 input. If the input flow rate is
constant, the S02 concentration can be related to
the electrical signal by dynamic calibration with
known S09 concentration standards.
SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-THOMAS AUTOMETER
The Thomas Autometer is a conductimetric analyzer
developed in 1929. There are later models. The
method is similar to method 42401 13.
SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUHENTAL-GC FLAME PHOTOMETRIC
Chromatographic columns are used to separate S02,
H2S, CS2, and CHjCH. Effluent from the columns is
burned in a hydrogen-rich flame. A photcmultiplier
tube is used to detect the 395 nm emission band
characteristic of sulfur. The electrical signal is
related to the input concentration by dynamic cali-
bration with known S02/ H2S, CS2/ or C1KSH concen-
tration standards.
1. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, and J. A. Dean,
"Instrumental Methods of Analysis," D. Van Nostrand
Company, Inc., 4th Edition, 1965, p 309.
-------
/32401 Jl SULHJR DIOXIDE-DAVIS INSTRUMENT-HYDROGEN PEROXIDE
The Davis instrument is a conductimetric instrument,
and as such, it is iraich like method 42'101 13.
42401 33 SULFUR DIOXIDE-DAVIS INSTRUMENT-SEQUENTIAL-CONDUCTI'^T" C
Water is deionized by passage through an amberlitc
resin column, then its conductivity is measured.
Ambient air, having first passed through a scrubber
of amberlite resin and soda-lime to remove C02/ is
next passed through the deionized water where the S02
. is absorbed. The increased conductivity of the water •
is a measure of the S02 concentration of the air.
1. Thomas, M.D. and J. N. Abersold, (1929), "Automatic
Apparatus for the Determination of Small Concentrations
of Sulfur Dioxide in Air," Anal. Chem. 1, 14.
42401 91 SULFUR DIOXIDE-GAS^UBBLER-WEST-GAEKE-SULFAMIC ACID
Sulfur dioxide is collected in a tetrachlorcmercurate
solution, forming a stable dichlorosulfitomercurate
complex. When acid bleached pararosaniline is added
to the collected S02 together with formaldehyde,
the amino groups (~NHt) form a red violet compound
called pararosaniline methylsulfonic acid which is
measured spectrophotometrically. The method is des-
cribed in the Federal Register. (The NASN procedure,
however, uses 1.725 g/1 sulfamic acid rather than
6 g/1 and does not use EDTA). The sulfamic acid
eliminates interference from oxides of nitrogen.
1. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228,'U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
(Nov. 25, 1971), p 22385.
2. Vest, P. W. and G. C. Gaekc, (1956), "Fixation
of Sulfur Dioxide as Disulfito-Morcurate (II) and
Subsequent Colorimetric Estimation," Anal. Chem. 23,
1819.
3. Intcrsociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 447.
A. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD 0741, Office of
-------
Technical Information and Publication, Research Triangle
Park, N.C., 1971, p 20.
42401 92 SULFUR DIOXIDF.-GAS BUBBLER-WEST-GAEKE
This method is similar to method 42401 91 except
that the sample absorbing reagent is 0.1M TCM,
the starch which is used for standardization is
made without mercuric iodide, and sulfamic acid
is not used except when high concentrations of N02
are expected. The sulfamic acid is added to the
sample after collection.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air Pollutants
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare 999 AP-
11, Robert A. Taft Sanitary Engineering Center, Cincinnati,
Ohio, May 1965, p A-l.
2. Nauman, R. V., et al., (I960), Anal Chem. 32, 1307.
3. West, P.W. and F. OrdovezaT (1962), Anal. Chen. 34,
1324.
42401 93 SULFUR DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-CONDUCTIMETRIC
This manual conductimetric method uses the same
principle as the instrumental conductimetric
method. The absorber is a multiple jet bubbler
system and the sampling is not continuous. The
details are described in the reference.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 456.
42402 71 HYDROGEN SULFIDE-TAPE SAMPLER AISI LEAD ACETATE PAPER
Filter paper (Whatman, No. 1) is cut into 2 by 4 in. strips,
impregnated with Pb(C2H302) (10g/100 ml H2O plus 5 ml
CH.jCOOH) and dried in H,,S free air. Air is pumped over the
strips. A concentration of 0.025 mg/1 of H2S gives a
positive test for H2S. The stain on the paper is com-
pared with a color chart for II,S concentration.
£
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Analytical Chemistry of Indus
trial Poisons, Hazards, and Solvents," Chemical Analysis,
Vol 1, Intersciencc Publishers, Inc., New York, N.Y.,
p 108.
-------
4240? 91 HYDROGEN SULFIDE-GAS BUBBLER METHYLENE BLUE
(100 nil tuba + orifice)
Air is bubbled through a Ccl(OH)2 solution in a large im-
pinger at 1 cfm for 30 min. Ferric chloride solution and
p-aminodimethylaniline test solution are added to the im-
pinger and agitated. The sample is diluted and allowed to
stand for 30 min. The sulfide ion forms a methylene blue
complex. The absorbance of the sample is compared with a
standard which consists of 45 ml of the Cd(OH)2 solution,
amine test solution, and the ferric chloride.
1. Intersocicty Committee/ "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 426.
2. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience
Publishers, Inc, New York, N.Y., p 185.
3. Lodge, J. P., et al. , (1966), "The Use of Hypodermic
Needles as Critical Orifice," J. Air Poll. Control Assoc.
1£, 197.
4. Scaringelli, F. P., S. A. Frey, B. E. Saltzman, (1967),
"Evalxiation of Teflon Permeation Tubes for use with
Sulfur Dioxide," Am. Ind. Hyg. jg'jfoc. J. 28, 260.
42410 71 SULFATION RATE-LEAD PLATE GRAVIMETRIC (HUEY)
The Pb02 is converted to PbSO^ by the S02 in the ambient
air and the SOT is removed by Na^CO., and boiling H?0.
Barium chloride is used to precipitate the SO^ as BaSO^.
The dried BaSO.. is weighed and the SO, equivalence is
ri ^
reported.
-------
29
72 SULTATION RATE-LT.AD PLV.E COLORIMETRIC (HUEY)
42410 73 SULFATION RATE-LEAD PLATE TURBIDIMETRIC (HUEY)
Sulfur dioxide reacts with lead peroxide to form lead
sulfate. The amount of SOT formation per unit time is
the sulfation fate. The SOT is removed from the plate
by boiling Na2C03 solution and the p!I is adjusted between'
2.5 and 4.0 so that sulfaspcnd or sulfaver precipitates
the S0~f. The absorbance of the stirred precipitate is
read at 450 nm, turbidimetrically.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling and
Analysis," American Public Health Association, Wash., D.C.,
1972, p 442.
2. Huey, N. A., M. A. Wallar, and C. D. Robson,
(June 1969) "Field Evaluation of an Improved Sulfation
Measurement System." Paper No. 69-133, Air Pollution
Control Association Annual Meeting.
3. Hickey, H. R., and E. R. Hendrickson, (1965), "A
Design Basis for Lead Dioxide Cylinder," J. Air Poll.
Control Assoc. 15, 409.
-------
2V. 10 1'' CULrATION RATE-LEAD PLY.H COLORIiMETRIC (IIUEY)
42410 73 SULFATION RATE-LEAD PLATE TURBIDIMETRIC (HUEY)
Sulfur dioxide reacts with lead peroxide to form lead
sulfate. The amount of SOT formation per unit time is
the sulfation rate. The SCrr is removed from the plate
by boiling .Na^CO., solution and the pH is adjusted between'
2.5 and 4.0 so that sulfaspend or sulfaver precipitates
the SO^. The absorbance of the stirred precipitate is
road at 450 nm, turbidimetrically.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling and
Analysis," American Public Health Association, Wash., D.C.,
1972, p 442.
2. Huey, N. A., M. A. Wallar, and C. D. Robson,
(June 1969) "Field Evaluation of an Improved Sulfation
Measurement System." Paper No. 69-133, Air Pollution
Control Association Annual Meeting.
3. Hickey, H. R. , and E. R. Ilendrickson, (1965), "A
Design Basis for Lead Dioxide Cylinder," J. Air Poll.
Control Assoc. 15, 409.
-------
31
1. Wilcdon, 13. H. and r. J. McConncl, (1934), "The
Measurement of Atmospheric Sulfur Pollution by Means
of Lead Peroxide, J. Soc . Chem. Ind . 53 , 385,
2. Kainzer, A., (1957), _Zcjr.Gnt-Kalh-Gyis 10, 281.
3.. "Standard I-lethods for the Examination of Water and
Waste-water," 12th Ed., American Public Health Assoc.,
Inc., New York, N. Y. , 1965, p 147-151.
42410 94 SULFATION RATE-LEAD CANDLE
This method substitutes K2
42410 91.
POTASSIUM CARBONATE (NASN)
for Na2C03 in method
42410 95 SULFATION RATE-LEAD CANDLE TURBIDIMETRIC
Gaseous and particulate fluoride in ambient air are
collected by filtration and chenisorption on filter
paper impregnated with sodium .formate. Water soluble
fluorides are extracted from the filter, made basic
with Na-^CO.,, and coiuplexed with citrate ion to reduce
the iron and aluminum interference. The fluoride ion
concentration is measured with a specific ion electrode.
1. Thompson, R. J. , T. B. McMullen "and G. B. Morgan,
(1971), "Fluoride Concentrations in the Ambient Air,"
J. Air Poll. Control Assoc. 21, 484.
42513 91 FLUORIDE HI-VQL SPECIFIC ION ELECTRODE
The concentration of fluoride in an aqueous sample is
measured by means of the fluoride-specific ion electrode.
1. Elfers, L. A. and Decker, C. E., (1968), Anal. Chem.,
Vol. 40,'p 1658.
2. Frant, M. S. and J. V7. Ross, Jr., (1966), "Rioctrodc for
Sensing Fluoride Ion Activity in Solution," Science 154,
1553.
-------
•32
4?.GOi 13 NITRIC o:: rDE-TnsTPvUrr^T.'.L COLOIUMETRIC
NO is converted to N0~ by passing the ainbient air through
an aqueous KMn04 solution, The resulting N0? is measured
colorimetrically. An independent measurement of the an'oicnt
N02 concentration is required^. This value, subtracted
from the first, gives a value for the HO concentration. Sec-
Methods 42602 11 and 42602 12 for M02 measurenen4: procedure.
1. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book
of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and
Materials," Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 523.
2. Rogers, L. M., (1958), "Nitric Oxide and Nitrogen
Dioxide in the Los Angeles Atmosphere," J. of Air Poll.
Control Assoc. 8, 124.
3. Saltzman, B. E. , (1954), "Colorimeteric llicro-Determinati-
of Nitrogen Oxide in the Atmosphere, Anal. Chem., 26, 1949.
4. Thomas, M. D., et.al., (195G), Automatic Apparatus
for Determination of Nitric Oxide and Nitrogen Dioxide
in the Atmosphere, Ana.!. Chem. 28, 1810.
42601 14 NITRIC OXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL CHEMILUMINESCENCE
When O.j reacts with NO to form NO-, some of the liberated
energy appears in the form of light of 600-875 nm. The
reaction is extremely rapid. The instrument generates
an excess of 0^ such that the quantity of light emitted%
from the reaction and measured by the instrument, is a
direct measure of the NO concentration in the sampled
air. See also 42602 14.
1. Fontijn, A., A. J. Sabadell and J. R. Ronco, (1970),
Anal.Chem. 42, 575.
2. Stevens, R. K., et.al., "Field Performance Characteristic
of Advanced Monitors for Oxides of Nitrogen, Ozone, Sulfur
Dioxide, Carbon Monoxide, Methane, and Nonmethane Hydro-
carbons," Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, N.C.; presented at the APCA Meeting, June 1972.
-------
33
42G01 !)1 tiTTUIC OXIDLI-GAS IiUi:ULEH SALTZilAH (100 111 TUDi; + ORIFICJ:)
Nitrogen o::ide is o::idizcd to N02 by KlinO, and the
Method 42602 72 is fo]lowed.
1. Intcrsocicty Corvnittee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Wash., D.C., 1972, p 329.
42602 11 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL COLORII1ETRIC
The Lyshkow modification of the Griess-Saltzman reagent
is used in various continuous N00 analyzers. Users
£*
shoxild consult the manufacturer's literature for details
of reagent preparation.
1. "Rules and Regulations" Federal Register, Vol 38,
Ho. 110, USGPO Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973), p 15176.
2. Lyshkow, ~N. A., (1965), "A Rapid Sensitive Coloriir.etric
Reagent for Nitrogen Dioxide in Air" j. Air Poll. Control
Assoc. 15 (No. 10) 481.
42602 12 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-COLORIMETRIC
The original Griess-Saltzman reagent is used in
various continuous NC>2 analyzers. Users should
consult the manufacturer's literature for details
of reagent preparation.
1. "Rules and Regulation," Federal Register, Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO, Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973) p 15176.
2. Saltzman, B. E., (1954) "Colorimetric Micro
Determination of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere"
Anal. Chem. 26, 1949.
42602 13 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAI,-COULOMETRIC
Air to be measured is passed through a cell containing
neutral buffered iodide-iodine solution causing an
established equilibrium between iodine and iodide
-------
to be unbalanced. The current required to re-
establish the equilibrium (coulometric titration)
is a measure of the input NO? concentration. If
the input flow rate is constant, the &02 concentration
can be related to the electrical signal by dynamic
calibration with known N02 concentration standards.
42602 14 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-CHEMILUMINESCENCE
The ambient air to be measured is drawn over a heated
catalytic converter which reduces NC>2 to NO. The
*
NO is then analyzed by method 42601 14, and the
original N02 concentration is obtained by subtracting
the concurrent NO concentration.
1. "Rules and Regulation," Federal Register, Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO, Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973) p 15176.
2. NO/NOX/M02 Analyzer Bulletin, Bulletin 4133,
Beckman Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.
42602 71 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-JACOBS-HOCHIIElSER-
50 Ml TUBE + ORIFICE
Ambient air to be measured is bubbled through a
sodium hydroxide solution where N02 forms a stable
solution of sodium nitrite. The nitrite ion pro-
duced is reacted with phosphoric acid, sulfanilarnide,
and N-l naphthylethylenodiamine dihydrochloride,
and measured colorimetrically at 540 nm
42602 72 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-SALTZMAN (50 Ml TUBE +
ORIFICE)
The sample is absorbed in the Griess-Saltzman reagent
and after 15 min the stable pink color is measured
colorimetrically at 550 nm,
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 329.
2. f.altzman, 13. K. , (]954), "Color5metric Micro-
DGtonuLnation oi Nitro
-------
42602 84 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-NASN SODIUM ARSENITE-
OR1FICE
The method ID much like method 42602 71 except for
the absorber fjL.Og/1 of NaAs02) . Ambient air is in-
troduced into :he absorber by means of an orifice
in the bubbler. The orifice is usually not cali-
brated.
1. "Rules and Regulation," Federal Register, Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO, Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973), p 15175.
2. Christie, A. A., R. G. Lidzey, and D. W. F. Radford
(1970), "Field Methods for the Determination of Nitrogen
Dioxide in Air." Analyst 95, 519.
3. Merryman, E. L., et.al., "Effects of NO, C02,
CH^, H20 and Sodium Arsenite.on N02 Analysis,"
presented at the Second Conference on Natural Gas
Research and Technology. Atlanta, Georgia, June 5, 1972,
42602 91 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-JACOBS-HOCHHEISER (100
Ml TUBE + FRIT)
This method is identical to method 42602 71, except
that a fritted bubbler is used instead of an orifice
bubbler and the volume of the absorbing solution is
doubled.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants," U.S. Department of Health, Education,
and Welfare 999-AP-ll, Robert A. Taft Sanitary
Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965, p C-4.
2. Purdue, L. J., et.al., (1972), "Reinvestigation
of the Jacobs-HoclihGiser Procedure for Determining
Nitrogen Dioxide in Ambient Air," Environ. Sci.
and Tech. 6, 152.
42602 94 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-NASN-SODIUM ARSENITE-
FRTT
This method is identical to method 42602 71 except
that l.Og/1 of NaAsO, is added to the absorbing
solution, and a fritted bubbler is used instead of
an orifice bubbler.
-------
1. Christie, A. A., R. G. Lidzcy, and D. VI. F. Radford,
(1970) , "Field. Methods for the Determination of Nitrogen
Dioxide in Air." Analyst 95, 519.
2. Merryman, E. L., et.al., "Effects of NO, C02,
CH,, H00 and Sodium.Arsenite on NO,, Analysis,"
Q. t. ^
presented at the Second Conference on Natural Gas
Research and Technology. Atlanta, Georgia, June 5, 1972.
3. "Selected Method for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants," U.S. Department of Health, Education,
and Welfare 999-AP-ll, Robert A. Taft Sanitary
Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965,
p C-4.
42G03 11 OXIDES OF NITROGEN-INSTRUMENTAL COLORIMETRIC
The total oxides of nitrogen (NO + N02) are measured
by the methods- 42601 11 and 42G02 12. The instrument
reports the total as NOX (total oxides of nitrogen).
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Wash., D.C., 1972, p 325.
42604 91 AMMONIA-GAS BUBBLER- NESSLER RiCAGENT-50 Ml TUBE + ORIFICE
Ammonia reacts with the alkaline HgI2.2KI solution
(Nessler reagent) to produce an orange colored complex
that is measured colorimetrically at 400 to 425 run. The
absorbing solution (3.27N H2S04) is returned to the
laboratory after the sampling period and Nessler reagent
added1 . Rochelle salt is added to pravent Ca and Mg pre-
cipitation.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience
Publishers, Inc., New Yor3c, N. Y., p 216.
2. Morgan, G. B., E. C. Tabor, C. Golden, and H. Clements
Automated Laboratory Procedure for the Analysis of Air
Pollutants 66-p 108B, Tcchnicon Industrial System,
Tarrytown, N. Y., p 538.
-------
37
3. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual
Cook of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 236-331.
42G04 92 AMMONI7v-GAS BUBBLER-SODIUM PIIEHOLATE
The chemical principle used is the same as method
12301 92. Ammonia is collected in 0.0504 N H2S04 as
(NH.JpSO. producing a blue complex with sodium
phenolate and sodium hypochlorite.
1. Russell, J. A., (1944), "The Colorimetric Estimation
of Small Amounts of Ammonia by the Phenol-Hypochlorite
Reaction," J. Biol. Chem., 156, 457.
-------
38
43101 11 TOTAL IIYDHOC; r^ONC-I^STRUni-lUTAL FLAM"
Ambient air is passed into tha instrument where the
organic compounds present are burned in a hydrogen-rich
flama. A sensitive electrometer coupled with a
recorder measures the current resulting from the
ions produced in the flame. The response is
approximately proportional to the number of carbon
atoms in the sample. The analyzer is calibrated using
methane and the results are reported as methane
equivalents.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association/
Wash., D.C., 1972, p 184.
2. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register,
Vol 36, No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Wash., D.C., (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22394.
43102 11 NONMETHANE HYDROCARBONS-INSTRUMENTAL FLAH2 IOHIZATIOM
Measured volumes of air are delivered semicontinuously
(4-12 times per hour) to a hydrogen flame ionization
detector to measure its total hydrocarbon (THC) content,
An aliquot of the same air sample is introduced into
a stripper column which removes H20, CO- and hydro-
carbons other than CH.. CH, and CO are passed
to a gas chromatographic column where '
they are separated. The CH4 is eluted first, and
is measured by the flame ionization detector. This
value subtracted from that for THC results in a
measure of the non-methane hydrocarbon (NMHC) concen-
tration of the sampled air. See also 42101 21.
1. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228, (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22394.
-------
39
43^01 1] n."TlLMir,-X!JSTRU:iEUTAli FLAIIE lOUIZATION
A stripper chromatoyropfric column (charcoal) is used to
rcoDove H^O, C02. and hydrocarbons.other than CH,.
Methane and CO arc then separated by a gas chromato-'
graphic column and the. CH, measured by a hydrogen
flame ionization detector.
1. Water, /Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book
of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 783.
2. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office, Wash., D.C.,
(Nov. 25, 1971), p 22394.
3. Ortman, G. C., (1966), Anal. Chom. 36, 644.
43501 11 ALDEHYDE-INSTRUMENTAL COLORIMSTRIC
This method is an automated MBTH technique. See 43501 91,
-43501 91 ALDEHYDE-GAS BUBBLER MBTH
Water soluble aliphatic aldehydes (measured as formalydchyd
HCIIO) in the ambient air are measured using an aquecus
3- methyl - 2- benzothiazolone hydrazone hydrochloride
(MBTH) \vhich forms an azihe. The excess MBTH is
oxidized with ferric chloride and reacts with the azine
to form a blue cationic dye in acidic media, measurable
at 628 nra, colorimetrically.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air Pollutants;
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Weifare, 999-AP-11
Robert A. Taft Sanitary Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohi
May 1965, p F-l.
2. Sawicki, E., et.al., (1961), Anal. Chem. 33, p 93.
3. Hauser, T. R. and R. L. Cumins, (1964) ibid..- 36, 679.
4. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD-0741, Office
of Technical Information and Publication, Research Triangle
Park, N.C., 1971, p 20.
-------
40
44101 11 TOTAL OXIDAMT-ir:STRUMZXTAL-7vLKALTNE KI
Identical to method 44101 14 except 1 N sodium
hydroxide is used instead of the phosphate buffer
in the absorbing solution.
44101 13 TOTAL OXIDANTS-INSTRUMENTAL-MAST MODEL 742-2
Identical to method 44101-15.
1. Mast, G. M. and H. E. Saunders, (Oct. 1962) , "Research
and Development of the Instrumentation of Oxone Sensing,"
Instrument Soc. of Amer. Trans. , 1, 375.
2. Bufalini, J. J., (1968), "Gas Phase Titration of
Atmospheric Oxone," Environ Sci Technol 2, 703.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02 in
Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chem....37, 779.
44101 14 TOTAL OXIDANT-INSTRUMENTAL-COLORIMETRIC-NEUTRAL KI
Air to be measured is contacted with nc-utral
phosphate buffered potassium iodide. Oxidants
convert the KI to 12 or KIg which is measured
spectrophotometrically at 352 nm. If the input
air flowrate is constant, the color density can
be related to the oxidant concentration. Analyzers
are calibrated dynamically with known standard
concentrations of ozone. Sulfur dioxide inter-
ference may be minimized by use of a CrOo pre-
scrubber, which also causes an NO interference.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air
Sampling and Analysis," American Public Health
Association, Wash., D.C., 1972, p 356.
2. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual
Book of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 518.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02
in Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chen. 37,
779.
-------
44101 11 TOTAL OXIDAMT-IIISTRUMEIITAL-ALKALINE KI
Identical to ir.cthod 44101 14 except 1 N sodium
hydroxide is used instead of the phosphate buffer
in the absorbing solution.
44101 13 TOTAL OXIDANTS-INSTRUMENTAL-MAST MODEL 742-2
Identical to method 44101-15.
1. Mast, G. M. and H. E. Saunders, (Oct. 1962), "Research
and Development of the Instrumentation of Oxone Sensing,"
Instrument Soc. of Amer. Trans., 1, 375.
2. Bufalini, J. J., (1968), "Gas Phase Titration of
Atmospheric Oxone," Environ Sci Technol 2, 703.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02 in
Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chem. 37, 779.
44101 14 TOTAL OXIDAIs'T-SNSTRlJMENTAL-COLORIMETRIC-NEUTRAL KI
Air to be measured is contacted with neutral
phosphate buffered potassium iodide. Oxidants
convert the KI to I2 or KI3 which is measured
spectrophotometrically at 352 nm. If the input
air flowrate is constant, the color density can
be related to the oxidant concentration. Analyzers
are calibrated dynamically with known standard
concentrations of ozone. Sulfur dioxide inter-
ference may be minimized by use of a CrO-, pre-
scrubber, which also causes an NO interference.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air
Sampling and Analysis," American Public Health
Association, Wash., D.C., 1972, p 356.
2. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual
Book of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 518.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02
in Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chen. 37,
779.
-------
•41
44101 15 TOTAL OXIDANT-INSTRUMKMTAL-COULOriETRlC-NEUTiVvL KI
Air to be measured is passed through a cell containing
potassium iodide and tv;o electrodes. Oxidants
convert iodide ions to I2 which is reduced at the
cathode of the cell causing a current to flow thru
1
an external circuit. If the flow rate is constant,
this electrical signal can be related to the input
concentration of oxidants. Analyzers are calibrated
dynamically with known standard concentrations of
ozone.
• o
44101 51 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS EUBBLER-PHENOLPHTHALIN
Phenolphthalin, in the presence of CuS04 is
oxidized to phenolphthalein by ambient air oxidants.
Air is passed through 10 ml of reagent at 800
ml/rain for 10 min. The color is read using a
**
colorimeter and a green filter.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis
of Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10,
Interscience Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y. ,
p 226.
\
44101 81 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER-ALKALINE KI
Oxidants in sampled arobient air are absorbed in
an alkaline KI solution in a buboler. A stable
product is formed which can be stored with little
loss for several days. Analysis is completed
by addition of phosphoric acid-sulfuric acid
reagent, liberating iodine, which is then determined
spectrophotometrically at 352 lira.
1. Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants U.S. DHEW 999-AP-ll, RATSEC Cincinnati,
Ohio, 1965, p E-l.
2. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual
Book of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 391.
3. M. B. Jacobs, (19GO), "The Chemical Analysis of
Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Inter-
science Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y., p 219.
-------
44101 02 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER-FERROUS OXIDATION
Air to be measured is filtered through a Whatman
No. 4 paper at 1 cfia then bubbled throxigh two
impingers in series containing acidified ferrous
ammonium sulfate absorbing solution. Alter sampling
ammonium thiocyanate is added, and the resultant
color is measured with a colorimeter and green filter.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis'of
Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Inter-
science Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y., p 228.
44101 83 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER NEUTRAL BUFFERED KI
This is the reference method for standardization and
calibration of total oxidant and ozone measuring
techniques. Maximum sampling time is 30 minutes.
Sulfur dioxide interferes.
1. Intersocicty Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association/
Wash., D.C., 1972, p 351.
2. "Rules and Regulations" Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office, Wash., D.C.,
(Nov. 25, 1971), p 22392.
3. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air Pollutants
U.S. DI1EW, 999-AP-ll, R. A. Taft Sanitary Engineering
Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965, p D-l.
44103 11 INSTRUMENTAL - TOTAL OXIDANT - 0.2(NO + N02>
-------
43
44201 11 OZONE - i;j5TRU::""TAL-CHEM.rL'j:!INESa-;MCE
Ambient air to be juGasured and ethylcne are
delivered simultaneously to a mixing cell where
ozone reacts wi 'ch the ethylcne to emit light which
is measured by a photomultiplier tube. If the air
and ethyleno flov.'ratcs are constant, the resulting
photomultiplier signal can be related to the input
ozone concentration. Analyzers are calibrated with
known ozone concentration standards.
1, "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register Vol 36,
No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,
D.C., (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22392.
2. "A Cherailuminescence Detector for Ozone Measure-
ment," Bureau of nines Report of Investigation RI-7650,
United States Department of the Interior, U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington/ D.C., 1972.
44201 13 OZONE - INSTRUMENTAL - COULOMETRIC
This method is identical to method 44101 15.
1. Mast, G. M. and H. E. Saunders, (Oct. 1962),
"Research and Development of the Instrumentation of
Ozone Sensing," Instrument Soc. of Amer. Trans.,
1, 375.
T. Bufalini, J. J., (1968), "Gas Phase Titration of
Atmospheric Ozone," Environ. Sci. Tech. 2, 703.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02 in
Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chera. 37, 779.
-------
GUIDELINE SERIES
OAQPS NO. 1.2-ois
DESIGNATION OF UNACCEPTABLE
ANALYTICAL METHODS OF MEASUREMENT
FOR CRITERIA POLLUTANTS
This document supersedes OAQPS 1.2-018
dated 2-8-74 entitled "Designation of Criteria
Pollutant Analytical Methods As Acceptable/Not
Acceptable for Purposes of Data Analysis"
US. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
DESIGNATION OF UNACCEPTABLE ANALYTICAL METHODS
OF MEASUREMENT FOR CRITERIA POLLUTANTS
May 1974
OAQPS Number 1.2-018
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
and
Quality Assurance and Environmental Monitoring Laboratory
National Environmental Research Center
•
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION - 1
CATEGORIES OF ANALYTICAL METHODS 1
REFERENCE AND EQUIVALENCY REGULATIONS 2
ACCEPTABILITY OF ANALYTICAL METHODS 3
DISCUSSION OF CRITERIA POLLUTANTS 3
1. Total Suspended Particulates 3
2. Carbon Monoxide 3
3. Sulfur Dioxide 4
4. Nitrogen Dioxide '4
5. Photochemical Oxidants (Ozone) •; — 4
6. Total Hydrocarbons Corrected for Methane 4
POLLUTANT METHOD CODE -.-- 5
SUMMARY OF REGIONAL OFFICES RESPONSIBILITIES 5
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
-------
Designation of Unacceptable Analytical Methods of Measurement For
X Criteria Pollutants
1^-"-^==^,—.Introduction
ItTTsfwell known tt) aJJ laho^amlyze .±H«».?ir to measure criteria
pollutants that some techniT}UEs-w^wttrtafc»~are better than others.
Because important decisions, such as air quality standards achievement
and State Implementation Plan (SIP) revisions are based on data
j
derived from these methods, it is imperative that only good quality data
be used. Toward this end, we are designating 14 analytical methods
as unacceptable for continued use for these purposes. Accordingly,
tKe. objective of this guideline is to present the rational for those
methods which are being designated unacceptable, and to provide guidance
on the acceptability of methods for future measurements. This will
enable the Regional Offices and the State agencies to make decisions
concerning implementation of monitoring network requirements, consistant
with the objectives and needs of their monitoring program.
Categories of Analytical Methods
Methods for measuring air. pollutants fall into one of three
categories: (1) approved, (2) unacceptable, and (3) those methods
which are neither approved nor unacceptable (unapproved). At present,
the only officially approved methods are the federal reference methods
described in appendices to 40 CFR Part 50, originally promulgated
on April 30, 1971 (36FR8186) with the National Ambient Air Quality
Standards (NAAQS). This Federal Register also introduced the concept
of an "equivalent method", which is any method which can be demonstrated to
be "equivalent" to the reference method. Thus, unapproved methods may
become approved only by demonstrating equivalence to the reference
method.
-------
Those methods designated as unacceptable are not equivalent to the
reference methods because they are known to yield measurements of
poor accuracy and reliability. They are considered to be obsolete.
In each case, suitable analytical methods which produce measurements
of greater reliability are available to replace the unacceptable
methods.
Reference and Equivalency Regulations
Regulations governing the procedures and criteria by which unapprove'd
jnethods may be determined to be equivalent have been proposed in the
Federal Register on October 12, 1973 (38 FR 28438) as a new Part 53.
Pending revision based on comments from interested persons, the new
regulations, when finally promulgated, will require that a method
must be tested according to prescribed procedures and meet certain
prescribed specifications to be approved as an equivalent method. In
essence, manual methods must demonstrate a consistent relationship
to the reference method in side-by-side measurements of ambient air.
Automated methods (automatic air analyzers) must demonstrate such a
consistent relationship as well as meet certain performance specifications
" The nel^regulations will also cover reference methods which are automated
methods (i.e. CO and Oxidants). An analyzer must meet prescribed
performance specifications before it can be determined to be approved
as a reference method.
Unapproved methods must be tested according to the prescribed
procedures and submitted with an application for approval to the QAEMl,
NERC, RTP. Approved methods are to be published in the Federal Register.
The regulations will apply to S02, CO and Oxidants corrected for S02
and
-------
- 3 -
Acceptability of Analytical Methods
Table I lists those analytical methods for which data were
submitted by the States in 1972. We have listed the individual
methods as "apprpved.", "unapproved" and "unacceptable". Use of
methods designated "unacceptable" should be.discontinued as soon
as possible. Data derived from those methods will not be accepted
or used by the NADB after September 1974.
For SOg, CO and Oxidants corrected for SOg and NOg, unapproved ,f
methods may be used until the Equivalency Regulations are promulgated.
After promulgation of those regulations and additional approved
methods become available, unapproved methods may be used only until
they can be replaced with approved methods, and not'later than 5 years
after promulgation after which time only approved methods are to be
used. For NCL and hydrocarbons corrected for methane, guidance for
selecting adequate automated methods may be found in the forthcoming
EpA Environmental Monitoring Series Document (EPA-650/4-74), Guidelines
for Determining Performance Characteristics of Automated Methods
for Measuring Nitrogen Dioxide and Hydrocarbons Corrected for Methane
In Ambient Air.
Until these regulations and guidelines become available, the
following guidance should be considered:
Discussion of Criteria Pollutants
1. TSP - The hi-vol method is the federal reference method
for total suspended particulates. Since the air quality standard
is defined by the method, the hi-volume sampler is the only acceptable
method. No procedures for determining equivalency of alternate methods
have been developed, so all other methods are to be considered unacceptable.
2. Carbon Monoxide - The non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) is the
federal reference method for CO. Automated analyzers based on other
principles have not yet been tested with respect to equivalency,
and are therefore unapproved.
-------
3. Sulfur Dioxide - The manual West-Gaeke - sulfamic acid (24 hour
bubbler) method is the federal referij^e method for SO-. The other
^^K
manual methods listed are unacceptable. The similarly named "West-Gaek-e"
method (SAROAD method code 42401 92) is not equivalent to the
reference method (SAROAD method code 42401 91). Since no continuous
method has yet been tested for equivalency, they are classified as
unapproved.
4. Nitrogen Dioxide - The manual NASN bubbler method is the federal
reference method for N02- However, in the June 8, 1973 issue of
the Federal Register (38 TO 13T74), it was .proposed that the NASN
method be withdrawn as the reference TOthDri -and a new one designated
after testing of proposed candidate methods. Although the method
wa,s not officially withdrawn, the problems with variable collection
efficiency and NO interferences are such that it must be considered
unacceptable. All other methods both manual and continuous
have been classified as unapproved.
5. Photochemical Oxidants (Ozone) - The reference method for photochemica"
oxidants is a continuous chemiluminescent method based on the gas-phase
reaction of ozone with ethylene. This method is specific for ozone.
All other methods listed in Table I are total oxidant methods. Six
of these methods for total oxidants are being designated unacceptable.
While the remaining automated methods are not being designated
unacceptable, strong consideration should be given to replacing them
with the reference method.
6. Total Hydrocarbons Corrected for Methane - This category is
unique in that, while hydrocarbons corrected for methane is a
criteria pollutant, the Ambient Air Quality Standard is only
a guide for achieving the oxidant standard. A gas chromatographic
flame ionization technique is the federal reference method for
hydrocarbons corrected for methane, but this method is difficult and
expensive to use. Other methods are now becoming available and, as
mentioned before, guidance for selection of adequate automated
methods may be obtained in the EPA Environmental Monitoring Series
document (EPA-650/4/74), Guidelines for Determining Performance
Characteristics of Automated Methods for Measuring N02 and Hydrocarbons
fnrrpcted for Methane in the Ambient Air.
-------
Pollutant Method Code
Correct -identification of the Pollutant method is of utmost
'importance in the reporting of air quality data. It will be of little
help to upgrade the West-Gaeke bubbler procedure (SAROAD method code
42401 92) for example* to-the West-Gaeke-Sulfamic Acid method (SAROAD
method code 42401 91) unless the method cades under which the data are
reported to the NADB are also changed. See OAQPS Guideline #1.2-017, for a
description of the analytical technique associated with the SAROAD
method code.
^.After the equivalency regulations are promulgated, the pollutant
"method code will become even more important since there may be a unique
identification code for each method which passes the equivalency testing
and becomes approved as a reference or equivalent method. This new
code may identify not only the method principal but also the instrument
model and manufacturer.
Summary of Regional Office Responsibilities
The Regional Offices should see that those methods designated in
Table 1 as unacceptable are replaced with approved methods as soon as
practical. This will insure adequate data for air quality trend analyses
and compliance with NAAQS after 9/1/74 when data from unacceptable methods
will no longer be used. After promulgation of the equivalency regulations,
the Regional Offices should assist in the conversion to the exclusive use
of approved methods for S02> CO and "Oxidants corrected for S0£ and N02
and similarly assistance should be provided for selecting adequate methods
for N02 and Total Hydrocarbons corrected for Methane according to the
available guidelines.
To help the Regional Offices identify which states reported data
by which method in 1972, we have included Table II, a printout of
the data from which Table I was prepared. Note that the printout is
by pollutant code and method. Appendix A, which is an extract
from OAQPS Guideline #1.2-017,-presents a description of the
analytical technique associated with the SAROAD method code.
Lastly, Appendix B, contains a short paragraph for each method
which has been designated unacceptable, giving the rational
for that designation.
-------
— «>
TABLE 1
Iff2 PoUutant-'Vthod-statjons Sunwary
Pollutant Code
I TSP_.11101 '91
..C0~ 42101 11
12
21
SOj 42401 11
~~ 13 —
14
15
16
31
33
91
92
93
•
N02 42602 11
12
13
' 14
71
72
84
91
94
95
• "
iHocheraical
"°x 44101 11
(Ozone) 13
14
15
51
81
82
44201 11
13
t
Method
Hi-Vol (FRM)«
NDIR (FR.M)
Coulometric
Flame lonizatioa
Coloriiretric
— ,-Concluc time trie
Coulometric
AutometerC
Flame Photometric
Hydrogen Peroxide0
f Sequential Conductimetric
Hest-Gaeke-sulfamic acid (FRM)
West-Gaeke Bubbler
Conductimetric Bubbler
. Colorimetric
Colorimetric
Coulometric
Chemiluminescence
J-B Bubbler (orifice)
Saltzman
Sodium Arsenite (orifice)
J-H Bubbler (frit)
Sodium Arsenite (frit)
TEA
TGS
Alkaline KI Instrumental
Coulometric1*
Neut KI' Color irae trie •
Coulometric
Phenolphthalin
Alkaline KI Bubbler
*«rrous Oxi-'atio-
Cherailuminescence (FAX;
Coulonctricc
* * *•
No. of
Station*
JffJT
223
1
_ 2
JJ*
^g
•K
1
12
38
3
1040
45
2
1365
110
15
5
36
11
11
%
816
28
KIT
49
10
75
13
5
64
85
62
1
364
ITO"
13
3
21
4
I
18
23
17
0
100
?
*FFM - Federal Reference .Method.
. Sc-o A.-c.'ndix B for an cyf.l.i-.ition of wk.y thc^o methods *r<*
onjccci-'.-iMf.
cTh»«S'.' r• '[.<•/')' Mh'i'jlri ho r'|''-rt''l m«lor -liffcri-nt it- «h'xj '.>«!• i.
S'.t. /.{'[< f. J i x Ii tor un c-xf. 1 u'.j11f>n.
Arprovod
X'
X
OnaoprovcJ
C.iacceatabl
X
X
X
X
X
X.
s
X
X
2
X
X
X
X '
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
z
X
-------
-7-
STATtf
- SfAT
-------
TABLE II __j_
PCLL'ITANT '"-TH NUMBER OF
CCOc ClDt " SITES 1
STAT-E
STATF
STATF
STATE
:STATE_...
_ STATE ";—
STATE
_STAT E
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE _
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
_STAT_E
•STATE
STATE
STATF.
STATF
STATF
CflUNT
CUUNT
COUNT
COUNT
Cn'JNJ__
-COUNTr-^
COUNT
COUNT_
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT _
cojjNrr__
COUNT
C OUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CO'INT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CC'JNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
11101
UlOl
11101
11101
11101
"Tfioi
11101
_U ll*
11101
11101
1 1101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
11101
91
... 91
91
91
_ 91
_91_
91
__..AL
91
91
91
_ .9i_
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
• 91
91
91
• MISSOURI
' _MONTANA ;
NEBRASKA
NEVADA
NEH H«WJM«-.
NEW JrPS^Y
NEW MEXICO
_ _NFh'__Y°^K :
NORTH CAROLINA
NORTH OAKCTA
_OHIO
OKLAHOMA
OREGON
PENNSYLVANIA
PUERTO RICO
RHODE ISLAND
SOUTH CAROLINA
SOUTH DAKOTA
_ TENNESSEE
TEXAS
UTAH
V€S-MONT
VIRGINIA
WASHINGTON
49
;^_ 2
36
41
26
79
- ' 28
233
199
16
_13L._
9_5
48
105
5
23
75
2
98
192
8
2
122
57
-------
STATF
"••stfrrr
STATF
STATF
"STATE
PQLUTCOD
STATE
STATE
STATE
"STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE .
STATE
STATE
•STATE
STATE
STATE
"STATE
STATE
STATF
STATE
-
".CUNT
-.rvm •"•
CUUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CC'JNT ""
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT*
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CO'JNT
COUNT
COUNT
"cc'jrJTf™ .
"CtJi'NT
CO'JNT
-
POLL JTA
COOE
11101
'" iiibi
"iiioi
11101
1 1101
jiin.i
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
~42Tbi
~"42lOl
42101
4?10l
-
"IT MPTH
CTJE
91
~7T
91
91
g""f
_.._.
11
11
11
u~
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
.11
_ ...
ii
11
11
TABLE II —
-------
J./UJ.UL. JLJL
POLL'JTAMT N!:TH
Co.)? cooe
-S-T-ATF
STATE-
•STATE
STATE
-SI.ATE
STATE •___
STATE
JSTATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
_STATE
STATE
POLUTCOO
STATE
PPLUTCOD
STATE
PCLUTCOi)
CO'JNT
COU^T
CO' INT
COUNT
CO'JNT
CO'JNT.^
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
_cpyNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CQU'iT'
COUNT
42101
42101
42101
42101
- -^2To i
42101
42101
42101
42101
.-.*2.10!
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
42101
11
11
1 1 _
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
li
11
11
1 1
11
11
12
12
21
21
NUMBER OF
SITES '
Missa-ifli
NBB^ASV* „ ' ,
NEVtDA
NEW JERSEY
NEW MEXICO
MEW YORK
NORTH CAROLINA
OHIO
OKLAHOMA
3REGCN
PENNSYLVANIA
RHODE ISLAND
TENNESSEE
TEXAS
UTAH
VIRGINIA
WASHINGTON
WEST VIRGINIA •
WISCONSIN
OHIT
KENTUCKY
10
L
1
22
1
13
2
'13
4
2
2
2
A
I
4
9
10
1
1
223
1
1
2
2
-------
TABLE II -//-
V
\
XSTATE
> -_ , r-
• STATE
STATE
" "STATE
."STATE
STATE
STATE
" ST AT E
STATE
"STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
"POLUTCOD"
STATE
"STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
"STATE "
STATE
STATE
STATE
PIUL'ITANT MCTH
COOh CO'iE
COUNT.
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT— —
COUNT
COUNT
COJNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT"
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CC'JNT
CP'JNf
CCI'NT"
42401
42401
42401 "
42401
42401
42401
-42401
42~40T
42401
~424~bT
424J1
42401
42401
42401
42401
4240"i
42401
424 Jl
42401
42401
42401
42401"
42401
42401
424J1
11
H
11
11
"ll"
Tf
11
~rr
11
TT
ii
if
11
11
ii
n"
13
."13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
NUMBER OF
SITES
A*UON4
COLQPAOn
DELAWARE '"" •
DIST COLUMBIA
"FLORIDA ~"
TLLINOIS "~
KENTUCKY
MARYLAND""" ~ \
MASSACHUSETTS
MISSOUR'I ". "
NEW JERSEY
NEW YORK
OHIO
PENNSYLVANIA
"WASHINGTON
""" " " ** '** - - —
ARIZONA
"'CALIFORNIA"
COLORADO
CONNECTICUT
DEL'AWARE "
"otsr COLUMBIA
FLORIDA
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
t
1
2
1
6 "" "
2
3
1
5
I
4
.__ _
22
7
4
4
.. ^ —
68
_2
18
I
7
2
1"~
1
8
-------
TABLE II
-IA -
\
STATE
•STATE
STAT?
- STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
POL'JTCGD
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE *
STATE
STATE
STATE _
-STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
--
COUNT "
CCUNT
CCUNT
CO'JNT _
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
_CCUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CO'JNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CCO NT
COUNT
COUNT
PILL'JTANT
CDOE
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
... .*2«PA._
42401
. A2*>i_.
._*2*°i.._.
42401
42401
42401
42401 .
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
Mfc'TH
QTuE
13
i*
13
13
13
13
„ y_
13
13 _
13
_*4.
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
MARYLAND
•MINNESOTA • .
MISSO'JPI
_NEW YORK
OHIO
OREGON
PENNSYLVANIA
VIRGINIA
WASHINGTON
.ALABAMA
ARIZONA
DIST COLUMBIA
FLORIDA '_
GEORGIA
INDIANA
KANSAS
KENTUCKY
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
MISSOURI
NFW YORK
XO^.TH CAROLINA
NUMBER OF
SITES
12
.... 2
2
*
1
7
2
2
'2
9
80
2'
8
2
2
2
A
3
6
2
22
4
I
12
1
-------
TABLE II
jPOLLUTAUT
CCDF
MfETH
CODE
NUMBER OF
SITES
STATE
.ST'ATE
STATE
STATE "
'poLUTccn
STATE
-\
POLUTCOOT
Tf AT'E
STATE"
p'oLutc'ob"
"STATE"
'POLUTC'OD'
"STATE ~~~
"p'ouJTcdb"
"STATE
'STATE
"STATE
"STATE""
"STATE "
"STATE
"STATE
STATE
ST/'TE
STATE " "
STATE
COUNT
42. h" J NT 4240 1~
COUNT
42401
COUNT
42401
COUNT 42401
~C 0 0 NT 474 6 F
C OU NT 42"40r
"CC'JNf 4246T
14
15'
15
"16"
16"
"16"
If
31
"33"
ENNESSEE
"VIRGINIA"
TfcNNfcSSEE
"MARYLAND
VIRGINIA
NEW YORK
"MISSOURI"
COUNT 42401
COUNT 42*4 61
C 0 U N~f 4 2 4 61"
"COVHT 424"OF
COUNT 42401
COUNT42401
C^UNT "~4240 I
CC'JNT 42401
T" 42401"
91 "ALABAMA
Vf " ALASKA
"?i~ "ARIZONA
"9"i " ARKANSAS
~9T "CALIFORNIA
91 COLORADO ""
~9i ""CONNECTICUT"
91 " CELAWARfF
91 ' DIST COLUMBIA
91 " "FLJRIOA
91 'GEORGIA
1
1
"i
2
76
i
i
11"
I
12
38
"38
3
13
1
"7
2
16
2
4
3
2
34
13
-------
.
STATE
ESTATE.
,-SJATE
STATED
C T A T C
b 1 AT c
STATE
STATE
_STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
ESTATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
^
COUNT
COUMT__
v . COUNT
Jl~ "COUNT-
/* e "\t t \\ f
UUU N »
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
'COUNT
COUNT
COUNT_
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
_COUNT _•
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
>CLLUTA\T
CPD£
42401
.42401. .
42401
:- /»_?A(Jl
42401
42401
_42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
•IfTH
91
.J>i_,.
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
_^l___.
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
_ -
HAWAII
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
IOWA
iy A *l C A C
K A J iAi
KFT1TLTCKY
LOUISIANA
NAIN6
MAPYLANO
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
MISSISSIPPI
MISSOURI
MONTANA
^4EBRASKA
NEVADA
NEW HAMPSHIRE
NEW JERSEY
NEW MEXICO
1
NO'-
-------
TABLE II
•
POLLUTANT
CDDL-
N
'ST/.TE
.STATF ~
STATE
:$TAT«=
STATE
STATE
'STATE
STATE
STATE
"STATE ~
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
POLUTCOD
STATE
STATE
POLUTCOD
STATE
POL'JTCOD
STATF
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT" ~
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
"COUNT"
COUNT
COUNT""
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT ""
COUNT""
CO INT
42401
42401
~4240l'
42401
4240 i"
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
"~42401
424U1
42401
42401
42401
~4240i
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
42401
426 J 2
42602
"42602 ""
*PTH NUMBER OF
CODE 1 SITES
-91
^
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
~92
~92"
92
93
93
11
" 11
~ 1 1
CREG-TM
PENNSYLVANIA
PUERTO PICO
RHODE ISLAND
" "SOUTH CAROLINA
SOUTH DAKOTA
TENNESSEE
TEXAS
UTAH
VIRGINIA
WASHINGTON
WEST" VIRGINIA7"
WISCONSIN
WYOMING
GUAM
•*»
~ VIRGIN ISLANDS
""FLORIDA " ~
"~ MASSACHUSETTS
INDIANA
"ALABAMA
"ARUJNA "~" ."
CALIFQRVI A
1
14
4
18
38
37
• 13
1
49
15
3
2
9
"3"
1040
1
44
45
2
2
"3
50
-------
TABLE II
~ST"ATE
s
STATP
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
POLUTCt
STATE
STATP
STATE
STATF
CO'J-MT
CHI INT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
"TcoTTNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNt
CPUNT_
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
__COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
DO COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
PULMTA1
COOfc
42C02
42602
42602
42602
42602
»^~~
42602
42602
42602
_42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
_42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
JT 'If-TM
'COOfc
11
1 1
11
.11
11
11
11
11
11
11
1L
1 1
11
11
ii
11
11
1 1
ii
12
12
12
12
-Ib-
CONNECTICUT
OIST' COLUMBIA'
FLORIDA
GEORGIA
KENTUCKY
MAINE
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
MINNESOTA
KISSOURI
NEVADA
NEW YORK
NORTH CAROLINA
UHIO
OKLAHOMA
OREGON
PENNSYLVANIA
TENNESSEE
VIRGINIA
COLORADO
01 ST CJLUM3TA
ILLINOIS
MISS HUM
NUMBER OF
SITES
1
1
4
1
• 8
1
6
""**""""
1
1
8
1
13
_ 1
2
1
1
1
_..!...
2
110
1
1
1
1
-------
POLLUTANT ME-TH
CODE" ' CODE
NUMBER OF
SITES
STAT5
5JATE
STATE
STATE
PQLJTCOO
"ST'AT c
STATE ""
STATE
~ST"A"TE
POLUTCOD
STATE
STATE ""
STATE""
STATE
STAT'E
STATE
STAT'E"
STATE
STAfE
STATE
STATE
STATt
STATE
STATF
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT"
Tocfrr
COUNT"
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT"
COMNT
"COUNT"
"COUNT"
"COUNT"
"CCUNT"
"COUNT"
TOUNT
42602 12
42602 ~~ "TZ
'»2>602 12
42602 "12
NF A- JfcP.SfcY
OHIO
PbNNSYLVANIA
"RHODE"ISLAND
-VIRGINIA"
42602
"42602"
"42602"
42602
12
"l3
13
13
COUNT
COUNT"
"COUNT""
COUNT"
CO'JN'f"
COUNT
COUNT
COMNT
42602
42602"
426~02
"42602
T260T
"4T6T2"
42602"
T2"602~
"42602
"42602"
"42602"
"426"o2"
42602
42602
42602
42602
13
KANiSAS
~NIN'NESOTA
"NEVADA" "
TENNESSEE
13
"14"
T4~
14
14
14"
T4
14"
14
14
14
ARIZONA
COLO PA DO"
"CONNECTICUT
DIST COLUMBIA
TLL'INOIS
"iNDIA~NA
IOV/A""
"KENTUCKY
"MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
"MINNESOTA
NEBRASKA
NEW MCXICO
5
i
1
2
15
~2
~1
"~i"
"T
~5
_T
i
i
2
" 2
"1
i
3
"1
1
2
1
-------
POLLUTA'.T 4»:TH
STATE
STATF
.STATF
STATE
-SLATE
STATE ___.
POLUTCOn
STATE
POLUTCOD
STATE
PTLUTCC'^
STATE '
STATF
STATE_
STATF
STATE *
STATE
STATE
STATF
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATf
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT _
COUNT
COUNT
.COUNT _„
COUNT
COUNT
cgy.NT_
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
_C_0_UNT
COUNT_
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CC'UNT
COUNT
CO'lfJT
42602
42602
42602
'+2602
42602
, -—42602
42602
42602
42602
_ 42602
42602
A 2602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
_42602
42602
42602
' 42602
42602
42602
14 __
. 1-4 '
14
14 _
14
14
14
71
71
72
72
91 _
91
91
91
91
91
9L
91
_ 91
91
91
91
9i
TABLE II -/8-
t
NUMBER OF
SITES
NEW YHHK
OH P. • ' . . .
PENNSYLVANIA
TEXAS
UTAH
MINNESOTA
INDIANA
ALABAMA
ALASKA
ARIZONA
ARKANSAS
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
CONNECTICUT
DELAWARE
OIST COLUMBIA
FLlif IDA
GEORGIA . '
HAWAII
ILLINOIS
2
5
5
2
... 1
2
36
'il
..__!!
11
11
13
1
5
2
16
2
4
3
2
22
13
11
4
-------
,,STATE
STATE
STATE"
STATE
-STATE
•--.
POIJTCOD
~ST AT E
STATE
STATE
STATE
POLUTCOD
STATE "
'STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
" STATE "
STATE
SMTP
C'\JNT
COUNT"
COUNT ~~
COUNT" ~
COUNT
COUNT
___^*~- *
~^, a J,^- *--""^
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
"COUNT
"CJUNf""
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
"COUNT""
COUNT
CO'JNT
"CO'JNT
' COUNT""
COUNT
CG')MT~"
PrULUTA\'
CODE
426J2
42602 ~
" '»2:602'
"42602
42602
^426-02
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
~426"02 "
~"42~6"02 '
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
~ 42602"
42602
42602
42602"
42602"
" 42602"
42602"
T MET*
CODE
12
— 2-
---—-»
" "~ 12
12
12
^
13
13
13
13
JV
14"
14
14
14
14
14
14"
14
14
""14
_,_„ -^
14'
14
i
Nt.s' JtP.SfcY
""OHIO " "" •
~" 'PhNNSYLVANlA
"""RHODE" ISLAND
VIRC-I-NIA
'.
KANSAS "
MINNESOTA
NEVADA
TENNESSEE
"""ARfZONA
C0i"0 PA DC-
CONNECTICUT
DIST COLUMBI
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
IOWA
KENTUCKY
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETT
"MINNESOTA
Missr?j«r
NEBRASKA
NEW MEXICO'
NUMBER OF
SITES
5
1
' . 1
~~2
2
15
2
1
1
1
5
"~1
i .
1
A 2
2
1
1
3
1
S ' " "1
* 1
~~ ~ 2
" " " 1
1
-------
TABLE II -5o-
POLLUTANT MCTH
-STATE
STATE "
STATE
ESTATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
"STATE
STATE"
STATE
STATE ~
STATE
STATE
STATE
COUNT
co( INT
" "COUNT
COUNT"
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
~ COUNT
~ CO' INT
" COUNT
root
42602
426U2
"42602
42602
42602"
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42*602'
42602
42602
42602
CODE
91
91
si
91
__ _.
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91 ""
INDIANA
IO-'A
KANSAS
KENTUCKY
"LOUISIANA
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
MTss'fssippi"
MISSOURI
MONTANA
NEBRASKA '
NEW HAMPSHIRE
NEW JERSEY
NEW MEXICO
NEW'YORK
NORTH CAROLINA"
OHIO
OKLAHOMA
JREGbN
PENNSYLVANIA
PUF3TO RICO
rJHCOE "ISLAND
NUMBER OF
SITES
41
2
"• 29
87
4
1
49
.54
6
3
2
4
i
3
4
8
7
9
67
19
"""" "" 1 ~~
~ 14
4
~ " Ifl
-------
TABLE II
•^-
v- •• —
STXTtl
STATE-
STATT
STATE '
" STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE_
POLUTCOD
STATE
POLUTCOD
STATE
STATE
ST AT E
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATr
STATF
STATE
STATE
POLLUTANT
C-?3fc
c GJ INT_^_
COUNT
COUNT
CO'JNT
COUNT
COUNT_
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT.
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CO'JNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CO'JNT
COUNT
CU'JNT
COJNT
-«60?..
_ 42602
42602
_ 42 60 2
42602
_42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
42602
_ 42602
44101
_44101
_44101_
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
CODE
91
91
91
91
91
91
91 _____
91
91
91
91
91
94
94
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
-
NUMBER OF
SITES
SOUTH CAPCLINA _ 38
.SOUTH DAKOTA
TENNESSEE
TEXAS
UTAH
VIRGINIA
WASHINGTON
WEST VIRGINIA
WISCONSIN
WYHMING
GUAM
K-ENTUCKY
ARIZONA
COLORADO
DIST__CQLUMBIA
FLORIDA
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
IOWA '
KANSAS
MISSOURI
NE4 JERSEY
1
41
13
1
... 7
10
' 1
3
2
9
816
26
28
1
1
1
_2
1
2
1
1
1
4
-------
TABLE II
V
oriLLUTANT
CODE
cent
ii
™"iV
NUMBER OF
SITES
STATE
STMC
STATE
STATE""'
STATE
. ~~-^
$•»• * T C
i M i r
STATE
STATE
"STATE
POLUTCGD
"STATE
'STATE
STATE
'STATE
POL'JTCOD
STATE .
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATF
_ CO'HT
441)1
CL'TJT "~441ul
cn-nT " 44101
COUNT 44101
COUNT """ 44T6l
COUNT™" "441 Jl
" ~44101
~4~4l6T
COUNT
COUNT"
44101
~4410~l
"C'DUNIT"
44101
.COUNT
44101
COUNT
44101
COUNT 44101
'COUNT 44i6f
"COUNf 44101"
COUNT 44 fO'l"
COUN'f 44101
C OUN T 44TO f
'C07JNT 44101"
COUNT 441 Of
coyrjf"" ' 44101
COUNT " 44101
CC'J.\T 44101
CO HT 44101
11
iT"
Ti
Tf
T'f
If
T3~
"iT
IF
T3
"13
T4
"14
"14
14
14
14
14
NEW YL^K
NO'TH C'POLINA
Ohio"
"PENNSYLVANIA
"UNNE~SSEE~
"TEXAS
"v'fpG'fNiTA ~"
"WASHINGTON"
"W"IS~CONSIN
12
2
" 8
" 1
1
4~
KANSAS
NEVADA"
~NE"W MEXICO
"WASHINGTON
ALABAMA
ARIZONA
"CALIFORNIA""
COLORADO " ~
"KENTUCKY "
MINNESOTA
MISSOURI
OHIO ~
ORCGCN
PENNSYLVANIA
.1
"1
"49
__
_.
1
10
1
1
56
1
1
"1
e
2
i
i
\
-------
TABLE II
POLLUTANT M':TH
.SJTATE
STATE
POLJTCOO
.STATE
STATF
PpLUTCCtr
STATE
_P GLUT COD
STATE
STATF
STATE
STAT E
POLUTCOD
STATE
STATE
STATE
POLUTCOf)
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATP
STATF
STATF
COUNT
COU'JT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT _
COUNTS
COUNT
COUNT_
CpUNT
C.O'JNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COU'JT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
COUNT
CC'Jf,'T
C3JNT
C'-MJViT
CODE
44101
44'lOi
44101
44101
44101
^^-~"
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44101
44201
44201
44201
44201
44201
4't201
44201
CODE
14
. 1* .
14
15
15
15
51
51
31
81
31
31
81
82
32
82
*2
11
11
U
11
11
11
11
NUMBER OF
SITES
TENNESSEE
'VIRGINIA
.
CALIFORNIA
VIRGINIA
OKLAHOMA
MINNESOTA
NORTH CAROLINA
OKLAHOMA
SOUTH CAROLINA
KANSAS
KENTUCKY
UHIO
ALABAMA
COLORADO
DIST COLUMBIA
FLORIDA '
HA^AI I
ILLINOIS
1
1
75
12
1
13
5
4
5
7
7
13
__ _37 -.
64
3
76
6
85
2
1
1
4
1
1
1
-------
POLLUTANT -1ETH
CODE CODE:
NUMBER OF
SITES
TATF COUNT
TATE ~~~ CCM'lf
TATE " "COl'NT
,tATE "' COUNT
TATE -~~-C,QU:it;
TATE " "COUNT
,TATE CO'UNT
• TATE "COUNT
,TATF "COUNT
.TATE COUNT
TATE"
TATE""
TATE"
TATECOUNT
TATECOUNT
TATE"' ~
TATE"
44201
'»4201
~442U1
44201
11
I i~~
II
Yl"
44201
44ToT
44201
~442oT
44201
44201"
COUNT
COUNT""
44201
~4420T
COUNT
44201
11
———•
11
Ti
Ti
~ii"
11
if
Ti
44201
COUNT
"COUNT"
44201
OLUTCOO CHUNT
TATE
COUNT
nL'JTConT'cr.uNT"
44201
~4420T
"44~20"i
44"20l"
II
ii
11
11
'LI
13"
if
liJOIANA
"KANSAS-
K'ENT.JCKY
LOUISIANA
'MAFYHNO '
MICHIGAN
"MISSOURI"
"NEBRASKA" "
NEW "YORK
"NORTH CAROLINA
OHIO
"OKLAHOMA
PENNSYLVANIA
"SO'UtH CAROLINA
TENNESSEE
TEXAS
"VIRGINIA"
"OREGON"""
i
2
3
6
1
i
~3
12
2
7
2"
1
1
"I
" i
62
1
i
_ /
-------
A DESCRIPTION OF THE ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES
AND ASSOCIATED SAROAD METHOD CODES USUD IN
STORING DATA IN THE NATIONAL AEROMETRIC DATA BANK
APPENDIX A
EXTRACT PROM GUIDELINE DOCUMENT OAQPS 1.2-017
January 1974
-------
Federal Reference Methods
11101 91 SUSPENDED PARTICULATE - HI-VOL - GRAVIMETRIC
Air is drawn at 40 to 60 ft.3/min through a glass
fiber filter, by means of a blower, and the sus-
pended particles having a diameter between 100
and 0.1 ym are collected. 'The suspended particulate
is calculated by dividing the net weight of the
.___ particulate by the total air volume sampled and
reported in density units as yg/m3. Heavy
loading of suspended"]aa3rtici^ab£7~uily particulates,
or high humidity can cause xecluced air flow
through the filter. Therefore, flow rates should
be measured before and after the sampling period.
1. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register,
Vol 36, No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C., (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22388.
2. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air
Sampling and Analysis," American Public Health
Association, Washington, D.C., 1972, p 356.
3. "Air Quality Data for 1967," EPA-APTD-0741, .
Office of Technical Information and Publications,
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 1971,
p 17.
42101 11 CARBON MONOXIDE - INSTRUMENTAL - NON-DISPERSIVE
INFRA-RED
^ The non-disperive infrared instrument has a sample
cell, a reference cell, and a detector. The detector
is divided by a flexing diaphragm into two equal
cells filled with equal concentrations of CO. The
reference cell is filled with a CO free air.
When infrared radiation is passed into the sample
cell some of the radiation is absorbed by CO
in this cell in prooortion to the concentration
-------
-JL-7 -
Of CO and the rest is transmitted to the detector.
In the detector, the radiation causes the CO to
expand flexing the diaphragm in proportion to the
transmitted infrared radiation. Since the reference
cell is filled with zero CO air, the reference cell
side of the detector exerts a constant pressure on tho
diaphragm; -When the CO is introduced•into the sample
cell, unequal amounts of residual radiation re'aches
the two compartment of the detector causing an unequal
expansion of the detector gas. This unequal expansion
causes the diaphragm to deflect, creating a change of
^..electrical capacitance in an external circuit, and
ultimately an amplified signal which is suitable for
input to a servo-type recorder. The detector is calibrat
by placing CO standards in the sample cell and recording
the electrical signals.
1. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228, (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22391.
42401 91 SULFUR DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-WEST-GAEKE-SULFAMIC ACID
Sulfur dioxide is collected in a tetrachloromercurate
solution, forming a stable dichlorosulfitomercurate
complex. When acid bleached pararosaniline is added
to the collected S02 together with formaldehyde,
the amino groups (-Nflt) form a red violet compound
called pararosaniline methylsulfonic acid which is
measured spectrophotometrically. The method is des-
cribed in the Federal Register. (The NASN procedure,
however, uses 1.725 g/1 sulfamic acid rather than
6 g/1 and does not use EDTA). The sulfaraic acid
eliminates interference from oxides of nitrogen.
1. "Rules and Regulations," Federal Register, Vol 36,
No. 228, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.c
' (Nov. 25, 1971), p 22385.
2. West, P. W. and G. C. Gaeke, (1956), "Fixation
of Sulfur Dioxide as Disulfito-Mercurate (II) and
Subsequent Colorimetric Estimation," Anal. Chem. 28,
1819.
3. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 447.
-------
Unapproved Methods
42101 21
CARBON MONOXIDE - INSTRUMENTAL - FLAME IONIZATION'
Ambient air is passed through two gas chromatograpnic
columns in series, the first retains most pollutants
but passes CO and CHq, and the second passes only
CO. The CO then flows through a Ni catalyst where
it is converted to CH4 which is measured by a flame
ionization detector. The resulting measured current
is related to the CO concentration of the input
ambient air by dynamic calibration with known CO .
concentration standards.
1. Rotterdam, Warsaw, and Bucharest, "The Status
of Instrumentation in Air Pollution' Control," Environ-
mental Control Seminar Proceeding, U.S. Department
of Commerce, (May 5-June 4, 1971), p 217.
42401 11 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-WEST GAEKE-COLORIMETIC
A continuous analyzing.system is setup such that
the ambient air flows through a glass beaded absorp-
tion column concurrently with 0.02M sodium tetrachloro-
mercurate. Dichlorosulfitomercurate ion is formed
reacted with acid-bleached pararosaniline and
formaldehyde to produce a red-purple pararosaniline
methylsulfonic acid which is quantitatively measured
colorimetrically. The zero (100% T) baseline is
established with pure reagents for 1 h and the in-
strument is then dynamically calibrated with known
SO2 concentration standards. Air flow rate and
reagent flow rate must be calibrated and maintained
accurately.
42401 13 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-CONDUCTIMETRIC
Sulfur dioxide is absorbed in acidic H202 which
oxdizes the S02 to H2S04* The resulting charge
in conductivity can be measured, compensated for
-------
temperature, and related to the input S02 concentration
by dynamic calibration with known S02 concentration
standards. However, specificity is poor because any
materials that alter the conductivity of the reagent
are potential interfering agents.
1. Beckman Air Quality Acralyzer Operating and
Service Manual, Scientific and Process Inst. Div.,
Fullerton, California, 16TW352, (Aug. 1966).
2. Thomas, M.D., (1932), "Automatic Apparatus for
the Determination of Small Concentrations of Sulfur
Dioxide in Air," Anal. Chem. 5, 253.
_ 3. M. B. Jacobs, "The Chemical Analysis of Air
Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Interscience
Publishers, Inc., New York, N.Y., (I960), p 394.
4. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual Book
of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 272.
42401 14 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-COULOMETRIC
The air to be measured is passed through a cell
containing a neutral buffered iodide or bromide
electrolyte where ah electrical current or potential
maintains a constant concentration of free 12 or
When S02 in the input air reacts with the 12 or
the change in electrical current or potential necessary
to restore or maintain the original concentration of
12 or Br2 (coulometric titration) is a quantitative
measure of the S02 input. If the input flow rate is
constant, the SO2 concentration can be related to
the electrical signal by dynamic calibration with
known S02 concentration standards.
42401 16 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-GC FLAME PHOTOMETRIC
Chromatographic columns are used to separate S02,
H2S, CS2, and CH3SH. Effluent from the columns is
-------
42401 33
-30 -
burned in a hydrogen-rich flame. A photomultiplier
tube is used to detect the 395 run emission band
characteristic of sulfur. The electrical signal is
related to the input concentration by dynamic cali-
bration with known S02, H2S, C$2» or CH^SH concen-
tration standards. •
1. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, and J. A. Dean,
"Instrumental Methods of Analysis," D. Van Nostrand
Company, Inc., 4th Edition, 1965, p 309.
SULFUR DIOXIDE-DAVIS INSTRUMENT-SEQUENTIAL-CONDUCTIMETRI
Water is deionized by passage through an amberlite
resin column, then its conductivity is measured.
Ambient air, having first passed through a scrubber
of amberlite resin and soda-lime to remove C02, is
next passed through the-deionized water where the SO2
is absorbed. The increased conductivity of the water
is a measure of the SO2 concentration of the air.
1. Thomas, M.D. and J; N. Abersold, (1929), "Automatic
Apparatus for the Determination of Small Concentrations
of Sulfur Dioxide in Air," Anal. Chem. 1, 14.
42602 11 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-COLORIMETRIC
The Lyshkow modification of the Criess-Saltzman
reagent is used in various continuous N02 analyzers.
Users should consult the manufacturer's literature
for details of reagent preparation.
1. "Rules and Regulations" Federal Register, Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973), p 15176.
2. Lyshkow, N. A., (1965), "A Rapid Sensitive Colori-
metric Reagent for Nitrogen Dioxide in Air" J. Air
Poll. Control Assoc. 15 (No. 10) 481.
42602 12 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-COLORIMETRIC
The original Griess-Saltzman reagent is used in
various continuous N02 analyzers. Users should
-------
consult the manufacturer's literature for details
of reagent"preparation.
1. "Rules and Regulation,* Federal Register/ Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO, Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973) p 15176.
2. Saltzman, B. E., (1954) "Colorimetric Micro
Determination of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere"
Anal. Chem. 26, 1949..
••^^^m• ^ ^
42.602 13 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-CQULOMETRIC
**-—:--.-^^^Air tq.be measured is .passed through a cell containing
neutral buffered ixsttiut.-itrdiiic"-solution causing an
established equilibrium between iodine and iodide
to be unbalanced. The current required to re-
establish the equilibrium (coulometric titration)
is a measure of the input NO? concentration. If
the input flow rate is constant, the NO2 concentration
can be related to the electrical signal by dynamic
calibration with known NO, concentration standards.
42602 14 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-CHEMILUMINESCENCE
The ambient air to be measured is drawn over a heated
catalytic converter which reduces N02 to NO. The
NO is then analyzed by method 42601 14, and the
original N02 concentration is obtained by subtracting
the concurrent NO concentration.
1. "Rules and Regulation," Federal Register, Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO, Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973) p 15176.
2. NO/NOX/N02 Analyzer Bulletin, Bulletin 4133,
Beckman Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.
42602 84 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-NASN SODIUM ARSENITE-
ORIFICE
The method is much like method 42602 71 except for
the absorber (l.Og of NaAs02)• Ambient air is in-
troduced into the absorber by means of an orifice
-------
in the bubbler. The orifice is usually not cali-
brated.
1. "Rules and Regulation," Federal Register, Vol 38,
No. 110, USGPO, Wash., D.C., (June 8, 1973), p 15175.
2. Christie, A. A., R. G. Lidzey, and D. W. F. Radford
(1970) , "Field Methods for the Determination of Nitroger
Dioxide in Air." Analyst 95, 519.
3. Merryman, E. L., et.al., "Effects of NO, CO,,
CH,, H20 and Sodium Arsenite on N02 Analysis,"
presented at the Second Conference on Natural Gas
Research and Technology. Atlanta, Georgia, June 5, 1972
42602 94 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-TSASN-SODIUM ARSENITE-
FRIT
This method is identical to method 42602 71 except
that l.Og/1 of NaAs02 is added to the absorbing
solution, and a fritted bubbler is used instead of .
an orifice bubbler.
1. Christie, A. A., R. G. Lidzey, and D. W. F. Radford,
(1970), "Field Methods for the Determination of Nitrogen
Dioxide in Air." Analyst 95, .519.
2. Merryman, E. L., et.al., "Effects of NO, CO,,
CH4, H20 and Sodium Arsenite on N02 Analysis,"
presented at the Second Conference on Natural Gas
Research and Technology. Atlanta, Georgia, June 5, 1972
3. "Selected Method for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants," U.S. Department of Health, Education,
and Welfare 999-AP-ll, Robert A. Taft Sanitary
Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965,
p C-4.
44101 11 TOTAL OXIDANT-INSTRUMENTAL-ALKALINE KI
Identical to method 44101 14 except 1-normal sodium
hydroxide is used instead of the phosphate buffer
in the absorbing solution.
-------
44101 14 TOTAL OXIDANT-INSTRUMENTAL-COLORIMETRIC-NEUTRAL KI
Air to be'measured is contacted with nuetral
phosphate buffered potassium iodide. Oxidants
convert the KI to I2 or KI3 which is measured
spectrophotoznctrically at 352 nm. If the input
air flowrate is constant, the color density can
be related to the oxidant concentration. Analyzers
* • • *
are calibrated dynamically with known standard
concentrations of ozone. Sulfur dioxide inter-
•
ference may be minimized by use of a Cr03 pre-
scrubber, which also causes an NO interference.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air
—— Sampling and Analysis," American Public Health
Association, Wash., D.C., 1972, p 356.
2. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual
Book of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 518.
3. Wartburg, A. P., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02
in Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chem. 37,
779.
44101 15 TOTAL OXIDANT-INSTRUMENTAL-COULOMETRIC-NEUTRAL KI
Air to be measured is passed through a cell containing
potassium iodide and two electrodes. Oxidants
convert iodide ions to 1^ which is reduced at the
cathode of the cell causing a current to flow thru
an external circuit. If the flow rate is constant,
this electrical signal can be related to the input
concentration of oxidants. Analyzers are calibrated
dynamically with known standard concentrations of
ozone.
-------
^ Unacceptable Methods
42101 12 CARBON MONIXIDE - INSTRUMENTAL - COULOMETRIC
Atmospheric air is drawn through a heated 12^5 column
where I2 is liberated. The I2 is directed
into an electrochemical_cell where I2 is measured
coulometrically.
1. Beckman Instrumention, Bulletin 3000 4411-4,
; Beckman Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, California.
42401 15 SULFUR DIOXIDE-INSTRUMENTAL-THOMAS AUTOMETER
The Thomas Autometer is a conductimetrie analyzer
developed in 1929. There are later models. The
method is similar to method 42401 13.
42401 31 SULFUR DIOXIDE-DAVIS INSTRUMENT-HYDROGEN PEROXIDE
The Davis instrument is a conductimetric instrument,
and as such, it is much like method 42401 13.
42401 92 SULFUR DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-WEST-GAEKE
This method is similar to method 42401 91 except
that the sample absorbing reagent is O.lM TCM,
the starch which is used for standardization is
made without mercuric iodide, and sulfamic acid
is not used except when high concentration of N02
are expected. The sulfamic acid is added to the
sample after collection.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants" U.S. Department of Health, Education,
and Welfare 999 AP-11, Robert A. Taft Sanitary
Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965,
P A-l.
2. Nauraan, R. V., et.al., (1960), Anal Chem. 32,
1307.
-------
3. West, P. W. and F. Ordoveza, (1962), Anal. Chem.
1324.
42401 93 SULFUR DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-CONDUCTIMETRIC
This manual conductimetric method uses the same
_ , _ principle as the instrumental conduc time trie
method. The absorber is a multiple jet bubbler
system and the sampling is not continuous. The
details are described in the reference.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 456.
42602 71 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-JACOBS-HOCHHEISER-
50 Ml TUBE + ORIFICE
Ambient air to be measured is bubbled through a
sodium hydroxide solution where N©2 • forms a stable
solution of sodium nitrite. The nitrite ion pro-
duced is reacted with phosphoric acid, sulfanilamide,
and N-l naphthylethylenediamine dihydrochloride,
and measured color imetrically at 540 nm
42602 72 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-SALTZMAN (50 Ml TUBE +
ORIFICE)
The sample is absorbed in the Griess-Saltzman reagent
and after 15 min the stable pink color is measured
colorimetrically at 550 nm, cannot be used for
sampling period over 30 minutes.
1. Intersociety Committee, "Methods of Air Sampling
and Analysis," American Public Health Association,
Washington, D.C., 1972, p 329.
2. Saltzman, B. E., (1954), "Colorimetric Micro-
Determination of Nitrogen in the Atmosphere," Anal.
•Chem. 26, 1949.
-------
42602 91 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-JACOBS-HOCHHEISER (100
Ml TUBE + FRIT)
This method is identical to method 42602 71, except
that a fritted bubbler is used instead of an orifice
bubbler and the'volume of the absorbing solution is
doubled.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants," U.S. Department of Health, Education,
and Welfare 999-AP-ll, Robert A. Taft Sanitary
^-^-"~"' Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965, p-C-4.
2. Purdue, L. J., et.al., (1972), "Reinvestigation
of the Jacobs-Hochheiser Procedure for Determining
Nitrogen Dioxide in Ambient Air," Environ. Sci.
and Tech. 6, 152.
44101 13 TOTAL OXIDANTS-INSTRUMENTAL-MAST MODEL 742-2
Identical to method 44101-15.
1. Mast, G. M. and H. E. Saunders, (Oct. 1962), "Researc
and Development of the Instrumentation of Oxone Sensing,'
Instrument'Soc. of Amer. Trans., 1, 375.
1 T--. .1 j- ^
2. Bufalini, J. J., (1968), "Gas Phase Titration of
AVjnospheric Oxone," Environ Sci Technol 2, 703.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02 in
Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chem. 37, 779.
44101 51 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER-PHENOLPHTHALIN
Phenolphthalin, in the presence of CuS04 is
oxidized to phenolphthalein by ambient air oxidants.
Air is passed through 10 ml of reagent at 800
ml/min for 10 min. The color is read using a
colorimeter and a green filter.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis
of Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10,
Interscience Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y.,
p 226.
-------
44101. 81 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER-ALKALINE KI
Oxidants in sampled ambient air are absorbed in
an alkaline KI solution in a bubbler. A stable
product is formed which can be stored with little
loss for several days. Analysis is completed
by addition of phorphoric acid-sulfuric acid
reagent/ liberating iodine, which is then determined
spectrophotometrically at 352 ran.
1. Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants U.S. DREW 999-AP-ll, RATSEC Cincinnati,
Ohio, 1965, p E-l.
2. Water, Atmospheric Analysis, (1971), "Annual
Book of ASTM Standards," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, Pa., Part 23, p 391.
3. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of
Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Inter-
science Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y., p 219.
44101 82 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER-FERROUS OXIDATION
Air to be measured is filtered through a Whatman
No. 4 paper at 1 cfm then bubbled through two
impingers in series containing acidified ferrons
ammonium sulfate absorbing solution. After sampling
ammonium thiocyanate is added, and the resultant
color is measured with a colorimeter and green filter.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis of
Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10, Inter-
science Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y., p 228.
44201 13 OZONE - INSTRUMENTAL - COULOMETRIC
This method is identical to method 44101 15.
1. Mast, G. M. and H. E. Saunders, (Oct. 1962),
"Research and Development of the Instrumentation of
Ozone Sensing," Instrument Soc. of Amer. Trans.,
i, 375.
2. Bufalini, J. J., (1968), "Gas Phase Titration of
Atmospheric Ozone," Environ. Sci. Tech. 2, 703.
3. Wartburg, A. F., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering S02 in
Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chem. 37, 779.
-------
42602 91 NITROGEN DIOXIDE-GAS BUBBLER-JACOBS-HOCHHEISER (100
Ml TUBE + FRIT)
This method is identical to method 42602 71, except
. that a fritted bubbler is used instead of an orifice
bubbler and the volume of the absorbing solution is
doubled.
1. "Selected Methods for the Measurement of Air
Pollutants~," U. S * * Department - of Health, Education,
and Welfare 999-£P-sJ.l.- .Pafcert A. Taft Sanitary
Engineering Center, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 1965, p C-4.
2. Purdue, L. J., et.al., (1972), "Reinvestigation
of the Jacobs-Hochheiser Procedure for Determining
Nitrogen Dioxide in Ambient Air," Environ. Sci.
and Tech. 6, 152.
44101 13 TOTAL OXIDANTS-INSTRUMENTAL-MAST MODEL 742-2
• Identical to method 44101-15.
1. Mast, G. M. and H. E. Saunders, (Oct. 1962), "Resear^
and Development of the Instrumentation of Oxone Sensing,
Instrument Soc. ofAmer. Trans., 1, 375. '
2. Bufalini, J. J., (1968), "Gas Phase Titration of
AVjtnospheric Oxone," Environ Sci Technol 2, 703.
3. Wartburg, A. P., and B. E. Saltzman, (1965),
"Absorption Tube for Removal of Interfering SO2 in
Analysis of Atmospheric Oxidant" Anal. Chem. 37, 779.
44101'51 TOTAL OXIDANT-GAS BUBBLER-PHENOLPHTHALIN
Phenolphthalin, in the presence of CuSO4 is
oxidized to phenolphthalein by ambient air oxidants.
Air is passed through 10 ml of reagent at 800
ml/rain for 10 min. The color is read using a
colorimeter and a green filter.
1. M. B. Jacobs, (1960), "The Chemical Analysis
of Air Pollutants," Chemical Analysis, Vol 10,
Interscience Publishers, Inc., New York, N. Y. ,
p 226.
-------
APPENDIX B
Rationale for Ranking the Methods as "Unacceptable"
CO 42101 12
COULOMETRIC
Interferences with this method include mer-
captans, hydrogen sulfide, olefins, acetylenes,
and water vapor. In addition, the slow response,
need for careful column preparation, and the
need for well controlled temperatures and flow
rates make this an unreliable procedure.
S02 42401 15
Thomas Autometer
This is a conductimetric analyzer. Data collected
using this analyzer should be reported as 42401-13.
S02 42401 31
Davis Instrument
This is a conductimetric analyzer. Data collected
using this analyzer should be reported as 42401-13.
S02 42401
92 WEST-GAEKE BUBBLER
This method differs only slightly from 42401-91 and
offers no substantial advantages. Method 42401-91
should thus be used for uniformity.
S02 42401
93 CONDUCTIMETRIC BUBBLER
The method lacks specificity; Method 42401-91 should
be used to obtain better measurements.
N02 42602-71 J-H BUBBLER (orifice)
N02 42602 91 J-H BUBBLER (frit)
The objections to these methods have been detailed in
38 FR 15174 (June 8, 1973): The collection
efficiency is a function of NOp concentration and
the presence of NO introduces a positive interference,
-------
N02 42602 72 SALTZMAN
This manual method suffers from interferences
from SOg, ozone, PAN, AND prolonged exposure
• . to light, and cannot be used for periods
over 30 minutes.
TOTAL 0Y 44101 11 ALKALINE KI-INSTRUMENTAL *
• •*_
""-"^"^^...^^^^jrhe-alkaline KI mp.tbad.produces,sjjrh variable
.results in different barids, ;thai'data from one
site cannot be compared with data from another.
TOTAL 0Y 44101 13 MAST MODEL 742-Z
^
This method is identical to method 44101-15. Data
collected using this analyzer should be reported
as 44101-15.
TOTAL 0¥ 44101 51 PHENOLPHTHALIN
A
Results of this method do not agree with those
obtained by other total oxidant methods.
TOTAL 0¥ 44101 81 ALKALINE KI BUBBLER
A
The alkaline KI method produces such variable
results in different hands that data from one
site cannot be compared with data from another.
TOTAL Ox 44101 82 FERROUS OXIDATION
Results of this method do not agree with those
obtained by other total oxidant methods.
OZONE 44201 13 COULOMETRIC ,
/
This method is identical to method 44101-15.
Data collected using .this method should be
reported as 44101-15.
-------
II II II
!! !! 'A
DRAFT
S
OAOFS NO, 1.2-019
i_-S
"1
AIR QUALITY MONITORING Si 7. 'I
OESCfUPTION GUIDELINE
Environmental Protection Agency
Region V, Library
230 South Dearborn Street
Chicago, IlliHois 60604
i __ f* 'H.iK-i-iu*' " • . r\ ?%»•• ^ i • **lTt • I ai-iii •! JVi'K • < LPJVTX.I<*
U5. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangk Park, North Carolina
-------
AIR QUALITY MONITORING SITE
DESCRIPTION GUIDELINE
OAQPS NO. 1.2-019
1974
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
•VRAFT
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
"Page
CHAPTER
1. INTRODUCTION " -j
2. Station Description 2
2.1. General Information Concerning All Pollutants 2
2.1.1. The Objective For Monitoring At This Site 2
• 2.1.2. Type Of Monitoring Station 2
2.1.3. The Location Of The Station 2
--2.1.4. Pollutant Sources 4
2.1.5. The Heating And Air Conditioning Requirements 4
2.2. Special Information Concerning The Station For 4
Continuous Monitors
2.2.1. Sample Manifold Design 4
2.2.2. Sample Manifold Composition - - 4
•2.2.3. Electrical Requirements 5
2.3. Special Information Concerning Primary and Secondary - 5
Pollutant Stations And Air Inlets
2.3.1. Siting Positions For Estimating Maximum 5
Pollutant Concentrations'
3. Instrument Description 5
3.1. General Information Concerning All Instruments 5
3.1.1. Identification Of The Manufacturer Trade Name, 5
And Model Of The Instrument
3.1.2. Application Of The Instrument 6
•3.1.3. SAROAD Codes Used By NADB To Store The Data From 6
Each Monitoring Instrument Used At Each Site
*
-3.1.4. The Type Of Monitor ' 6
3.1.5. Monitoring Technique ' 6
3.2 Special Information Concerning Continuous Instruments 1
-------
A. Siting Guidelines For Areas Of Estimated Maximum Pollutant
Concentrations
V
B. Sample Checklist
-------
I. Introduction
The purpose of this guideline is to provide the Regional
Offices with a list of important information items.concerning
the air quality monitoring sites. This information will be
used to describe the monitoring station and the monitoring
instruments. A discussion is presented under each item
within the guideline to provide clarification or to give an
example of the type of information desired.
The listed items should enable" the Regional Office to
creates: site description on each monitoring site under their
jurisdiction for their files and can be created as they make
their usual evaluation of the sites. This information is to be
maintained_and updated to enable the Regional Office to respond
to question's; concerning the monitoring site or possible suit-
~"-^ ••* ~y
v ; f
ability cd~^the air quality data.
f f '
Tnis type of information is extremely useful in validating,
editing,,, ana interpreting ambient air quality data. Special
emphasis>in ,acquiring the requisite information should be
* ^ " ~^'- * - • •*£'"'
placed ;>n_J£hose sites used in developing control strategies
in either--NtheuState Implementation Plan or for recently
developed transportation control plans. The essential items
are indicated by an asterisk. The other items should be
obtained where possible.
• . !
• - An example checklist which may be used to collect data .•
*" !
is shown in Appendix B.
-------
2. STATION DESCRIPTION
2.1. General Information Concerning All Pollutants
*2.1.1. Objective For Monitoring At This Site
There should be an objective for monitoring at a particular
site.. This objective might be to obtain data for the following:
a. trend analysis
"~ b. episode studies
c. maximum concentration
d. background
e. health study
f. assess achievement of NAAQS
g. special study (e.g., indirect sources)
h. measure impact of source
*2.1.2. Type Of Monitoring Station
The station type could be a mobile or stationary station.
This type of station might be described as: mobile CO station or
stationary hydrocarbon station, etc.
. 2.1.3. The Location Of The Station
*2.1.2.1. The Siting Categories
The location of the station could be classified
under.one of the four categories as follows: • :
1. Urban (high density)
a. Commercial
b. Industrial
c. Residential
-------
2. Suburban (medium density)
a. Comirercisl
b. Industrial
c. Residential
3.- Rural '(low density)
a. Land Use (forest, grassland, desert, and
fanning)
4. Source Oriented
a. Commercial
b. Industrial
2.1.3.2. Physical Location
The physical location of the station can be described
by the following: • .
.1
*a. The EPA Region
*b. State
t
*c. The AQCR
*d. The SMSA
*e. The County
*f. The City
*g. Site Address - -• • •
*h. UTM Coordinates
1. Sketch map showing the monitor placement with
respect to other monitors, major highways,
and major stationary emission sources within
the city or five mile radius if a rural site.
"TT
-------
Topography and Atmospheric Ventilation
What is the topography that might restric
or affect.the atmospheric ventilation
over the site. Point out the hills,
valleys, trees, terrain and how the
air flows over the site. A picture
showing a 360° view of the area
around the site helps point out
the air restrictions such as
buildings, hills, and valleys.
*2.1.4. Pollutant Sources
It ts important to know the pollutant sources in close
proximity to the monitor. Ltst the major pollutant sources and the
distance they are from the station. Publications such as the "Nation-
vide Air Pollutant Emission Trends, 1940-1970," AP 115 and the "Com-
pilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors," AP-42 may be of help in
pointing out the major sources of pollutants. If there are many
major pollutant sources each should be described.
" •smm—
-------
\
2.1.5. The Heating and Air Conditioning Requirements
Many heating and cooling systems generate one or more of
• *
the criteria pollutants. If these systems are used in a monitoring
station, these pollutants might affect the air quality near the air
tnlet. For this reason, the Regional Office should know how the station
is heated, cooled, and ventilated, and how the monitors are protected
from these local sources.
2.2. Special Information Concerning The Station For Continuous
Monitors
2.2.1. Sample Manifold Design
Proper manifold design is essential for continuous monitors.
The design may be such that the air flows so slow that the constituents
have time to react with the manifold. It is desirable that the actual
manifold design be known for each site. (A drawing of the design will
help show the details). This subject is discussed in greater length
In the "Field Operations Guide for Automatic Air Monitoring Equipment,"
APTD-0736.
*2.2.2. Sample Manifold Composition
Reactions between the manifold and the constituents of the
atr sample will cause the composition of the air in the manifold to change.
fLU"1J ; ~""~™" T«"~-'2^V1 "*"4>- '"V?J-L" " u '"• ^
-------
-V
Thus, when that body of air ts analyzed, an unrepresentative air quality
may be reported. Guideline APTD-0736 gives a more detailed discussion
on the manifold composition.
2.2.3. Electrical Requirements
Adequate power supply is essential for continuous moni-
toring. The addition of auxiliary equipment may cause voltage fluc-
tuations. A constant voltage supply is needed for sophisticated instru-
ments. To know if an adequate power supply is being received by all
instruments, the power requirements of each instrument and auxiliary
equipment as well as the monitoring line fluctuations should be known.
This information might be organized into a table like the one in the
suggested checklist. (Appendix B).
2.3. Special Information Concerning Primary And Secondary Pollutant
Stations And Air Inlets
2.3.1. Siting Positions For Estimating Maximum Pollutant
Concentrati ons
To complete this description, a table as that in Appendix A
should be constructed. For example, Appendix A gives a guideline for
siting the station location and positioning the air inlet for areas of
estimated maximum pollutant concentrations. In response to the checklist
(item 9) describes where the station is with respect to population density,
traffic, tall buildings, intersections, street curbs, center-cities, and
what is the supporting structure, vertical and horizontal clearance of the
air inlet.
The term "roof top" should be described by telling how many stories
-------
high, how many feet from the ground, and the location of this roof top
With respect to other roof tops and thetr heights. More details are
described in "Guidance For Air Quality Monitoring Network Design and
Instrument Setting" OAQPS #1.2-012. The table should contain the actual
description rather than those suggested by a guideline. This is a summary
sheet that describes the station and air Inlet for a quick review.
3. INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION
3.1. General Information Concerning All Instruments
*3.1.1. Identification Of The Manufacturer, Trade Name, And
Model Of The Instrument
Many instrumental techniques are unique for each manufacturer
and model number, even if the same general principles apply to all of the
Instruments. The identification of the manufacturer, trade name, date
manufactured, and model number of each instrument is essential.
3.1.2. Application Of The Instrument
All Instruments should be used to monitor the pollutant
that It was designed to monitor. However, in some cases, the instru-
ment might be altered at the station to monitor other pollutants, or
to monitor a given pollutant by a different technique than initially
designed. The present instrument application should be known.
*3.1.3. SAROAD Codes Used By NADB To Store The Data From
Each Monitoring Instrument Used At Each Site
The SAROAD pollutant method code is the code which is used
by the National Aerometric Data Bank to indicate the pollutant and the
method of analysis. By obtaining the SAROAD POLUTMTH Code for each
monitoring instrument, identification is established between the code
-------
— — Tr
8
and the instrument. UNIT and INTERVAL Codes should coincide with the
data measurement units and intervals. This information is essential for
data analysis and interpretation. The Regional Office should consult
the SAROAD Users Manual, Office of Air Programs Publication No. APTD-0663.
*3.1.4. The Type Of Monitor •
To describe an instrument by type could be lengthy and in
great detail, however, for this guideline the following are sufficient:
a. Measuring principle e.g. colorimetric, nondispersive
tnfrared, etc.
b. Manual or instrumental monitors.
*3.1.5. Monitoring Techniques
Many monitoring techniques presently being employed have
been scrutinized and found to be unacceptable methods. Monitoring techniques
often vary from site-to-site. For these reasons a detailed description of
the monitoring technique for each site should be known by the Regional Office,
The document OAQPS 1.2-017 gives a brief description of most of the criteria
pollutant monitoring techniques presently in use. The description of the
details can be accomplished by 1. citing this document if it describes the
monitoring technique, 2. citing other easily accessible references and 3. or
by writing the detailed description.
3.2. Special Information Concerning Continuous Instruments
3.2.1. Performance Specifications Of The Instrument
The performance specifications are usually given by the
manufacturer. However, operating procedures may have been altered at the
station, and the instrument performance could have changed. The new per-
il
\ formance specifications and a description of the methods used in establishing
\
.j ' the specifications would be sufficient for this part of the description.
-------
APPENDIX A
SITING GUIDELINES FOR AREAS OF ESTIMATED KAXIKUM P3LLUTANI CONCENTRATIONS
rOLLUTAXT CATEGORY
?i*irr.ary Stationary
Source Pollutant
Prirsary Mob tic
Source Pollutant'
POLLUTANT
SO,
N02°
Particulates
• •-• "
CO (1-hour
averaging time)
CO (8-hour
averaging time)
STATION LOCATION
Determined from atmosphere
diffusion model, historical
data, emission density, and
representative of population
exposure.
Same as above
Some as above
Representing area of high
traffic density, slow
moving traffic & obstruc-
tions to air flow (till
buildings) & pedestrian
population such as mijor
downtown traffic inter-
sections. 10-15 fecc
from street curb.
Representing nrca of high
traffic density in rjsi-
dcntial area j;uch no major
thoroughfare In ccnt»r city
or suburban nrca. 10-15
feet from street curb.
POSITION OF AT3 TKLST
Ground or
Roof Top
Roof Top
Ground
Ground
SUPPORTING VERTICAL CLEARANCE
STRUCTURE "AliOVE SUPPORTING
Ground or
Roof Topd
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
5-6
5-6
5-6
HORIZONTAL
itt:Yo:,D SUPI
STIU1CVUUH,
1-Tr.
* 5
* 5
>5
-------
SITING GUIDELINES FOR AREAS OP ESTIMATED MAXIMUM TOLLUTANT CONCENTRATIONS (CONTINUED)
.VJ7ANT CATEGORY
POLLUTANT
;cor,dary Pollutant Oxldants
NO.
STATION LOCATION
Representing residential
area downwind of dov'-ntovn
arcn (5-15 wiles frcn dcwn-
town and > 300 feet from
major traffic arteries or
parking areas).
Same as above
POSITION OF AIR IKLF.T
SUPPORTING VERTICAL CLEARANCE KCRIZCXTAL CLEAT-A
ST11UCTUR5 AEOVE SUPl'OIVriJIG ililYCJZD SU?P:::.TIi:G
STOUCTURK, ri-i/r STUUCTCRP. i-r.£7a
Ground or
Roof Top
Ground or.
Roof Top
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
> 5
>5
>5
>5
Not applicable vhere air inlet is located above supporting structure.
V
Dovnwind of prevailing daytime wind direction during oxldant season.
When standard reference method (or equivalent) is suggcs-ted.
How many stories high and how many feet above the ground.
-------
APPENDIX B
Sample Checklist
This list is designed for the Regional Office to use
to obtain data which may aid in writing the site description.
*1. Objective for Monitoring ' .
*2. The Type of Station (Mobile CO, Mobile HC, Stationary CO,
etc).
' *3. Location of the station (site categories and physical
location):
a. Urban (high density pop.) (low density pop.)
1. Commercial (high density) (low density)
2. Industrial (high density)
(low density)
3. Residential
b. Suburban(high density pop.)
1. Commercial
2. Industrial
(low density pop.)
3. Residential
c. Rural (high density pop.)
d. EPA Region State_
AQCR
City
(low density pop.}_
SMSA
County
Address (map in Appendix •- )
UTM Coordinates
*4. Pollutant Source
above ground '
-------
a. Commercial
Probe
b. Industrial_
Profce
Type
tons/yr_
Type
tons/yr
5", Topography:
Distance From
Distance From
Type & Size " Proximity Orientation
a. Isolated Hills:
b. Isolated Valleys;
C. Bodies of Water;
Bodies of Trees :
e- Terrain (check one) generally smooth
, or rough
f. Picture of a 360° view from the probe of the monitoring
site
6. Atmospheric Ventilation:
B •
a. Generally Good Q
b. Generally Restricted Q
c. Directionally Biased Q v> Direction:
d. Interferences to Normal Air Flow:(Buildings, Hills, Trees, Streets, etc)
I
Type & Size: j
«
Proximity:
-------
1 I
* 7. Probe and Manifold
Inlet flowrate
b. Probe inside diameter
1/min
in.
c. Sample manifold composition and length
d. Manifold design (drawn)—-———
e. List of each monitor on the manifold and intake
sampling airflow rate -
MONITOR ' ' • ___FLOWRAT*E
f.
-
...
Distance of probe from sources as heavy traffic,
curbs, parking lots, shopping center, town centers,
major highways, etc.
*8. Instrument [complete a checklist for each instrument)
a.- -Manufacture and/or Vendor (s)
b. Trade name and/or model No.
C. Application (SO2/ NC>2' HC' TSP» etc. monitor)
d." Measuring technique (cite publication which describes
.'.the.-technique) coloriir.etric> chemiluminescence, etc.
TECHNIQUE ' REFERENCE
-------
• •"-•->'
e. Sulitsjndtic diagram (sin.pJc diagram of the basic flov
and electronic circuit.
f . Auxilliary equipment and electrical requirements
j^ Item Quanity Voltage and Ampere Service _
g. Line Voltage Droos
^Frequencies Minimum voltage during voltage drop
h. A copy of the instrument performance specifications.
i..-:.. SAROAD Code (POLUTHMTH, UNIT, INTERVAL, etc.)
j. A copy of th£ method used to obtain the instrument
performance specifications.
-------
9; SITING* FOR THE STATION AND AIR INLET
POSITION 0? AIR IITLF.T
V7ANT CATEGORY
POLLUTANT
STATION LOCATION
SUPPORTING VERTICAL CLEASAXCS
STUu'CTUKS A20VE SUITOXTING
STRUCTURE. I-KI:T
...t _.
-------
GUIDELINE SERIES
OAQPS NO. 1.2-008
GUIDELINES FOR THE INTERPRETATION OF
AIR QUALITY STANDARDS, MDAD. 8/74.
(FINAL)
US. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
GUIDELINES FOR THE INTERPRETATION
OF AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
August 1974
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
-------
INTRODUCTION
This guideline document discusses a series of issues concerning
the interpretation of air quality data as it relates to the National
Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS). The issues presented deal
with points of interpretation that have frequently resulted in
requests for further clarification. This document states each issue
with a recommendation and a discussion indicating our current
position. It is hoped that this document will serve as a useful step
in the evolutionary development of a uniform and consistent set of
criteria for relating ambient air quality data to the NAAQS.
-------
ISSUE 1: Given that there are a number of monitoring sites within an
Air Quality Control Region (AQCR), does each of these sites
have to meet the National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS)? In particular, if only one of these sites exceeds
a standard, does that mean that the AQCR is in nonconformance
of the standards even though all other sites meet the
standard?
Recommendation
Each monitoring site within the AQCR must meet the standard or
the region is in nonconformance with that standard.
Discussion
The NAAQS1 were defined to protect human health and welfare. The
presence of one monitoring site within an AQCR violating any given
standard indicates that receptors are being exposed to possibly harmful
pollutant concentrations.
Concentrations in excess of standard values at a single monitoring
station may result from the effect of a small, nearby source which is
insignificant in terms of the total emission inventory, or the station
in violation may be so located that the probability that individuals
would be exposed for prolonged periods is negligible. Such circum-
stances do not mitigate the recommended interpretation of the question
raised by this issue since NAAQS are generally interpreted as being set
to protect health and welfare regardless of the population de.nsity.
Although air quality improvement should be stressed in areas of maximum
concentrations and areas of highest population exposure, the goal of
ultimately achieving standards should apply to all locales. Data from
monitoring sites are the only available measure of air quality and must
be accepted at face value. Attention is thus focused on the selection
of monitoring sites in terms of the representativeness of the air they
sample. This is discussed in more detail in the'guideline series
document entitled "Guidance for Air Quality Monitoring Network Design
and Instrument Siting," (OAQPS No. 1.2-012"). Consideration should be
given to the relocation of monitoring stations not meeting the guideline
criteria.
-------
ISSUE 2: How many significant figures should be employed when making
comparisons with the NAAQS and what system of units should
be used?
Recommendation
Comparisons with the standards should be made after converting
the raw data to micrograms (or milligrams) per cubic meter. All
comparisons are made after rounding the air quality value to the
nearest integer value in micrograms per cubic meter (or milligrams per
cubic meter for carbon monoxide). The rounding convention to be
employed is that values whose fractional part is greater than or
equal to .50 should be rounded up and those less than 0.50 should be
rounded down. The following examples should clarify these points.
Computed Value Rounded Value
79.50 80
80.12 80
80.51 81
81.50 82
Discussion
By letting the standard itself dictate the number of significant
figures to be used in comparisons, many computational details are
minimized while still maintaining a level of protection that is con-
sistent with the standard. It should be noted that the parenthetical
expressions given in the NAAQS indicating parts per million (ppm) may
be used as a guide but in some cases, such as the annual standard for
sulfur dioxide, may require additional signficant figures to be
equivalent.
-------
ISSUE 3: Short-term standards are specified as concentrations which
are not to be exceeded more than once per year. How is
this to be interpreted when analyzing data obtained from
multiple monitoring sites?
Recommendation
Each site is allowed one excursion above the standard per year.
If any site exceeds the standard more than once per year, a violation
has occurred.
Discussion
By examining each site separately, data processing problems are
lessened and, more importantly, regions employing more than the
required minimum number of monitoring sites would not be unduly
penalized.
-------
ISSUE 4: How should compliance with the NAAQS by July 1975 and 1977
be determined?
Recommendati on
Base the preliminary determination of compliance on adherence
to the implementation plan emission reduction schedules. Confirm
compliance with NAAQS by air quality surveillance during the
calendar year 1976. However, noncompliance with short-term standards
can be determined during the last six months of 1975 if two concentra-
tions in excess of the standards occur. Similarly, for AQCRs or
states which do not have to achieve NAAQS until 1977, compliance
would be based on data obtained in 1978.
Discussion
Implementation plans based on bringing many individual or cate-
gories of sources into compliance with emission regulations by
July 1975 have been granted at least conditional approval. However,
a twelve-month period of air quality surveillance is required to
determine annual average air quality values. Further, the calendar
year has been recommended as the time unit for the calculation of
annual average concentrations (see Issue 5). Obviously the calendar
year of data required to demonstrate that annual NAAQS have been
achieved by the control activities fully implemented by July 1975
cannot begin before 1 January 1976. Noncompliance with short period
standards can be determined in less than a calendar year by the
occurrence of two concentrations in excess of the NAAQS. Before an
AQCR can be said to be in compliance with short-term NAAQS, a full
twelve-month period of air quality surveillance records, encompassing
all four seasons, must be available for examination.
-------
ISSUE 5: What period of record of air quality data is necessary
to establish the status of an AQCR with respect to the NAAQS?
Recommendation
Each AQCR should be treated as a separate case in establishing
its status with respect to the NAAQS (this issue should be considered
in conjunction with Issue 4).
Discussion
Although each AQCR would be examined individually, the gradual
establishment of precedents would eventually provide consistency.
This option would consider differences in monitoring coverage,
meteorology, the type and mix of sources, and unusual economic
circumstances. Case by case treatment would allow greater flexibility
in examining borderline cases, such as annual averages which fluctuate
around the standard, or short-term excursions above the air quality
standards. Use of this option is illustrated by the following examples:
(1) S02 concentrations during the heating season in a northern AQCR
are lower than the short-term standards. If it can be shown that the
number of hearing degree days, the industrial activity, and the
dilution capacity of the atmosphere favored the occurrence of high
SOp concentrations, then the status of the AQCR with respect to the
NAAQS would be evaluated accordingly, (2) eight-hour average CO
concentrations in an AQCR fluctuate about the standard. The period
of record was unusually favorable for the dispersion of pollutants.
Hence, a longer and more representative period of record is required
to evaluate the status of this AQCR with respect to the NAAQS.
-------
ISSUE 6: The NAAQS are defined in terms of a year, i.e., annual mean
concentrations and short-term concentrations not to be
exceeded more than once per year. What is meant by the term
"year" and how frequently should air quality summaries be
prepared to conform to that definition?
Recommendation
The term "year" means a calendar year and air quality summaries
should be prepared for that period.
Discussion
While pollutant exposures may overlap calendar years, the use of
a calendar year for air quality summaries remains a simple and conven-
tional practice. Indeed, inquiries concerning air quality are most
frequently expressed in terms of a calendar year. The data do not
warrant quarterly evaluation of compliance or noncompliance with NAAQS,
nor would it be reasonable to revise emission control requirements on
a quarterly basis. This of course does not remove the need for
continual appraisal of air quality on a quarterly or monthly basis to
assess both status and progress with respect to the standards. Such
efforts are obviously useful and sometimes necessary to ensure that
standards are met on a calendar year basis.
-------
ISSUE 7A: The NAAQS for CO and S02 include eight-hour and three-hour
averages, respectively. For such standards how is the time
interval defined?
Recommendation
Compliance with these standards should be judged on the basis of
running averages starting at each clock-hour. However, in determining
violations of the standard the problem of overlap must be considered.
This point can best be illustrated by consideration of the 8-hour CO
average. In order to exceed the 8-hour CO standard twice there must
be two 8-hour averages above the standard and the time periods for
these averages must not contain any common hourly data points. A
simple counting procedure for this interpretation'for 8-hour CO is to
proceed sequentially through the data and "each" time a violation is
recorded the next seven clock houjcs--are'ignored and then the counting
is resumed. In this way there is no problem with overlap.
Discussion
This issue has generated considerable interest concerning the
relative merits of fixed versus running averages. At the present time
the computational advantages of the fixed interval approach are out-
weighed by the following properties of running averages: (1) running
averages afford more protection than fixed averages and this additional
margin appears warranted, (2) running averages more accurately reflect
the dosage to receptors and (3) running averages provide more equitable
control from one region to another due to differences in diurnal
patterns.
In discussing this issue there are certain related points that
are worth mentioning. It should be noted that a clock-hour is the
smallest time interval suggested for reporting data and that 24-hour
averages are interpreted as daily averages. Factors influencing these
suggestions include computational complexity, differences in reporting
intervals for various measurement methods, and the need to maintain
both uniform and consistent control from one region to another.
While the proposed counting scheme determines the number of times
the standard is exceeded the second highest value is commonly used for
planning purposes. The determination of the second highest value in
the case of running averages has certain technical subtleties that are
discussed in detail in issue 7B.
-------
ISSUE 7B: When using running averages for 8-hour and 3-hour averages
how should the second highest value be determined?
Recommendati on
The second highest value should be determined so that there is
one other non-overlapping value that is at least as high as the second
highest value. Although this seems relatively straightforward the
following discussion indicates some of the subtleties involved.
Discussion
The use of running averages to determine compliance with specific
air quality standards necessitates that the number of values above
the standard be evaluated on the basis of non-overlapping time periods.
That is, any two values above the standard must be distinct and not have
any common hours. This can be achieved by a relatively straightforward
counting procedure. For example, in the case of 8-hour CO an 8-hour
average can be associated with each clock hour of the calendar year.
Then values above the 8-hour standard are counted sequentially beginning
with the first 8-hour average of the year. Each time a violation is
counted the next seven 8-hour values are ignored, and the counting
procedure resumes with the eighth 8-hour average. This counting pro-
cedure results in the maximum number of non-overlapping violations
of the 8-hour standard.
This count is all that is needed to evaluate compliance with the
8-hour standard because the standard is not to be exceeded more than
once per year; and, therefore, any count value greater than one is
sufficient to indicate non-compliance. However, it is also desirable
to employ the second highest 8-hour average to indicate the magnitude
of the problem. There are several ways to define the second highest
value, and three possible definitions will be indicated here in order
to briefly discuss their consistency with the counting procedure described
above. The three definitions considered for the second highest value
are: 1) the second highest 8-hour value of those counted as being
above the standard, 2) the second highest 8-hour value that does not
overlap the maximum 8-hour value, and 3) the maximum second highest
non-overlapping 8-hour average.
Annotated graphs of 8-hour CO are used to facilitate the discussion
of the consequences of each definition. For example, Figure 1 illustrates
that the first definition underestimates the magnitude of the problem
because the counting procedure may count the first time the standard
is exceeded and bypass the peak values. Therefore this definition is
inadequate.
-------
Although the second definition is intuitively appealing, Figure 2
illustrates that in some cases there could be two violations of the
standard, and yet the second highest value that does not overlap the
maximum is less than the standard. This can only occur in marginal
cases in which the standard is only exceeded during one fifteen hour
period in the year and that the maximum value occurs in the middle, of
this interval. Figure 3a and 3b show another case in which this
definition produces the peculiarity that a higher CO value may lower
the second highest value.
In order to avoid these inconsistencies it becomes necessary
to define the second highest value as the maximum second highest
non-overlapping value. What this means is that there is one 8-hour
value that is greater than or equal to the maximum second highest
value and that these two values are not overlapping. It is important
to recognize that the maximum second highest value may overlap the
maximum 8-hour value. However, as shown in Figure 2, there is still
one other 8-hour non-overlapping value that exceeds the maximum second
high.
With these subtleties in mind, it seems appropriate to use the
maximum second highest non-overlapping value as the second high. In
this way, the magnitude of the problem is properly assessed; and the
second high value is always consistent with the number of violations.
This definition of the second highest value is also consistent with the
approach used in determining control strategies on the basis of the roll-
back equation. It is this maximum second highest value that must be
reduced below the standard in order to satisfy the requirement that
the standard not be exceeded more than once per year.
-------
Figure 1
8-Hour
Average
Standard
/ \
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HOUR
Using the counting procedure the violations are counted at
hours 3 and 12 as indicated by the x's. Note that the peak values
do not occur at these points.
-------
Figure 2
A / \
' » , — .-
A
/ V
T9~20
There are two non-overlapping violations at hours 3 and 12, and
these are detected by the counting procedure. However, the maximum
occurs at hour 8 and the second is below the standard. However in
this case the maximum second maximum would be V2i which is above
the standard. Although Vo overlaps the maximum, M, there is one eight-
hour average, namely V,, that is at least as high as V9 and the two
time periods are disjoint. '
-------
Figure 3a
12
i n
10
8
A
_/ \
A
/ y
NX^N/ - V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 1920 21 22 23 24
Figure 3b
14
12
10
8
_A
r^ \^\
J ^—
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
In Figure 3a the maximum value is 12 as well as the second
highest value. However, in Figure 3b the maximum is now 14, and
the second highest value that does not overlap the 14 is below the
standard. Therefore the second highest value that does not overlap the
maximum can actually be lowered by having more high values. It should
be noted that in both of the above cases the maximum second hiahest
non-overlapping value is 12.
-------
Issue 8: The chances of detecting violations of 24-hour maximum
standards depend considerably upon the frequency with which
the air is monitored. In view of this, how should data
obtained from intermittent monitoring be interpreted?
Recommendation
Sampling at monitoring sites which yields only partial annual
coverage is not necessarily sufficient to show compliance with "once
per year" standards. Although noncompliance will not be declared on
the basis of predicted values, it is possible that predicted values in
excess of the standard may necessitate more frequent sampling at a
particular site.
Discussion
Ideally, continuous monitoring of all pollutants would be conducted.
However, except for those pollutants specified in Federal regulations,
EPA does not currently require continuous monitoring. Thus, one is
left with either (1) predictive equations employing data from partial
annual coverage, or (2) the data collected through partial annual
coverage. Since the accuracy of predictive equations is not well
established, the remaining alternative is to judge compliance on the
basis of partial annual coverage; however, states at their option,
could sample more frequently than the required minimum. Partial annual
coverage schedules make detection of short-term violations difficult.
The entries in the following table are the probabilities of choosing
two or more days on which excursions have occurred for different numbers
of actual excursions above the standard and different sampling frequen-
cies. The underlying assumption in determining these probabilities is that
excursions above the standard occur randomly over the days of the year.
This is, of course, an oversimplification but is sufficient for the
purposes of this discussion.
-------
Probability of selecting two or more days when site is above standard
Sampling Frequency - days per year
Actual Number of excursions 61/365 122/365 183/365
2 0.03 0.11 0.25
4 0.13 a.41 0.69
6 0.26 0.65 0.89
8 0.40 0.81 0.96
10 0.52 0.90 0.99
12 0.62 0.95 0.99
14 0.71 0.97 0.99
16 0.78 0.98 0.99
18 0.83 0.99 0.99
20 0.87 0.99 0.99
22 0.91 0.99 0.99
24 0.93 0.99 0.99
26 0.95 0.99 0.99
From this table it is clear that the frequency of sampling must
be considered in judging compliance with "once per year" standards.
The present recommendation was selected so that more frequent monitoring
does not inherently penalize a given area. At the same time a certain
degree of flexibility in the use of predictive equations such as the one
discussed by Larsen ("A Mathematical Model for Relating Air Quality
Measurements to Air Quality Standards," EPA Publication No. AP-89) is
left to those who evaluate compliance. At the present time it is
difficult to suggest a predictive equation that has equal validity at
all sites. It is felt that this determination should be made on a case
by case basis after a detailed evaluation of the site in question.
-------
ISSUE 9: How should particulate matter, CO and other pollutant
concentrations resulting from severe recurring dust storms,
forest fires, volcanic activity and other natural sources
be taken into account in determining compliance with NAAQS?
Recommendation
Regardless of the source, ambient pollutant concentrations
exceeding a NAAQS constitute a violation.
Discussion
Ambient pollutant concentrations exceeding the NAAQS and resulting
from emissions from natural sources constitute a violation. However,
such violations should not be used as a basis for developing or
revising an existing, across-the-board control strategy.
-------
ISSUE 10: Should all available air quality data or only those
derived from air quality surveillance systems, as
specified in a state implementation plan (SIP), be
used to determine compliance with NAAQS?
Recommendation
All available valid air quality data representative of the
exposure of receptors can be used to determine compliance with NAAQS.
This includes data obtained from the air quality surveillance system
specified in the applicable SIP, data obtained from the National Air
Surveillance Network (NASN), data obtained by industry monitoring
stations, data obtained from monitoring stations installed and
operated by concerned citizens, etc.
Discussion
NAAQS have been established to protect the health and welfare
of the population. If the NAAQS have validity, the violation of .
a standard at any point in the AQCR is significant. Even though a
station is not part of the established surveillance network, if
acceptable methods, procedures, calibrations and recordings have been
used and can be verified, and the station is located in accordance with
applicable criteria for representativeness, the data from that station
should be used for the determination of conformity with NAAQS.
-------
ISSUE 11: May monitoring for certain pollutants be restricted to
only a portion of the day? For example, in the case
of oxidant, which has a clear diurnal pattern, would it
suffice to monitor only during the hours from 8 a.m. to
6 p.m.?
Recommendation
Partial daily monitoring of pollutants subject to short-term
NAAQS is not allowed (except nonmethane hydrocarbons where 6-9 a.m.
is specified in the NAAQS). All hours of the day must be monitored,
except perhaps for one hour missed during instrument calibration, and
reported, and will be used in evaluating compliance.
Discussion
While specific pollutants show rather consistent diurnal patterns
of concentration, particularly when mean hourly values are considered,
the concentration patterns are subject to modification with both seasonal
and short period changes of meteorological conditions. This is most
noticeable when a region is subjected to episode conditions. In
addition, the actual local time of occurrence of periods of high concen-
trations will vary from AQCR to AQCR and perhaps from monitoring station
to monitoring station within an AQCR. Extensive study of patterns and
trends exhibited by pollutant concentrations within each AQCR would be
required to select the portion of the day to be monitored if partial
monitoring were allowed. Further, monitoring data for the full twenty-
four hour period will help determine the extent and duration of
episodes and contribute to the determination of the need for emergency
control measures.
It should be noted that automatic monitoring devices used to
obtain sequential hourly data are seldom amenable to shut-down and
subsequent start-up without a warm-up and stabilization period.
-------
GUIDELINE SERIES
OAQPS NO.
1.2-020
GUIDANCE FOR DECENTRALIZATION AND
CONTINUED OPERATION OF THE NASN
(DRAFT)
VS. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
DRAFT
GUIDANCE FOR DECENTRALIZATION AND CONTINUED
OPERATION OF THE NASN
September 1974
OAQPS Number 1.2-020
Monitoring and Data Analysis Division
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
and
Quality Assurance and Environmental Monitoring Laboratory
National Environmental Research Center
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
•
PAGE
INTRODUCTION X
QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE NASN NETWORK • *
QUESTIONS CONCERNING DATA 4
QUESTIONS CONCERNING TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICULATES 6
QUESTIONS CONCERNING SULFUR DIOXIDE (OR NO2> 7
APPENDIX A Quality Assurance Performance Audit Procedures
APPENDIX B Stations Which Are Designated As Critical
To Retain Indefinitely
-------
I. INTRODUCTION
The Monitoring and Data Analysis Division, OAQPS in co-
operation with the Quality Assurance and Environmental
Monitoring Laboratory of the NERC-RTP, has prepared this
guideline document concerning the operation of the NASN
network.
The purpose of this guideline is to assure uniformity
of the RO's in the operation and continuation of the network
and to allow a number of important uses of the data to con-
tinue on an uninterrupted basis.
The continued operation of this network is vital to
EPA since the data are used in many decision making areas
such as the development of air quality and emission standards
Further, it is our only data source for the establishment of
long term trends in S02 and TSP as well as non-criteria
pollutants such as sulfates, nitrates, BaP, etc. The hi-vol
filters provide a mean for retrospective analysis of parti-
culate pollutants such as the ten year lead study and for
determination of long term concentration on new particulate
pollutants which may become of interest to the agency. In
addition it provides the major source of nitrogen dioxide
data during a period for which no reference method for N02
currently exists.
Because many questions have been raised by the Regional
Offices over the last few months concerning the operation
of the NASN, the guideline is structured to pose and answer
the majority of these questions.
II. QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE NASN NETWORK
Q. Can the NASN network be decentralized to the State??
A. It is our desire to have the Regional Office maintain
the responsibility for operation of the network. However, if
resources are not available and if in the judgement of the
Regional Office the state monitoring program is capable and
has demonstrated adequate performance, then the network may
be decentralized.
-------
The following conditions would apply if the RO turned
over the NASN operation to the State.
1. If the station was not part of the SIP network,
then the RO should obtain an agreement from the state to include
it in their SIP network and to be responsible for any necessary
maintenance. The RO should provide grant funds for this pur-
pose.
2. If the state decides at a later point in time
not to analyze the samples from a station, the Regional
Office will have to make ^ committment to continue the
operation of the station by performing the necessary
laboratory analyses.
3. State agrees to participate in a periodic quality
control check.
4. All TSP filters currently being received by QAEML
will continue to be sent by the state.
Q. How can the state monitoring program demonstrate
adequate performance?
A. The state must pass independent audit checks as
described in the Guidelines for Development of a Quality
Assurance Program Series EPA-R4-73-028 and summarized in
Appendix A.
Q. What should the RO be prepared to do to effectively
achieve decentralization of the NASN network?
A. 1. The RO should be capable of performing inde-
pendent audit checks (Appendix A).
2. The RO should be prepared to devote approxi-
mately two man years of effort toward the smooth decentra-
lization of the NASN network to the"states. This effort
would be in the form of guidance, training and audits
similar to that done by QAEML when they decentralized the
network to the RO's.
Q. What guidance is available to the RO to give to the
states?
A. 1. The series "Guidelines for Development of a
Quality Assurance Program," EPA-R4-73-028-a,b,c and d is
-------
method specific for the criteria pollutant, of S02, CO,
TSP and Oxidants using the reference method.
2. "Quality Control Practices in Processing Air
Pollution Samples" APTD-1132 provides general guidance for
minimizing sources of variation inherent in all analytical
functions and to evaluate and document the ability of an
analytical system or person to produce results which are
valid within predetermined acceptance limits.
3. The Air Pollution Training Institute is avail-
able, upon request, to provide training both at NERC-RTP
and the Regional Offices for Regional Office and state
and local personnel.
4. QAEML, quality control activities are also avail-
able to provide limited assistance to the states upon request
by a RO.
Q. Which NASN stations should be retained in operation
and for how long?
A. 1. All sites should remain in operation through
CY 1975.
2. After 1975, although it is desirable to maintain
all stations, we have identified in Appendix B, a list of
stations which we feel are critical to retain indefinitely.
This list consists of all nonurban stations and urban stations
which have a long history of data.
Q. Can any of the NASN stations be moved?
A. In general, the NASN stations should not be moved
from their present location. However, the station may be
moved for any of the reasons listed.below. The Regional
Office should inspect the site and submit a report to the
QAEML and MDAD for concurrence before any changes are made.
a. razing of supporting structure
b. sampling location has become inaccessible
c. restrictions to air flow due to new buildings
in area of sampling inlet
d. undue or unreasonable influence of emission
sources in the immediate vicinity
-------
e. repeated vandalism
f. extensive urban renewal project in imme-
diate area (station may be moved back
when urban project is completed).
If a station is moved, a new SAROAD site description
form should be submitted to NADB.
Q. Can state sites be co-located with existing NASN
sites?
A. If the Regional Office is responsible for the net-
work, duplicate sites would be legitimate for quality con-
trol purposes for short time periods (on the order of 3 to
9 months). After appropriate quality control checks have
been made, the NASN equipment could be used to check other
state sites or be pulled back to Regional Office equipment '
pool for use in special studies.
If the state has taken over the NASN, then the state
should move their equipment and use it for another SIP moni-
toring station.
Q. Can the State substitute one of their existing sites
for an existing NASN site?
A. No. The purpose of the network is to provide infor-
mation gathered at particular locations for an extended time
period. By switching or substituting sites, this time history
of data would be lost and the site would be like any other
in the SIP network.
The only exception to this would be if the state could
demonstrate over a two year period that the proposed replace-
ment sites exhibits the same kind of air quality trends
and absolute concentrations.
Q. Can the state substitute their own equipment for
Federal equipment at an existing NASN site?
A. Yes, if the state uses EPA procedures and methods
as described in April 30, 1971 Federal Register.
III. QUESTIONS CONCERNING DATA
Q. How frequently and where should air quality data
be submitted?
-------
A. All data should be sent directly to NADB no later than
45 days after the close of the calendar quarter. We encourage
sending data on a shorter time schedule if practicable.
Q. Should any other information be submitted along
with the data?
A. Yes. The Quality Assurance Performance Audit forms
for the appropriate pollutants should be submitted on forms
on a quarterly basis directly to the Quality Assurance Staff,
QAEML. For your convenience, copies of these forms are
included in Appendix A.
Q. Are new SAROAD Site Forms required?
A. If the analysis will be performed by the RO, each
site must be redefined with the Supporting Agency listed as
Regional Office. This requires a new site form, not a revised
one, since the Supporting Agency Code will change. If the
analysis will be performed by a State or local Agency and a
site already exists with the proper Supporting Agency Code,
then no new site form should be submitted.
Q. What will the new Supporting Agency Code be if the
Regional Office is doing the analysis?
A. If the Regional Office is conducting the pollutant
analysis, the Supporting Agency Code will be a "P." The "P"
site will have to be defined on the site file and all data
should carry the "P" code.
Q. When should the new data start using the "P" Agency
Code?
A. Arrangements were originally made with QAEML for
all 1973 NASN data to be coded with the old "A" code and sent
directly to QAEML. The 1973 data was subsequently sent to
NADB. Beginning with 1974 data, all data should be coded
with the new Agency Code.
Q. Why should all 1973 use the "A" Agency Code even if
decentralization had already taken place?
A. First, many Regional Offices were not able to complete
the decentralization until sometime into 1973 and it was
felt that one consistent starting date would be appropriate.
Secondly, data split between Agency Codes in the middle of a
calendar year could never satisfy the annual summary criteria
and therefore annual statistics could never be calculated on
the 1973 data.
-------
Q. What if the monitoring was decentralized to the
State or local level? Should the 1973 data have been
submitted to QAEML as "A" data?
A. Yes, because QAEML, in effect, was still responsible
for the laboratory analysis until the end of 1973 even though
another agency was actually performing the laboratory work.
Q. What should be done if the above instructions were
not followed?
» *
A. Contact the National Air Data Branch.
IV. QUESTIONS CONCERNING TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICULATE
Q. How often and where should' the TSP-hi-vol filters
be submitted?
A. The filters should be submitted monthly to the
Quality Assurance and Environmental Monitoring Laboratory
at the NERC-RTP.
If the state has taken over the network and the
sampling is being conducted on a six day schedule (as per
the requirements of the August 14, 1971, Federal Register),
then every other filter should be returned. A minimum of
26 filters per year should be submitted, collected to insure
uniform seasonal coverage. However, the states should be
encouraged to return all filters, if they have no plans
for trace material analyses.
Q. What portion of the TSP hi-vol filter should be
returned to QAEML?
s1
A. The entire filter should be returned. The routine
nonurban analysis requires over two-thirds of the filter.
It is necessary to retain a portion of the filter in the
filter bank for retrospective analysis, for analysis of new
pollutants or for other special studies.
Q. Can a state use their own filters instead of those
provided by QAEML?
A. No. In order to be able to analyze the hi-vol filter
samples for trace metals etc., it is necessary to know the
trace constituents in a blank filter. If the states used
their own filters, this information would be unknown and
thus the analysis would be biased.
-------
Q. Should any special precautions, be taken wiLh the
hi-vol filters before submitting it to QAEML?
A. The laboratory doing the analysis should obtain
the total weight as soon as practical (after equilibrating
for 24-hours at 50% relative humidity) to reduce the loss
of organic material.
Q. How often should hi-vol samplers be calibrated?
A. Samplers should be calibrated when first purchased,
after maintenance, any time the flow rate measuring device
has been replaced or repaired, or any time-a one point cali-
bration check deviates more than + 6 percent from the cali-
bration curve. (See Quality Assurance Guideline EPA-R4-73-028b
for more details).
Q. How soon will trace material analyses be available
after receipt of hi-vol filters?
A. QAEML will have the data from trace metal analyses
available within five months after receipt of the filters.
Those pollutants for which quarterly composites are run,
will be available five months after the receipt of one
quarter's filters. The data will be entered into NADB two
weeks after validation by QAEML and can be accessed by the
RO at that time.
V. QUESTIONS CONCERNING SULFUR DIOXIDE (OR NITROGEN DIOXIDE)
Q. Is QAEML doing any analysis of NASN sulfur dioxide
samples?
A. No. The decentralization of the operation of the
NASN to the Regional Offices included the analysis of the
bubblers.
Q. May the Regional Office give the states the responsi-
bility to do the S02 analysis as well as the operation of
the NASN? •
A. Yes. However, the RO must be assured of the capa-
bility of the state to produce valid data. This assurance
would come from applying the independent audit checks as
described in the "Guidelines for Development of a Quality
Assurance Program" EPA-R4-73-028d and summarized in Appendix A.
-------
Q. Are there any special precautions to be taken in
the sampling and analysis of S02?
A. 1. General quality control considerations are des-
cribed in previously mentioned guideline APTD-1132 and a
step-by-step operations manual and quality assurance program
are described in EPA-R4-73-028d.
2. While it would be desirable for a single laboratory
to perform all the bubbler analysis for the entire region,
a few precautions will go a long way in ensuring uniformity of
the analysis. These are described as follows.
a. Adhere to a rigid sampling schedule so
the absorbing reagent is the same age for all samples.
b. Save a portion of the absorbing reagent
to be used as a blank for the subsequent analysis. Do not
use fresh absorbing reagent as a blank for past samples.
The same applies for constructing calibration curves as well.
c. The analysis of the SC^ samples should be
structured so that there will be a uniform amount of elapsed
time between sampling and analysis, preferably the analysis
should occur as soon as possible after sampling.
d. Where more than one laboratory performs
the analyses, periodic interlaboratory comparisons should
be made using standard samples.
e. Since SC>2 samples have a daily decay rate
which varies from season to season, (see Federal Register,
April 30/ 1971) the sample should be refrigerated if there
is undue delay on the order of 5 to 7 days between sampling
and analysis. If S02 samples are not refrigerated, a daily
decay rate established on a seasonal basis should be used to
correct the analyses.
-------
APPENDIX A
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE PERFORMANCE AUDITS FOR NASN NETWORK
(Independent Duplicate Checks)
Introduction
To attain quality assurance for any measurement system, a number of
activities need to be considered with respect to quality. These activities
include but are not. to be limited to:
1. procurement of equipment and materials
2. training of field operators and laboratory analysts
3. documentation and control of sampling, calibration and
analytical procedures
4. preventative maintenance of equipment
5. control of the design of tne equipment to assure uniformity
of the "hardware" and records of any changes
6. adequate records of equipment failures and major repairs
7. procurement and care of appropriate calibration standards
8. adequate record keeping (using standard forms for recording
raw data, performing computations and reporting results)
9. Performance of special checks and adjustments by field
operators and laboratory analysts during the sampling,
handling, and transport of samples, calibration and
analysis of samples (intralab quality control)
10. review of measurement data for completeness and
reasonableness (data validation)
-------
-2-
11. performance of quality problem investigations (trouble-
shooting)
• 12. conductance of independent performance audits
13. participation in inu.-r1aboratory comparison testing
programs
Many of the? above activities are prevention and correction aspects
of quality assurance—prevention, with the objective of preventing bad
data from occurring, and correction, with the objective of taking
appropriate corrective action when deficiencies or bad data are identified.
Items 1 through 11 are ained at assuring both the precision, or repeatability,
and the accuracy of the measurement system. Item 12 above, the conductance
of independent performance audits i^ one of t~h» kpy activities in asso^ing
or quantitatively measuring uhe quality of data generated from the
measurement system. Item 13 above—the performance of interlaboratory
comparisons is particularly aimed at assessing the accuracy (or relative
bias) of participating laboratories.
The conductance of independent performance audits is primarily a check
on accuracy if different calibration Qt-.inHarHq arp used, and primarily as
a check on precision if the independent audits involve most of the elements
in common with the original measurupcnts. Although it is not always
prnctical, the objective of the independent performance audit is to attain
as complete an independent check as possible, thereby providing a
quantitative afjsessraent of the variability in the measurement involved.
Where performance audits, involve the total measurement system, the agreement
-------
-3-
betwcen the original checks and the independent checks, provide a basis
for statistical confidence limits which can be placed on the individual
reported data from the measurement system. Further, if lack of expected
agreement is obtained, corrective action is indicated'so that the measure-
ment system can be corrected to bring it within expected control. And if
the data obtained since Che last acceptable agreement cannot be corrected,
the validity of the data may be questioned.
The independent performance audit is therefore considered as a
management tool (1) to assess quantitatively how good the measurement and
the resulting data are, and (2) to indicate when the system is in need of
correction.
Scope of Pcrfofinance Audi ts for NASN
EPA guideline documents relating to the NASN network methods are:
EPA-R4-73-028b for High Volume Method and
EPA-K4-73-028d for Sulfur Dioxide Method.
The guidelines for sulfur dioxide can be used as a general guideline for
the nitrogen dioxide because of the similarities of these two bubbler methods.
Although the guidelines outline a number of items for performance
auditing, only three are included on the forms for reporting the NASN results
to EPA. These were selected to include (1) a check involving the sampling
part of the system, (2) a check involving the analytical part of the system,
and (3) an "alternate" check involving the total measurement system.
-------
-4-
Independent Auditing Program
Total System
Sampling Analysis . (Alternate.)
lli-Vol Flow rate calibration Exposed filter weight Dual system
SO Flow rate calibration Measurement of refer- Dual system.
ence samples
N0_ Flow rate calibration Measurement of refer- Dual system
ence samples
Although the use of the dual system is not suggested by the guideline
for SCL, it is desirable that such a check be established as an alternate
auditing procedure for SO and for NO. measurements for consistency with
the hi-vol, and because it provides a simple way of checking the total
measurement system. Similarly, other procedures and practices recommended
by the guidelines should be followed. It is emphasized that quality
assurance practices, including the independent performance audits, are
primarily for the use of the local agencies in maintaining, assessing and
correcting if necessary of measurement systems to assure production of
valid (accurate and precise) data. The performance audits for the NASN
operations delineated herein suffice only to provide EPA with a means of
quantitatively assessing the quality of the- data in the National Air Data
Bank.
It is not suggested that the performance auditing activities of each
agency be limited to those required for NASN reporting. It would be to
each agencies benefit to perform as rnny of the performance audits out 1 mod
in the jcyiid<.'l) nes as resources of the agency will permit.
-------
-5-
Independence of Porfor".inco Audits
Performance auditing is an independent check performed by an
auditor. . The auditing should not be done by the regular field operator
or laboratory analyst who performs the original routine measurement or
analysis. The auditor should be a person at least equally capable as
the regular operator or analyst and should be at least as familiar with
the details of the procedures for performing the measurements or analysis.
Ideally, the auditor would be a more senior and experienced operator or
analyst, or a supervisor. Where such an individual cannot be assigned
as an auditor, the responsibilities of the auditor could be rotated among
existing operators or analysts, and where there is only one operator-analyst,
th.p cnnor"1 <5or ^hoi'ld j^erforrc th
-------
-6-
In short, the work by the auditor should be as independent as possible
from that of the regular operator or analyst. In other words, the
differences in equipment, materials, reagent, calibrations and other
variables associated with time should reflect as much as possible the
differences which would or might normally be encountered in the measurement
process from time to time for different samples measured at the facility
involved. This is desirable so that confidence limits placed on a given
measured value are realistic in reflecting as many of the normally
encountered variables in the system as practicable.
Defect Criteria
The defect criteria given in the guidelines were based upon the best
available technical, design and statistical information at that time. It
will be noted, however, that the data forms for each of the methods do not
list the defect criteria in the guidelines. An analysis will be made by
the Quality Assurance Staff at Research Triangle Park of an initial body
of actual operational data to establish realistic defect criteria for
future use.
Frequency of Performance Audits
The guideline documents generally recommend seven audits for each
JOO measurements to attain a given statistical confidence. Although this
sample size is desirable, there are likely situations where these
frequencies may'be impractical from equipment, cost and time standpoints.
-------
-7-
For items checked once each 6 days, as for monitoring for state
implementation plans, the guidelines suggest a sample size of 3 (one per
month) from a total number of 15 monitoring dates. This corresponds to
3/15 or 20%. Because the monitoring frequency for the NASN network is
one analysis each 12 days, only about 8 analyses would be made each
quarter for each site. To provide consistency with the guidelines it is
suggested that for NASN sites one or two samples be selected each quarter,
with a total of three checks out of the total of 15 for each 6 months.
Randomization of Audit Checks
Performance audit checks should be made on a random basis with respect
to the item or site checked. It is not necessary, however, that the checks
for sampling and the checks for analysis coincide for the same date and
site combinations.
The purpose of performance auditing is to check or measure the
variability in the agencies system. Even though the decentralization applies
only to the NASN sites, the sampling applies to the total system of the
agencies including all other sites. As a result, in the sample randomisation
process each NASN sample would be given an equal chance of being selected
as any other sample.
Corrective \cti_on
When comparing the original and the auditor's results, excessive
differences may be encountered, in which case the local agency may desire
to take corrective jction. The nature of the corrective actions will vary
depend iru; upon the item chocl'.fu and the magnitude of the differences. Although,
-------
-8-
the guidelines provide some direction for trouble-shooting, those routinely
working with the measurement systems will generally know the most potentially
fruitful avenues to explore. And although corrective actions should be
taken to prevent future excessive differences, some discrepancies such as
data processing errors are immediately correctable. It should not be
considered sufficient however just to correct the data involved for one
particular audit. Corrective action should be pursued to correct the
system against future like occurrences. Such corrective actions as
additional training, procurement of better equipment, more frequent
calibration, more frequent prcventative maintenance, more specific
instructions or procedures, more personnel assigned to a task, replacement
of defective p-rtr cf equipment 2re only seine of the types of corrective
action that should be taken. Records should be made of the nature, scope,
and dates of corrective actions taken.
The audit is only a sample and as such when an excessive difference is
encountered for a given apparatus or equipment, a given operator or analyst,
or a given monitoring site, it is an indicator -of a possible problem which
needs investigation and possible corrective action.
Record-Keening and Reporting
It is important that complete records be kept of audits. Such
records should include the names of the auditors, the dates and locations
of the audits, and other identification information such as the serial
numbers of equipment used nnd the container number of reagents used. Records
concerning the audits should be as complete, if not more so, than those for
the original mo isuri-moncs.
-------
-9-
It is suggested that a separate systematic file or logbook be
maintained to keep such data for the audit check as well as for the
original measurements. The individual reported measurements for .the
original and the audit check should be recorded along with the signed
difference and the percentage difference.
It is important that the results of all audits be reported to
EPA on the data forms provided in order to properly assess the quality
of data from the various sources and to perform analyses of the data
to arrive at criteria for expected agreement of audit results.
Detailed Procedures and Reporting Formats for Hi-Vol, .S0? and NO.,
Measarcr.ior.t Method.-3
The following procedures are essentially an integration of the
information on performance aduits for the NASN contained in the guideline
documents EPA-R4-73-028(b) and (d) for hi-vol and S0~, respectively. This
integration of the material was accomplished to provide all of the
information concerning the performance audits in a separate single
integrated document in a logical order for ease and facility in use and
reference. Even so, references to pages of the original guideline
document were necessary for completeness. The procedure for the alternate
dual systems for NO., and SCL is simply to independently install, calibrate
and service a spare instrument with a separate take-off from the common
manifold, to indcpcndetly calibrate the colorimeter and indepently
analyze the absorbent solution.
The reporting fornnts which follow each of the procedures, are
redesigns of the forms contain^! in tho guide-line documents. These redesign'.
-------
-10-
were accorplished to obtain more reporting detail for identification
and subsequent data analysis purposes. It is likely that the forms will
be simplified at a later date after analyses of the distributional
behavior of the data have been accomplished.
The completed for^s for performance audits should be submitted each
quarter along with the results of the NASN data to the EPA Regional Office.
Initially, the performance audit data should then be submitted to the
Quality Assurance Staff, QAEML, for review and analysis. Appropriate
analysis, of the data will result in:
1) establishment of realistic defect criteria for the
performance audit data
?) apprcpri^te redesign cf data forms, ar.d
3) appropriate routine analysis of performance audit data.
Subsequently, the performance audit data will be routinely submitted
from the Regions directly to OAQPS for routine analysis and reporting.
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE PERFORMANCE AUDIT FOR HI-VOL FOR NASN*
INDEi'ENDIINT CHCCKS FOR AUDITING PURPOSES
•
1. Wei Hi ing Check". of Exposed Filters
To check the total weighing system, rather than just checking the
sensitivity of the weighing instrument as might he done using weights,
weighing checks of the filters should not be made immediately before
or after the regular weighing. A time lapse such as between morning
and afternoon or from one day to the next should be introduced. The
filters to be checked should not be removed from the conditioning
environment.
Ti.e i/net-k bhuuiu be independent, i.e., performed by a person
other than the ov.e doing the regular weighings.
Because of loss of volatiles after the 24-hour conditioning
period, check weights made as late as the next day might show a
downward bias. If such weight losses occur, it is necessary to
perform the audit as the filters are weighed.
a) Randomly select and reweigh the sample of exposed filters.
b) Record original and check weights in the audit logbook.
*Frora r.P/'-R4-73-028b, "Guidelines for Development of a Quality Assurance
Progr.ir, Reference Method for l'ia Detenn nation of Suspended Particulates
in the Ai.1 o^pliere (High Volume. Method)." June 1973.
-------
—2—
2. Flow Ratr Calibration Check
Independent calibration checks should be made on-site. Portable
calibration equipment is used. Perform calibration checks according
to the following procedure.
a) Set-up equipment.
b) Select one of the resistance plates and obtain the
actual flow rate, Q , and the rotameter reading, following
3
the calibration procedures given on page 30, Section 2.2
of EPA-R4-73-028(b).
c) Convert rotameter reading to flow rate, Q , using the
calibration curve and making any standard corrections for
ambient temperature and pressure.
d) Record the reference rate, Q , and the sampled rate, Q , in
3 i
the audit logbook.
3. Alternate Check
Assessment by Auditing with a Mobile Sampler
An alternate method of auditing the High Volume Method, which
in certain situations might be feasible, is to use a mobile sampler
as a reference.
A high volume sampler equipped with a continuous flow rate
recorder, a constant voltage regulator, elapsed time indicator, and
a constant flow regulator is maintained by the office of the laboratory
director ard used as a reference. The reference sampler should be
operated in accordance with the existing procedures applicable to
-------
-3-
other samplers. A record should be maintained of the checks performed
on the reference sampler. An audit consists of placing the reference
sampler adjacent to (but no closer than 3 feet) the field sampler
and sampling simultaneously for a sample period. The reference
sampler should be oriented so that the long (10") dimension of the
filter is in the same direction as that for the routine sampler.
After determination of the particulate mass for the reference
sampler, record the results for the regular sampler and the
reference sampler in the audit logbook.
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE iT.K POUNCE AUDIT FOR SULFUH DIOXIDC AND
NUKCC.LN UIOXIDC FOR NASN*
Dr.PF.NDrNT CI:."CKS FOR AUDITING PURPOSES
1. Flo*' R.-._t e (\. lib ra l i on Cii 'ck
For 2-4-hour sa-.plcs a flow rate check is recocr..o.ided as a
means of auditing the sample collection phase of the n.easuren:ent
process. The check is perforned as follows.
a) The regular operator prepares the sampler for satnp]e
collection as usual.
b) The individual performing the audit inserts a calibrated
rotaiaeter in the sample inlet line.
c) With the calibrated rotair.et-cr in place the sample is
collected in the usual manner.
d) The individual performing the audit reads the calibrated
rotameter before and after the sampling period.
e) Convert the rotaneter readings to flow rates using the
calibration curve making corrections for ambient
f) Compute the average of the initial and final flow rates.
g) Record the operators and the auditors average flow rates
.in the audit logbook.
R'.-7 3- 10CU, "C" )•,}<•••! incs for Dovrlop- ^"•' t of a Ouility As.sur.:">ue
. '<•'• "' ' '.' v •(>>• tic !;• • u i I'-ntiJ-i of Sulfur DicxiJo i:
• "..i. .' . . ,;. Jj"j. !\,r Nj : : -(;>_n DJ.J.VLJC, ::ul) ui Lute "Ni 1 1\ ^r a"
o: "-ju-.'ur" .uottVcr it a;ipo..rs
s.
-------
-2-
2. Measurcrcrrtt of Reference Sanies
Measurement of a reference sample prepared independently of
normal operations can be used to evaluate the precision and
• ' •
accuracy of the analysis phase of the measurement process. A
reference s.-.nple as used here refers to a sample prepared by an
individual other than the regular operator using reagents prepared
independent of those used for normal operations and used for auditing
purposes. A control sample as referred to in the operating procedures
implies a solution prepared by the regular operator from the normally
used reagrnts and used periodically to verify that the analysis
process is under control.
The procedure for performing the check is given below. The
frequency of performing the check will be specified by the
supervisor.
a) Prepare a reference sample with a known concentration
in the same manner as was used when developing a
calibration curve. The concentration should be varied
over the range of normally measured values from audit to audit,
b) Have the regular operator measure the reference sample.
The operator must not know the true concentration of the
reference sample and preferably not know that it is a
reference sample.
-------
-3-
c) Obtain the operator's finding (yg SO.) .and the
true concentration (pg S0?) oi the sanple.
d) Record (yg S02) and (vfg S0?) in the audit logbook.
-------
.M-hour or greater <=-Jirpling interval
CD
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
State Area
I Agency
Region or State
'.pency Proi.it Tine Year Quarter
u c n ~i
G
Audit
NO.
'' !
28 21
0
~~j ' —- T
~xrJ
^ i- " •
'lj"1
n-i
9 10
Mea«iiremer
i
Original
30 31 32 33 34
- • i L i
;!4"fh
''f 1 1 '~
\ } ] i I j
PrTF
:pj~
11 :.. 13
it of Referen
i Ug K02
Check
35 36 37 38 39 .
:1 I".-."1
t2J~JlI~ "
2 j '
2 L_ .
2] ""
?l —
t
cc
i
D
1'.
Samples
Diff
.1
— i
— i
PERFORMANCE AUDIT
FOR NASN
For Nitrogen Dioxide
Flow Calibration Check
in f3/min
Reference Sampled Diff
Rate Rate
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
LT E r , -
Tctsl I.uri-er of Analyses Processed During Audit Pe
[5
9 r i
JJ
Signature of
K
-3
_3
•3
.31
-3J
~3J
ri
Auditor
—
—
—
-
fc
h!
4
4
-
—
-
3d
Sigm
1C
*— —
i .
1
!
|-
L_
ure of Sup
LI
2 34567
Parameter Code Method Units DP
1
A I 2 6 JO
9 4j 0
I!
15 1« 17 13 10 20 21 ^± 23 24
so
!
2
J.
f'
1
Dr.
51
Lgi
52
z
-
-
Int
53
r
Alt
ll
54
~1
~r
D
5
'j
5
J
-
-
ern
V£
D
55
r-
t7
'6
i"6
[6
I'
!S
Ifi.
ate C
/.n3
upllc
56 57
-
1
—
heck
.ate
58 59
- 1
-•
r6
1
'6
io
-
n
i
Diff-
[
—
--
z
.
-f-
—
-1
1
Date
-------
24-hour or greater sampling interval
I Agency
i
Region or State
; Agency Project Tine Year Quarters
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
n m n
Auditj
Xo.
Exposed Filter
Weight
mg
Original I Check
26 2'- ;o 31 32 33 34 35 30 37 38 39
Diff
_ 2
i
^>
"2
i
^
',2
2
?.
,rt
1
UI
~L
-
—
—
j
—
,Total Vanbi r cf Ar.aljses Processed During Audit Period
Signature of Auditor
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PERFORMANCE AUDIT
FOR NASN
For Total Suspended Particulates
Flow Rate Calibration Check
f3/min
Reference Sampled Diff
Rate Rate |
HO 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
3.
I
3
1 -.! I " Jj
3
3
3
1
3
-_
3
3
3
3
.4
4
IT
ki
u
4
-
•4
!
Parameter Code
1
5
1
-
1
0 1 1
5 16 ] 7 18 19
Alter
l
Original [Du
0 51 52 53 54 55
-
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
—
s
•i
•i
5
r
6
6
6
6
—
H -6
6
j.6
6
U
6
6
6
State Area
2
I 1
nate
i g/m
pile
56 57
1 •
L
3
Me
20
C
3
at
5S
4
tho
1L
21
lec
e
59
-
1 . "t
lit Period
Signature of Supervisor
5
d
I
k
I
r
i —
i
i
F
6 7
Uni ts
0
i
2: 23
)iff
.
•-
—
-1
-
Date
DP
ID
24
-------
..—d
24-houi or greater sampling interval
Ag- icy
Region or State
Agency Project Time Year Quarter
,D
i a
D
D
9 10
11 12 13
14
Audit
Mo.
Measurement of Reference Samoles
in ug SO.
Original
i
2
Check
i28 29 30 31 32 33 34 I 35 36 37 38 39
o'l
t,:-
I i-
ff]
,\2
2
2
-
r
'I
i
i
!
ENVORONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
QUALITY ASSURANCE ]
PERFORMANCE AUDIT
FOR NASN
For Sulfur Dioxide
Samoles
Diff
!
Re
1
-------
APPENDIX B
NASN Stations Which Are
Designated As Critical To Retain
Indefinitely
-------
up uiudn, 4 non-uroan;
07 OOGO 001 AOI* Conn., Bridgeport
07 0420 001 A01* Hartford
07 07CO 001 AOI* New Haven
07 1240 001 A01* Watcrbury
20 0950 002 AOI Me., Portland
22 02''. 0 001 AOI* Mass., Boston
22 0530 00? AOI Fall Ri'ver
22 21 GO 002 AOI* Springfield
22 2C40 001 AOI * Worcester
30 0120 001 AC! N. H. , Concord
41 0120 C01 AOI R. I., E. Providence
41 0300 001 AOI* Providence
47 0140 001 AOI Vt., Burlington
20 0010 001 A03 Ife., Acadia .National Park
30 0140 001 A03 N. H., Coos County
41 0330 CO? /-03 R. I., Washington Co.
47 0360 CO i A03 Vt., Orange Co.
*Gas bubbler, at this site.
-------
Reyi. • II (2C urban, 1 nor, urban) (11
31 0550 002 A01* N. J., Burlington Co. (Karlcton)
31 0720 001 A01* Camden
31 1300 002 AC! Elizabeth
31 17CO 001 A01* Glassboro
31 2320 001 A01* Jersey City
31 34GO 001 A01* • Newark
31 4140 001 A01* Paterson
31 4220 001 A01 Perth A-nboy
31 5400 031 A01 Trenton
33 0560 001 A01* N. Y., Buffalo
33 4680 001 A01* ' New York City
33 4740 001 A01 Niagara Falls
33 5750 001 A01* Rochester
33 C520 001 A01 Syracuse
33 6C80 001 A01 . Utica
40 0380.002 A01* P. R. , Bayamon
40 0550 002 A01 Cat?no
40 1080 002 A01* Guayanilla
40 1920 002 A01 " Ponce1
40 2140 001 A01 San Juan
33 3340 001 A03 N. Y., Jefferson Co.
-------
«n TTT (?R uvhan
08 0140 COT A01* Del., Newark
09 0020 001 A01 D. C., Washington
09 0020 C03 A01 Washington
21 0120 001 A01* Md., Baltimore
39 0120 001 A01* Penn., Allcntov:n
39 0140 001 A01 Altoona .
39 07£0 002 A01 Bethlehem
39 3050 002 A01 Erie
39 3880 001 A01 Harris burg
39 3950 001 A01 Hazleton
39 4480 DC! A01* ' Johnstown
39 7140 001 A01* Philadelphia
39 7260 001 A01* Pittsburgh
39 7523 001 A01* Reading
39 8040 001 A01* . Scranton
39 9160 001 A01* Wamrinsler
39 9430 001 A01 Wilkes Barre
39 9550 CO! A01* • York
48 0920 001 A01 Va . , Danville
48 1440 001 A01 Hampton
48 1840 001 A01 Lynchburg
48 2120 001 A01 New Port Ke.vs
48 2140 001 A01* Norfolk
48 2440 001 A01 Portsmouth
48 2660 002 A01* Richmond
48 2700 001 A01 ' Roanoke
50 02CO 001 A01* W. Va., Charleston
50 1760 001 A01 S. Charleston
39 1760 001 A03 Penn., Clarion Co.
40 2890 031 A03 Va., Shcnandor.h National Park
48 3440 031 A03 1,'ythc Co.
-------
>*w> y
01 1480 001 AQ1 Ala., Gadsdca
: 01 I860 001 A01 Huntsville
"; 01 2460 001 A01* ' Montgomery
• 10 19GO 002 A01 Fla., Jacksonville
' 10 2700 002 A01* Miami
j 10 3980 002 A01* St. Petersburg
10 4360 002 A01~ Tampa
- 11 0200 001 A01* Ga., Atlanta
11 1280 001 A01* Columbus
11 4500 001 A01* Savannah
; 18 OG30 C02 A01 Ky . , Ashland
18 0320 001 A01 Bowling Green
18 0800 001 A01* Covington
"18 2300 001 A31* Lexington
18 2380 C02 A01* . Louisville
I 34 0700-001 A01 N. C., Charlotte
j 34 1160 001 A01 Durham
34 1740 001 AQ1* Greensboro
34 4460 002 A01 Winston-Sal em
42 1180 001 A01 S. C., Greenville
: 44 0380 001 A01* Tenn., Chattanooga
•' 44 1740 002 A01 Knoxville
44 234 o" 001 A01* Memphis
; ' 44 2540 001 A01* Nashville
^
i
10 1680 001 A03 Fla., Hardee Co.
34 0590 001 A03 N. C. , Cepc Hatteras
44 05LO 001 A03 Tenn., Cumberland Co.
-------
Jtegion V (40 urban, 2 non-urba.:) (?.?, S02/N02)
14 1220 CO! A01 111., Chicago
14 1220 002 A01* Chicago
14 5620 OC2 A01 f N. Chicago
14 5080 001 A01 Peoria
14 6700 001 A01 Rock Island
14 7280 001 A01 Springfield
15 1180 001 A01* Ind., E. Chicago
15 1300 001 A01* Evansvillc
15 1380 001 A01 Fort Wayne
15 1520 001 A01* Gary
15 1780 001 A01* Hanmond
15 2040 001 A01* ' Indianapolis
15 2980 002 A01* New Albany
15 3880 002 A01* South Bend
15 4080 001 A01 Terrc Haute -
23 1180 001 A01* Mich., Datroit
23 1580 001 A01* Flint
23 1820 001 A01* Grand Rapids
23 2U40 001 A01X Lansing
23 4860 CO! ACT* Sagin&w
23 5120 001 A01 Trenton
24 1040 001 A01 Minn., Duluth
24 2260 C01 A01* Minneapolis
24 2320 001 A01 Moorhead
24 3300 001 A01 St. Paul
36 0060 001 A01* Ohio, Akron
36 1000 001 A01* Canton
36 1220 001 ADI* Cincinnati
36 1220 002 A01* Cincinnati
36 1300 001 A01* Clove-land '
36 1460 001 A01-* Col u,,bus
36 1650 GDI A01* Day' "i
36 C600 001 A01* Toledo
3'.) 7760 L J i ADI • Y o u r. g:. t c •.. n
-------
51 0840 002 A01 Wise., Eau Claire
51 1540 001 A01 Kenosha
51 I860 001 A01 Madison
51 2200 001 A01* ' Milwaukee
51 2830 001 A01 Racine
51 3480 001 AC1 Superior
15 2800 001 A03 Ind., Konroe Co.
15 32GO 001 A03 Parke Co.
-------
Region VI (13 urban, 4 non-urban) (9 S02/K02)
04 1440 001 AOl Ark, Little Rock
04 2740 001 AOl W. Memphis
19 0280 001 AOl La., Baton Rouge
19 2020 OD2 AOl* New Orleans
19 2740 001 AOl ' Shreyeport
32 0040 00-1 AOl* N. M., Albuquerque
37 2200 001 AOl* Ok!a., Oklahoma City
37 3000 001 AOl* Tulsa
45 1310 002 AOl* Tex., Dallas
45 1800 001 AOl* . Fort Worth
45 2560 001 AOl* Houston
45 4060 002 AOl* Pasadena
45 4570 C01 AOl* San Antonio
04 17CO 001 A03 Ark., Kontgorr.ery Co.
37 0480 001 A03 Okla., Cherokee Co.
45 3530 031 A03 Tex., Katagorda Co.
45 5200 001 A03 . Tom Green Co.
-------
Region VII "(11 urba.., 2 non-urban) (5
16 0540 001 A01 Iov/a, Cedar Rapids
16 TOGO 001 A91 Davenport
16 1130 001 A01* Des Koines
17 1800 002 A01 Kan., Kansas City
17 3560 001 A01 Topeka
17 3740 00-1 ADI* Wichita
26 2330 002 A01 I-to., Kansas City
26 4280 001 A01* St. Louis
26 4230 002 A01* St. Louis
28 1560 CC2 A01 Neb., Lincoln
28 1830 001 A01* Omaha
26 4480 002 A03 Mo., Shannon -Co.
28 2480 001 A03 Neb., Thomas Co.
-------
06 0580 001 A01* Colo. Donvcr
35 0100 COi A01 N. D., Cis.vark
43 1480 001 A01 S. D., Sioux Falls
46 0680 C01 A01 ' Utah, Cgccn
46 0920 CO! A01* Salt Lake City
52 0120 CO! A01* V.'yo., Cr.sper
52 0140 CO! A01 Cheyenne
05 1530 002 A03 Colo., r?sa Verde National Park •
27 0570 CC1 A03 Mont., Glacier National Park
43 0110 CC.l ACS S. D. , Black Hills totional Forest
52 OS60 001 A03 L'yo., Yellowstone Ilat'ional Park
-------
Kecpon IA (
-------
(}/ ij'j-u uuj /\!ji Alas., Anchorage
13 0220 001 A01 Ida., Boise
38 1460 001 A01 / Ore., Portland
49 1810 001 A01* Wash., Seattle
49 2040 001 A01 Spokane
49 2140 001 A01 Tacoma
13 0340 001 A03 Ida., Butte Co. •
33 0440 001 A03 Ore., Curry Co.
49 0980 002 A03 Wash., King Co.
-------
EPA-450/4-74-001
September 1974
(OAQPS No. 1.2-016 Revised)
GUIDELINES FOR AIR QUALITY
MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND ANALYSIS
VOLUME 1:
DESIGNATION OF AIR QUALITY
MAINTENANCE AREAS
mmmmm
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air and a*»t
-------
EPA-450/4-74-001
(OAQPS No. 1.2-016 Revised)
GUIDELINES FOR AIR QUALITY
MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND ANALYSIS
VOLUME 1:
DESIGNATION OF AIR QUALITY
MAINTENANCE AREAS
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air and Waste Management
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, N. C. 27711
September 1974
j
-------
OAQPS GUIDELINE SERIES
The guideline series of reports is being issued by the Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards (OAQPS) to provide information to state and local
air pollution control agencies; for example, to provide guidance on the
acquisition and processing of air qualit> data and on the planning and
analysis requisite for the maintenance of air quality. Reports published in
this series will be. available - as supplies permit - from the Air Pollution
Technical Information Center, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
27711; or, for a nominal fee, from the National Technical Information Ser-
vice, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22151.
Publication No. EPA-450/4-74-001
(OAQPS No. 1.2-016 Revised)
11
-------
FOREWORD
This document is the first in a series comprising Guidelines for Air
Quality Maintenance Planning and Analysis. The intent of the series is to
provide State and local c^encies with information and guidance for the prepa-
ration of Air Quality Maintenance Plans required under 40 CFR 51. The volumes
in this series are:
Designation of Air Quality Maintenance Areas
•Plan Preparation
St
Volume 1j_
Volume 2:
Volume 3: Control Strategies
Volume 4: Land Use and Transportation Consideration
Volume 5: Case Studies in Plan Development
Volume 6: Overview of Air.Quality Maintenance Area Analysis
Volume 7: Projecting County Emissions
Volume 8: Computer-Assisted Area Source Emissions Gridding
Procedure
Volume 9: Evaluating Indirect Sources
Volume 10^ Reviewing New Stationary Sources
Volume II: Air Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis
Volume 12: Applying Atmospheric Simulation Models to Air Quality
Maintenance Areas
Additional volumes may be issued.
All references to 40 CFR Part 51 in this document are to the regulations
as amended through July 1974.
iii
-------
Preface
This document was originally published on January 11, 1974, by the
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards as OAQPS No. 1.2-016.
Copies were distributed on January 15 to all Regional Offices and State
Air Pollution Control Agencies. On January 23, 1974, errata were sent
out for pages 5-8, B-10, B-ll, C-5 and C-6. Copies of the guideline, in-
cluding errata, were then distributed on February 8-15 to State A-95
Clearinghouses and those local air pollution control agencies and metro-
politan and regional planning agencies which are located in SMSAs (Standard
Metropolitan Statistical Areas) with population over 500,000.
Revisions to Sections 3 and 5 and Appendices A and B were distributed
to all recipients of the guidelines on February 14, 1974.
All errata and revisions have been incorporated into this final
edition of the guideline.
iv
-------
CONTENTS
PAGE
List of Figures vlil
List of Tables 'ix
1. INTRODUCTION • 1
1.1 BACKGROUND 1
1.2 EPA DESIGNATION OF AQMAs 3
1.3 FUTURE GUIDELINES 5
1.3.1 Guidelines for AQMA Analysis 5
1.3.2 Guidelines for Development of A1r Quality Malnte- 6
nance Plan
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DISCUSSION 9
2.1 CONSIDERATION OF GEOGRAPHICAL AREAS 10
2.2 CONSIDERATION OF OTHER FACTORS 14
2.3 AQMA BOUNDARY CHANGES 16
2.4 WITHDRAWAL OF AQMA DESIGNATION 16
2.5 METROPOLITAN AREAS AND SPARSELY URBANIZED AREAS 16
2.6 ASSUMPTIONS CONCERNING FUEL AVAILABILITY 17
2.7 ASSUMPTIONS CONCERNING EMISSION AND AIR QUALITY BASELINES 17
2.8 CONSIDERATION OF AIR QUALITY STANDARDS 19
2.9 PROJECTION REQUIREMENTS 19
2.10 SUPPORTING INFORMATION , 20
2.11 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS 21
-------
PAGE
3. INITIAL DESIGNATION CRITERIA 23
3.1 ELIMINATION OF OBVIOUS NON-PROBLEM AREAS 23
3.2 INCLUSION OF OBVIOUS PROBLEM AREAS ' 24
4. METHODS FOR PROJECTING EMISSIONS 29
4.1 PROJECTING 1975 EMISSIONS 32
4.1.1 Preferred Method 32
4.1.2 Back-up Method 33
4.1.2.1 Step A - Determine 1970 Emissions 34
4.1.2.2 Step B - Determine 1975 Power Plant 34
Emissions
4.1.2.3 Step C - Determine 1975 Emissions from 35
Other Sources
4.1.2.4 Step D - Project Growth Rates for 1970 35
to 1974
4.2 PROJECTING 1985 EMISSIONS 37
5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELING AIR QUALITY CONCENTRATIONS 41
5.1 INTRODUCTION 41
5.2 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR CARBON MONOXIDE 41
5.3 RELATING OXIDANT CONCENTRATION TO HYDROCARBON EMISSIONS 45
5.4 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR OTHER POLLUTANTS - RELATING 46
PROJECTED EMISSIONS TO AIR QUALITY
5.4.1 Proportional Roll-Forward Model 46
5.4.2 Miller - Holzworth Model 47
5.4.3 Estimating Short-Term Concentrations for Sulfur 50
Dioxide and Particulates
5.4.3.1 Roll-Forward 50
5.4.3.1 Log-Normal 50
VI
-------
PAGE
5.5 COMPARISON OF PROJECTED AIR QUALITY WITH NAAQS 51
6. PROJECTIONS OF DEMOGRAPHIC AND ECONOMIC INDICATORS 55
APPENDIX A. BASIS FOR INITIAL DESIGNATION CRITERIA 75
A.I CARBON MONOXIDE 75
A.2 TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICULATES 78
A.3 SULFUR OXIDES 78
A.4 PHOTOCHEMICAL OXIDANTS 80
A.5 NITROGEN DIOXIDE 81
APPENDIX B. EXAMPLES OF ANALYSES FOR A HYPOTHETICAL SMSA EMPLOYING 83
THE "BACK-UP" METHOD OF ESTIMATING EMISSIONS
B.I EXAMPLE 1 - CARBON MONOXIDE • 83
B.I.I Conclusion 89
B.2 EXAMPLE 2 - SULFUR DIOXIDE 89
B.2.1 Conclusion 94
B.3 EXAMPLE 3 - HYDROCARBONS AND PHOTOCHEMICAL 95
OXIDANTS
B.3.1 Conclusion 96
APPENDIX C. LIST OF TASKS TO BE PERFORMED FOR MAINTENANCE OF 97
STANDARDS PROGRAM
C.I SUBMIT AREAS DESIGNATED AS AQMAs 97
C.2 ANALYZE EMISSIONS AND AIR QUALITY - 1975 97
to 1985
C.3 DEVELOP AND SUBMIT A 10-YEAR PLAN FOR AIR 99
QUALITY MAINTENANCE
vn
-------
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure No. Title Page
2-1 FLOW CHART FOR AQMA DESIGNATIONS 9
3-1 EXCLUSION CRITERIA FOR CARBON MONOXIDE 25
AS A FUNCTION OF THE DISTRIBUTION OF
EMISSIONS BETWEEN LIGHT AND HEAVY-DUTY
VEHICLES ON LOCAL STREETS
4-1 CALCULATION OF 1975 AND 1985 EMISSIONS 31
viii
-------
LIST OF TABLES
Table No. Title Page
1-1 MAINTENANCE OF AIR QUALITY STANDARDS ACTIVITY 8
SCHEDULE
2-1 NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS 19
2-2 EXAMPLE SUMMARY OF AQMA DESIGNATIONS 20
3-1 AQCRs IN WHICH TRANSPORTATION CONTROL 27
STRATEGIES ARE REQUIRED
4-1 EMISSION PROJECTION CALCULATIONS 30
4-2 EMISSION REDUCTION FACTORS 36
5-1 EMISSION FACTOR RATIOS 44
5-2 RATIO OF EXPECTED ANNUAL MAXIMUM POLLUTANT 52
CONCENTRATION TO ARITHMETIC MEAN CONCENTRATION
FOR VARIOUS AVERAGING TIMES AND STANDARD GEOMETRIC
DEVIATIONS
6-1 POPULATION, EMPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INCOME, AND EARNINGS 56
BY INDUSTRY, HISTORICAL AND PROJECTED.
6-2 SMSAs LISTED ALPHABETICALLY BY STATE 58
6-3 COUNTY COMPOSITION OF SMSAs LISTED IN BEA CODE 63
NUMBER ORDER
A-l SOLUTIONS TO EQUATION 79
B-l 1970 EMISSIONS OF CARBON MONOXIDE FOR HYPOTHETICAL 85
SMSA
B-2 EMISSION PROJECTION CALCULATION TABLE 86
(CARBON MONOXIDE)
B-3 1970 EMISSIONS OF SULFUR DIOXIDE FOR 90
HYPOTHETICAL SMSA
B-4 EMISSION PROJECTION CALCULATION TABLE 92
(SULFUR DIOXIDE)
ix
-------
DESIGNATION OF AIR QUALITY MAINTENANCE AREAS
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 BACKGROUND
Pursuant to 40 CFR 51 12(e), published on June 18, 1973 in
the Federal Register, Volume 38, p. 15834, all State Implementation
Plans (SIPs) ". . . shall identify those areas (counties, urbanized
areas, standard metropolitan statistical areas, etc.) which,
due to current air quality and/or projected growth rate, may have
the potential for exceeding any National Ambient Air Quality
Standard (NAAQS) within the subsequent 10-year period." After
areas are identified by the states, EPA will review these desig-
nations and will prepare an official list of areas by November 1974.
The states must then perform a thorough air quality analysis of
each of these areas; if this analysis shows that an area definitely
will not maintain a NAAQS during the 10-year period, a plan must
be developed for that area which demonstrates that the standard
will be maintained.
As stated in the preamble to the above-cited laws, EPA intends
to provide assistance to the states in (1) identifying the areas
(i.e. Air Quality Maintenance Areas - AQMAs) that may exceed a
national standard within the next 10 years, and (2) analyzing
the impact of growth and development on air quality in such
problem areas.
-------
These present guidelines are to assist the states 1n Identify-
ing AQMAs and do not require as extensive an analysis as do the guide-
lines for analyzing the Impact of growth, Issued in the summer of 1974;
guidelines for preparation of plans for maintenance of air quality will
be Issued 1n late summer of 1974. The overall timetable for plan
development with regard to 40 CFR 51.12, paragraphs (e) through (h) 1s:
1. May 10, 1974 - State submission of identification of AQMAs.
2. November 1974 - FPA publication of 11st of AQMAs.
3. June 18, 1975 - State submission of:
a. Impact on air quality of projected growth in AQMAs.
b. Where needed, a plan to prevent any National Ambient
Air Quality Standards from being exceeded over the
10-year period from the date of plan submittal.
A detailed timetable of state and EPA activity over the next 2 years
for the maintenance of standards program is presented in Table 1-1.
EPA intends that the guidelines be easy to follow yet still be
sufficiently responsive to ensure that as many appropriate AQMAs as
possible are designated without over-designation. Because of the
complex nature of the tasks involved and because of the many uncertain-
ties inherent in the projection of emissions and air Quality, the
guidelines are written to obtain some degree of consistency in the
information to be submitted by the states while still allowing for
innovative approaches.
Prior to preparation of these guidelines, EPA consulted with several
state and local air pollution control agencies and regional planning com-
-------
missions. EPA has attempted to Incorporate the advice thus obtained 1n
these guidelines. Although every attempt has been made to anticipate and
address questions that may arise, Invariably unresolved Issues will occur.
When questions do arise, 1t 1s recommended that the appropriate EPA
Regional Office be contacted for guidance.
The guidelines for AQMA designation are written for the state agency
responsible for designation. In most cases this will be the state air
pollution control agency. Because the Impact of the provisions for main-
tenance of standards will affect areas that are of concern to other
state agencies and local general purpose governments (such as those
responsible for regional land use and transportation planning, water
pollution control, etc.), it 1s advisable for the designating agency
to solicit comments from these agencies and Involve them in the desig-
nation process.
1.2 EPA DESIGNATION OF AQMAs
As Indicated above, EPA will review the 11st of designated AQMAs
submitted by the states and will publish, after allowing for public
comment, an official 11st of AQMAs by November 1974. Because of time
and manpower constraints, EPA will not be able to analyze 1n detail
areas of those states which do not submit any material concerning AQMA
designations. Consequently, EPA's designation for states that do not
offer a submission will be on the basis of Standard Metropolitan Sta-
tistical Areas (SMSAs) whose growth rates for particular demographic-
economic Indicators, exceed a specified value. In addition, the
-------
present value of the indicator, current air quality, and the meteoro-
logical conditions that present a pollution potential would be incorporated
in EPA's criteria for AQMA designation. In most cases, actual emissions
of air quality per se would not be projected by EPA. The critical growth
rates would be determined as follows:
1. Percentage growth rates for population and earnings by in-
dustrial category have been obtained on an SMSA basis for
the years 1975 to 1985.
2. SMSAs have been listed by regional priority classification for
each pollutant and ranked by percentage growth rate for popula-
tion and earnings by industrial cateqory.
3. Using best Judgment, demoqraphic-economic indicators would
be selected as representative of each pollutant-source
cateqory combination.
4. After scrutiny of the spread of growth rates, critical growth
rates would be selected using best judgment for each demographic-
economic indicator corresponding to a pollutant-source category
combination.
The critical growth rates per demographic-economic indicator would
vary depending on the pollutant priority classification of the AQCR in
which the SMSA is located. Thus, a lower critical growth rate would
be specified for those areas havinq a currently significant air quality
problem (Priority I regions) than for those areas not having a currently
significant air quality problem (Priority III regions).
-------
1.3 FUTURE GUIDELINES
In addition to these guidelines on AQMA designation, EPA will
publish other guidelines concerning the detailed analysis and pro-
jection of air quality for the AQMAs and the development of a plan
for maintenance of NAAQS where needed. These future guidelines are
briefly discussed below.
1.3.1 Guidelines for AOMA Analysis
The analysis step 1s Intended to determine whether air quality
limits are Indeed threatened and, 1f so, when, where, and which are
the principal sources Involved. The results of this analysis will be
useful 1n determining whether an SIP revision 1s necessary and
in formulating alternative plans 1f they are needed.
Descriptive analysis would proceed along the general lines
described below concerning analytical procedures for selecting
AQMAs, although the analysis would be more thorough. In particular,
the following steps would be followed.
1. The quantity of emissions of each pollutant for which
the AQMA 1s designated would be projected to 1985. This
projection would consider:
a. Present emissions by source category and, if possible,
by location.
b. Expected growth of each source category based on past
trends and highly probable future contingencies.
c. Present and highly probable future emission restrictions
of new and existing sources.
-------
2. The 1985 projected emission inventory would be allocated to
the area in the least desirable* pattern that would be permit-
ted under present land-use restrictions. This "scenario"
is the one that would result in the most centralized locations
of new sources of emissions. Present zoning patterns and land-
use plans would be used in allocating new sources to the area.
3. Air quality for 1985 would be estimated from the emission-pattern
scenario, preferably using a calibrated diffusion model. If
this is impossible in the time available, a less sophisticated
model must be used.
The models, emission factors, growth projection techniques, etc.
suitable for performing the analysis will be forthcoming in the latter
part of 1974.
1.3.2 Guidelines for Development of Air Quality Maintenance Plans
In late spring or summer of 1974, EPA will issue guidelines to
the states on the preparation and submittal of 10-year air quality main-
tenance plans. These plans, which will be due on June 18, 1975, will
pertain only to portions of states designated as AQMAs by the Admini-
strator in November 1974. The guidelines will be organized around four
subject areas. The first subject area relates to the mechanics of pre-
paring and implementing the plans. Topics ranging from plan format to
procedures for categorizing emission sources will be covered. The
second subject area deals with the evaluation of the air quality
*Least desirable from an air quality maintenance standpoint.
-------
Implications of local land-use and transportation plans. It may be
discovered 1n some AQMAs that growth plans are Incompatible with air
quality maintenance and will need to be revised. The third subject area
will Include a 11st of maintenance strategies. Emission allocations,
transportation controls, fuel and energy conservation measures, and other
strategies will be discussed, along with procedures to quantitatively
estimate their Impact on air quality. The final subject area will cover
the coordination of air quality maintenance plans with other environ-
mental planning activities such as water quality planning and the review
of environmental Impact statements.
-------
•— N-O -h m
10 — > o -o
03-5
n> o> o>
O
3
3- < -J
w> n> << c+
• — - — i
o -••
•O Irt CD
ro o< -"•
33Q.
<-t Q. n>
o>
CO
J> Q)
o cr
d m
-<
c/i
nl
rn
ro
ni
o
TI
ro ._
°- s
.*» 50
^ O
o>
3
cx
oo
S
to
-a n> (/)
_i ^ f^«
pi Q^ Pi
3 d-
C3 fl>
ft)
-—< O
CTi ft) O
—' 3
3 O CL
O T3 C
3 irt o
r*- r+
3- 2 W
3 3
rt- 0*
n> —>
3 *<
Q)
3 -••
O l/>
ft)
l\> rt 3
O< r+
3 rf fO
rt- 33 O>
3- ft) — •
o —•
3 — -o 70 to
O —• —• fD r*
3 O> < Qt
«-»•—< 3 -•• <-r
3--^ (/> m n>
to PO n>
Q)
c+
ft)
11/> Q) rn
<-*• 3 -o
•} 30
«"~ « «f n> n>
n> < <
^-»-n fo -"•
£*Ql ~*3 —> (b
-'•—•OS.
3 —• a> -a m
o -•• 3 in
3 3 tn -o
oo —•
-h c B)
r+ o cr 3
'O -s i »/>
EPA Issues AQMA Guidelines for Designating AQMAs
States Submit Areas to be Designated as AQMAs
EPA Begins Revisions of State Designations and Proposed Designations
for States Failing to Submit AQMA Material
EPA Announces Hearings on Its Proposed Designation
EPA Issues Analysis Guidelines to States
EPA Holds Hearings on its Designations
EPA Issues Plan Development Guidelines to States; Proposes
*5
tjf
Regs, on Same in Federal Register; Brief Regional Offices
on Guidelines
EPA Publishes Final Regulations on Plan Development in
Federal Register
EPA Publishes Final List of AQMAs
Draft Plan Completed by States
States Announce Hearings; Distribute Plans
States Hold Hearings
States Submit Plans to EPA
EPA Starts Work on Plans for States that Fail to Submit
Approvable Plans
EPA Announces Approval/Disapproval of State Plans
EPA Announces Hearings on Own Plans for States that did not
Submit Approvable Plans
LPA Holds Hearings on Own Plans
EPA Promulgates Plans for States that have not Submitted Plans
8
-------
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DISCUSSION
The general approach that this guideline presents is depicted in
Figure 2-1; the numbers in parentheses refer to the sections of the guide-
line in which that item is described:
all SMSAs
SMSAs automatically^
excluded as AQMAs
SMSAs excluded
as AQMAs
Apply initial
designation
criteria
(3)
SMSAs automatically
"included as AQMAs
SMSAs neither automatically
excluded or included
Predict 1985
emissions (4)
i
Predict 1985
air quality (5)
1
Determine if
NAAQSs are
maintained
SMSAs included
"as AQMAs
Figure 2-1. Flow Chart for AQMA designation
-------
2.1 CONSIDERATION OF GEOGRAPHICAL AREAS
There appears to be a need to specify which areas, as a minimum,
should be analyzed in determining which areas should be designated
as AQMAs. The areas selected are the SMSAs as defined by the Office
of Management and Budget (formerly the Bureau of the Budget). The
reasons for choosing SMSAs are listed below:
1. SMSAs historically exhibit higher growth rates of population
than non-SMSA areas.
2. SMSAs exhibit the highest concentrations of population and
Industry.
3. Projections of population and economic Indicators are avail-
able on an SMSA basis.
4. Areas of SMSAs change with time as population density Increases,
facilitating future changes in the designation of AQMAs.
5. SMSAs account for roughly 70 percent of the nation's population,
but only about 10 percent of the total land areas.
The SMSA, alone or in its entirety, however, may not always be
a desirable geographic area for designation as an AOMA. For instance,
projections of emissions for cities, counties, or townships within the
SMSA may be possible to calculate, in which case it would be desirable
to designate these as sub-SMSA areas. In other cases, the projected growth
in emissions may be expected to occur around the fringe of the SMSA, in
which case the designation may be more desirable if 1t includes that
fringe area in addition to the SMSA, in whole or in part.
10
-------
Some consideration should be given to the difficulty of the actual
designation and management of control programs within an AQMA. It 1s
easier to designate by the names of the existing areas (political or
non-political) than to delineate an area by listing roads, rivers,
other topographical features, or latitude-longitude coordinates that
constitute the boundaries of the area. Designation by currently
defined areas, however, does not mean that the subsequent detailed
analysis of the AQMA and possible control strategy must apply to the
entire AQMA as originally designated—the analysis and plan can be
restricted to selected problem areas within the AQMA. On the other
hand, one should be aware that designated areas have been referenced
1n the proposed regulations for review of Indirect sources 1n all but
three states (38 F.R. 29893, Federal Register of October 30, 1973).
If the regulation 1s promulgated as proposed, the size of facilities
that would be exempt from review will be smaller in the designated
areas (AQMAs) than 1n the non-designated areas. Until EPA publishes
the 11st of AQMAs 1n November 1974, all SMSAs would, for purposes of
the proposed indirect source review regulation, be considered designated
areas.
In addition, one should be aware of possible relationships between
the designated AQMAs and the areas to be chosen under the forthcoming
regulations concerning significant deterioration. For instance, 1f
the significant deterioration regulations provide that some (probably
urban) areas are permitted to deteriorate up to the secondary national!
11
-------
ambient air quality standard, these areas will probably be the
same areas as the AQMAs. Therefore, 1t might be appropriate to designate
an area large enough to allow for the proper amount of desired growth.
A non-exhaustive 11st of types of areas that might be used for
designation Include:
1. AQCRs
2. SMSAs
3. Urbanized Areas
4. Counties
5. Groupings of: Cities, Townships, Boroughs
6. Planning regions used for transportation, land use or other
planning
7. Sub-state planning districts
Designations should be pollutant-specific and should Indicate the
pollutants for which the area 1s designated. The detailed analysis
required for each of the finally designated AQMAs would then be done
only on the basis of those pollutants that are Identified as problems
1n exceeding air quality standards 1n the future.
For uniformity and to avoid proliferation of designated AQMAs,
a single boundary for each AQMA should be chosen regardless of the number
of pollutants for which a potential problem exists. Actual pollutant
problems within the area may overlap or be mutually exclusive (e.g.,
one part of an AQMA may experience growth 1n mobile source pollutants,
whereas another part may suffer an Increase 1n S02 emission from fuel
combustion), but all the problem areas of a particular geographic
12
-------
location should be enclosed In only one AQMA.
In the case of SMSAs that cross state boundaries, the respective
states should coordinate their designations. An SMSA constitutes, by
definition, "...for general economic and social purposes, a single
community...". Therefore, it is recommended that, for an interstate
SMSA, one AQMA be designated jointly by the respective states. It is
highly desirable that one single integrated plan be adopted by all
states involved. If this is not practical, however, then all state
plans in interstate AQMAs should be at least compatible with one
another.
It may be, however, that one state's portion of an SMSA will
experience growth in emissions, while the adjacent state's portion will
not; in this case, it may be desirable for the growth state to designate
an AQMA in (and/or around) its portion of the SMSA, but for the non-
growth state not to designate in its portion. Obviously, one state
cannot designate a part of an AQMA, which is located in another state.
Interstate cooperation will be necessary to resolve any conflicts.
The U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Economic Activities
(BEA) has developed projections of demographic and economic activity for
SMSAs. BEA projections were made on the basis of SMSAs as they existed
as of January 7, 1972. Chapter 6 includes the county composition of the
SMSAs as they existed at that time. Since January 7, 1972, several
revisions to the composition of SMSAs have been made, the latest in August
1972. Therefore, the January 7, 1972 SMSAs may have slightly different
13
-------
boundaries than the currently defined SMSAs. The question arises as to
which boundary should be used for AQMA designation. EPA recommends
that the January 7, 1972 SMSAs be analyzed. Those SMSAs which are de-
termined to be problem areas should then be designated as AQMAs on the
basis of the current (1973) SMSA composition. For those SMSAs newly
designated since 1972 and SMSAs in Puerto Rico for which no BEA projections
exist, the states should develop their own basis for projection based on
data from various planning agencies.
2.2 CONSIDERATION OF OTHER FACTORS
In deciding upon the particular boundaries of an AQMA, the fol-
lowing factors should be considered.
1. The AQMA should include all of the territory that shares
common air envelope and a common aggregation of sources. This
will usually be an urbanized area plus some adjoining areas
that are now undeveloped but that are expected to develop in
the next 10 years or so. It may include satellite communities
that are now separated from the central urbanized area but will
in 10 to 20 years, become part of the central urbanized area
and thus share the air resource.
2. Use of areas previously designated by agencies of various kinds
may have merit in that a data base may be available and a
14
-------
proliferation of "regions" can be avoided. Examples are
regional planning areas, state-designated planning areas, trans-
portation planning areas, etc.
3. Emission control and other air conservation measures necessary
to maintain air quality standards 1n the urbanized and developing
parts of-major urban centers may be quite stringent. Application
of such stringent measures 1n Isolated or undeveloped areas may
not be advantageous. Thus, Inclusion of large rural areas 1n
an AQMA may not be desirable.
4. Design and Implementation of air conservation measures will
Involve certain governmental agencies. Common boundary lines
for AQMAs and one or some combination of jurlsdictlonal areas
of Implementing agencies may have merit from an operational
point of view.
5. Long-range transport of pollutants 1s another matter of concern.
It 1s true that 1f ambient air standards are maintained near
an aggregation of sources, such standards will also usually be
maintained at more distant locations. Therefore, it may not
be necessary to Include those areas on the periphery of an
aggregation of sources 1n order to assure maintenance of
standards at locations distant from the aggregation of sources.
6. The Influence of topography and geography on dispersion of
pollutants and on overall community growth patterns should be
considered.
15
-------
7. When designating AQMAs, preparation of detailed air quality pro-
jections and development of any needed abatement strategies will
need to be based on presently available land-use, transportation,
and other plans because of time constraints. It may be, however,
that new general regional development plans will be prepared in
the future because of air quality considerations or other reasons.
The AQMA designation would desirably be compatible with any such
future community planning activity.
2.3 AQMA BOUNDARY CHANGES
The designation of the boundaries of an AQMA in May of 1974 does not
preclude changes in such boundaries at the time that more detailed air
quality analyses and abatement/maintenance plans are submitted in 1975, or
at some other time.
2.4 WITHDRAWAL OF AQMA DESIGNATION
Areas designated in May or November 1974 may be "de-designated" if
subsequent, more detailed analysis indicate that, in fact, the ambient air
quality standards will not be jeopardized, in the coming 10 years. There-
fore, in borderline cases arising in initial abbreviated analyses, it is
appropriate to designate the area and proceed with more detailed analyses.
2.5 METROPOLITAN AREAS AND SPARSELY URBANIZED AREAS
The principal objective of designation of AQMAs and subsequent develop-
ment of plans to maintain ambient air quality standards is to provide a
mechanism for management of general overall urban growth as related to air
quality, with due consideration of other aspects of community growth. New
source review procedures, which involve determination that the new source
will meet emission regulations and not cause or contribute to contravention
16
-------
of ambient air quality standards, will be a part of the overall maintenance
plan in urban areas. In lightly urbanized areas and in rural areas, it is
considered that properly administered new source review procedures will be
adequate to assure maintenance of air quality standards and, therefore,
more complex and burdensome h.jintenance programs will not ordinarily be
needed.
2.6 ASSUMPTIONS CONCERNING FUEL AVAILABILITY
In projecting emissions from fuel-burning sources, certain assumptions
must be made concerning the future availability and use of types of fuel.
The assumptions used must be specified in the material submitted in support
of the designation. These will be considered valid if based upon current
trends and/or projected fuel-use requirements. New facilities that might
change local fuel-use patterns, e.g., refineries, nuclear power plants, oil
pipelines, coal gasification facilities, etc., but that have not already
been committed for completion by 1985, cannot be assumed to have an impact
on fuel availability in the designation process. In addition, the current
fuel shortage cannot be assumed to continue ad infinitum, thus, resulting in
zero growth in emissions from fuel combustion.
2.7 ASSUMPTIONS CONCERNING EMISSION AND AIR QUALITY BASELINES
Emission baseline—In order to estimate emissions between the time
standards are attained and 1985, it is necessary to determine emissions at
the time standards are attained. Some SIPs contain these projections of
emissions, and these can be used when available. If not available, these
attainment date emissions can be calculated by the method presented below,
i
which is based on concepts developed in the Manual for Analysis of State
Implementation Plan Progress, prepared for EPA by the Research Triangle
17
-------
Institute . Regulations currently in existence should be used to project
emissions. Regulations that are planned, but not yet promulgated, will not
be accepted for such projections in the designation process.
Air quality baseline—Several of the models presented below for use in
predicting air quality require the use of air quality data at the time of
implementation of existing regulations. As with emissions, the SIPs may
contain projections' of air quality at the time of fuel SIP implementation,
and these air quality values can be used. For cases where air quality pro-
jections are not contained in the SIP, it may be assumed that the NAAQS will
be achieved, unless there is reason to believe otherwise. Alternatively,
recent (1972 and 1973) air quality data may be projected to 1975 and hence
to 1985, making proper adjustments for growth and scheduled abatement actions.
Because of the nature of photochemical oxidants, there may be rural areas
that experience high oxidant concentrations caused by hydrocarbons emitted
from either distant man-made sources or natural sources. It is recommended
that these rural areas not be designated as AQMAs in that it would be mean-
ingless to design a control strategy for them since they do not contain
controllable sources of hydrocarbons. In addition, Federal programs are
planned that will eventually reduce hydrocarbon emissions nationwide.
A similar problem exists for areas subject to high concentrations of
total suspended particulate matter caused by uncontrollable fugitive dust
from natural causes. It is recommended that particulate matter measurements
resulting from such fugitive dust not be the basis for projecting air quality
for the purpose of AQMA designation.
Manual for Analysis of State Implementation Plan Progress. Research
Triangle Institute. Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709. Pre-
pared for: Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Environmental
Protection Agency. Contract No. 68-02-0294. March 1974.
18
-------
2.8 CONSIDERATION OF AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
The following national ambient air quality standards shown in Table 2-1
should be considered in designating areas in which standards may be exceeded.
Table 2-1. NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
- — —- ___— -- _- . '- _ -J^l -- _! --- — - • ..... .
Pollutant Primary Secondary
3 3
Participate natter (a) 75 yg/m , annual 150 yg/m , second highest
geometric mean 24-hr average per year
(b) 260 yg/m3, second highest
24-hr average per year
Sulfur dioxide (a) 80 yg/m , annual arith- 1300 yg/m , second highest
metic mean 24-hr average per year
(b) 365 yg/m-3, second highest '
24-hr average per year
Carbon monoxide , 10 yg/m , second highest 8-hour average per year
Photochemical oxidants 160 vq/m , second highest 1-hour average per year
Nitrogen dioxide ' 100 yq/m , annual arithmetic average
For carbon monoxide, assume that the 1-hour standard will be maintained
if the 8-hour standard is maintained. As in the original SIPs, a demonstra-
tion of achieving the oxidant standard will imply that the hydrocarbon
standard also has been achieved.
Although states may designate on the basis of air quality standards
i
more stringent than the national ambient air quality standards, EPA will,
should the occasion ever arise, only act to the extent necessary to ensure
attainment of the national ambient air quality standards.
2.9 PROJECTION REQUIREMENTS
Air quality standards must be maintained throughout the 10 years1 fol-
lowing submission of the detailed analysis of the AQMAs. Projections of
air quality must, therefore, be made for the year 1985 and for any other
19
-------
years within the 10-year period in which it is believed that concentrations
may temporarily exceed a NAAQS.
2.10 SUPPORTING INFORMATION
For each SMSA within the state that is exempted from designation on
the basis of the initial criteria (presented below), the submittal must
include the reasons for the exemption.
For each SMSA within the state which is not exempted based on the initial
criteria, a projection of air quality for each pollutant not exempted must
accompany the submittal. Such projections must include all calculations,
except where a computerized model is used. If a computerized model is
employed, the submittal must describe the model used. If the projection
method is not one of the methods recommended by EPA below, the submittal must
describe the method.
A summary table of the designations and rationale similar to that pre-
sented in Table 2-2 should accompany the submittal.
Table 2-2.
Summary of AQMA Designations for State of
Area3
Reason not.
designated
Reason .
designated
Designation for
TSP
so2
CO
°x
N02
aMust include at least all SMSAs within the state.
Reasons would be either "Initial Criteria" or "Actual Projection."
20
-------
2.11 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
The areas designated by the states and eventually by EPA will have the
force of regulation by virtue of the requirement that (1) for these areas,
a determination must be made of whether NAAQS will be maintained, and (2) a
plan may have to be submitted for maintenance of the standards. Because of
these reasons, designations must be subjected to public hearing prior to
submission to EPA by May 10, 1974. The rationale behind the requirement of
public hearing on AQMA designation is basically that the decision to desig-
nate or not designate areas as AQMAs is of such importance, considering the
economic and developmental implications of such decisions, that the widest
public participation in such decisions should be allowed. In holdinc such
hearings, the states should consider the rationale upon which decisions were
made to include or exclude all SMSAs, or parts thereof, within their bound-
aries.
The regulations concerning public hearings and submission of plans
(40 CFR 51, Sections 51.4 and 51.5) are applicable with regard to submission
of the designated area.
21
-------
3. INITIAL DESIGNATION CRITERIA
The criteria Immediately below were developed to enable the states
to eliminate obvious non-problem areas and include obvious problem areas
without performing an analysis of projected air quality. Any SMSA that is
not either eliminated or automatically Included as an AQMA under these cri-
teria is expected to undergo the analysis described in Section 4 of this
document to determine the 1985 emissions. After application of these
initial criteria, any SMSA that is not automatically excluded or included
is expected to undergo a projection of 1985 emissions and air quality by
techniques such as those presented 1n Sections 4 and 5 of these guidelines.
Bear 1n mind that in case of a conflict between inclusion and exclusion
criteria, inclusion criteria take precedence.
The technical derivation of these criteria is presented as Appendix A.
3.1 ELIMINATION OF OBVIOUS NON-PROBLEM AREAS
SMSAs that meet the following criteria may be automatically excluded
from consideration as an AQMA for the particular pollutant; supporting in-
formation must substantiate this exclusion.
1. Particulate matter:
SMSAs that are located in AQCRs where data for the past 2 years
Indicates the AQCR is below all NAAQS.
2. Sulfur dioxide:
SMSAs that are located in AQCRs where data for the past 2 years in-
dicated that the AQCR is below all 'NAAQS and, the product of (1) the air
quality concentration in the past year and (2) the relative growth 1n
SMSA total earnings between the base year and 1985 is less than the
23
-------
national ambient air quality standards.
3. Carbon monoxide:
Use Figure 3-1 and the following procedures to determine those SMSAs
that can be excluded from consideration as an AQMA.
a. Estimate the percent contribution of CO emissions from light-
duty vehicles to total mobile source carbon monoxide emissions on heavily
used, central city streets; choose the area where LDV contribution is re-
presentative of the local area in the vicinity of the air quality monitor-
ing site.
b. Locate the point of Figure 3-1 corresponding to the highest
measured 8-hour CO concentration in the central city in 1970 and the LDV
contribution to local mobile source emissions estimated under (a) above.
c. If the intersection determined in (b) above lies on or below
the curve, the area may be automatically eliminated from consideration
as an AQMA; if the point lies above the curve, proceed with the analysis
described in Section 5-2.
4. Photochemical oxidants:
SMSAs which have no transportation control strategy for photochemical
oxidants and_ which are located in AQCRs with a maximum 1-hour oxidant
3
concentration of less than 320,ug/m during the past 2 years are excluded.
5. Nitrogen dioxide:
a. SMSAs not designated by the inclusion criteria in Section 3.2(e)
are excluded.
3.2 INCLUSION OF OBVIOUS PROBLEM AREAS
Areas that meet any one of the following criteria should be designated,
in whole or at least in part, as an AQMA for the particular pollutant.
24
-------
0 20 40 60 80 100
CONTRIBUTION OF LIGHT-DUTY VEHICLES TO LOCAL MOBILE SOURCE EMISSION, percent
Figure 3-1. Exclusion criteria for carbon monoxide as a function of the
distribution of emissions between light- and heavy-duty vehicles on local
streets.
25
-------
1. Participate matter:
Areas within AQCRs that are not projected to attain the NAAQS for
participate matter by 1985.r
b. Sulfur dioxide:
Areas within AQCRs that e^e not projected to attain the NAAQS for
sulfur dioxide by 1985.
3. Carbon monoxide:
No automatic Inclusion criteria.
4. Photochemical oxidants:
Any areas for which a transportation control strategy for photo-
chemical oxidants 1s required (Table 3-1).
5. Nitrogen dioxide:
The appropriate parts of those SMSAs whose central cities are Los
Angeles, Chicago, New York, Denver, and Salt Lake City.
'J 26
-------
Table 3-1. AQCRs IN WHICH TRANSPORTATION CONTROL STRATEGIES ARE REQUIRED
State
Alaska
Arizona
California
Colorado
District of
Columbia
Illinois
Indiana
Maryland
Massachusetts
Minnesota
Missouri
New Jersey
New York
Ohio
Oregon
Pennsylvania
Rhode Island
Texas
AQCR
Northern Alaska Iritrastate
Phoenix-Tucson Intrastate
San Francisco Bay Area Intrastate
Sacramento Valley Intrastate
Metropolitan Los Angeles Intrastate
San Joaquin Valley Intrastate
San Diego Intrastate
Southeastern Desert
Metropolitan Denver Intrastate
National Capital Interstate
Metropolitan Chicago Interstate
Metropolitan Indianapolis Interstate
National Capital Interstate
Metropolitan Baltimore Intrastate'
Metropolitan Boston Intrastate
Hartford-New Haven-Springfield Interstate
Minneapolis-St. Paul Interstate
Metropolitan St. Louis Interstate
New Jersey-New York-Connecticut Interstate
Metropolitan Philadelphia Interstate
New Jersey-New York-Connecticut Interstate
Genesee-Finger Lakes Intrastate
Metropolitan Cincinnati Interstate
Portland Interstate
Metropolitan Philadelphia Interstate
Southwest Pennsylvania Intrastate
Metropolitan Providence Interstate
Metropolitan San Antonia Intrastate
Metropolitan Dallas-Ft. Worth Intrastate
Austin-Waco Intrastate
-Required, for
CO
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ox
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
27
-------
Table 3-1 (continued). AQCRs IN WHICH TRANSPORTATION CONTROL STRATEGIES ARE REQUIRED
State
Texas (cont.)
Utah
Virginia
Washington
AQCR
El Paso-Las Cruces-Alamagordo Interstate
Corpus Christi -Victoria Intrastate
Metropolitan Houston-Gal veston Intrastate
Southern Louisiana-Southeast Texas Interstate
Wasatch Front Intrastate
National Capitol Interstate
Puget Sound Intrastate
Eastern Washington-Northern Idaho Interstate
Required for
CO
X
X
X
X
Ox
X
X
X
X
X
a. Currently under study; may require only stationary source control.
28
-------
4. METHODS FOR PROJECTING EMISSIONS
In order to Identify those SMSAs that could become AQMAs during the
period of 1975 to 1985, it will be necessary to first determine 1970 emis-
sions, project these emissions to 1975 (or 1977 for areas granted extensions)
to account for current SIP control strategy reductions, and then further
project emissions to 1985 using Bureau of Economic Analysis indicator's of
growth in population and earnings for SMSAs. From the 1985 emissions,
air quality can then be estimated by techniques presented in Section 5
and compared with the applicable standards to determine if the area being
considered should, in fact, be designated as an AQMA. In many cases,
1975 emissions will already have been estimated for the purpose of develop-
ing SIP control strategies. In the event that 1975 emissions are given in
the state's implementation plan by county and they are still valid, they
may be used directly, and no projection to 1975 would, of, course, be
necessary. For ease in both computation and review, emissions can be
recorded by county within each SMSA as shown in Table 4-1. A suggested
process for projecting emissions is presented in the flow diagram of
Figure 4-1.
29
-------
Table 4-1. EMISSION PROJECTION CALCULATIONS*1
A
Source
class
Fuel combustion
Power plants
Point sources"
Area sources
Subtotal
Industrial process
, Point sources (Subtotal)
Solid Waste disposal
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Transportation
LDV
HDV
Subtotal
Miscellaneous
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
TOTAL
B
1970
emissions
C
Reducti on
factors
C-l
Growth
factor
(1975/1970)
D
1975
emissions
E
Growth
w*a£g
[(1985/1975)-!]
-
F
Emission
factor
adjustment
G
1985
emissions
G = D(l + EF)
aA table such as this should be prepared for each pollutant.
Power plants excluded.
-------
Determine 1970 emissions by source category from state files,
SIPs, or NEDS data bank
I
Assemble county emissions data into SMSA totals for 1970
PREFERRED METHOD
BACK-UP METHOD
Apply SIP control strategies to each
source to determine allowable emis-
sions in 1975
Apply reduction factors in Table 4-2
to emissions from 1970 uncontrolled
power plants to obtain 1975 controlled
emissions (Use more specific estimates
if available.)
Calculate 1975 emissions from new
power plants using capacity of planned
new units from utility data or "Steam-
Electric Plant Factors" and apply
regulations.
I
Calculate 1975 emissions from new power
plants, using capacity of planned units
from utility data or "Steam-Electric
Plant Factors" and apply regulations.
For industrial process, solid waste
and misc. sources, calculate growth
in emissions from 1970 to 1975 using
BEA indicators
For industrial process, solid waste and
misc. sources determine 1975 controlled
emissions by applying reduction factors
from Table 4-2 (or local regulations)
to 1970 emissions, by source category
I
----- - -• • • -_ | - _- , JV - _ ' -- - - - -.I.- --...-._- ' - ~ - - -
Determine 1985 emissions from transportation sources using
formula Qig85 = 2(Qbase) G^. (for CO, HC, and N0x)
Determine growth of emissions from 1975 to 1985 for all sources
other than transportation using BEA indicators
I
.-.m-nr._i- -I ---- - - - ._ '
Determine 1985 controlled emissions from 1975 emissions for
industrial process, solid waste, and miscellaneous sources,
using BEA growth factors and emission factor adjustments
. 4
[Total 1985 emissions from all source categories
Figure 4-1. Calculation of 1975 and 1985 emissions.
31
-------
4.1 PROJECTING 1975 EMISSIONS
Two methods for projecting 1975 emissions are presented below, a
"preferred" method and a "back-up" method. By implication, EPA expects the
"preferred" method to be used for the most part in each state. Only where
time does-not permit or where the workload will be great (such as for those
states that have a large number of SMSAs to be analyzed), should the "back-
up" method be used. Before deciding to use the "back-up" method, states
should discuss the problems of using the "preferred" method with the repre-
sentative responsible for maintenance of standards in the appropriate EPA
Regional Office. CO, HC, and NO emissions from transportation sources
J\
can be calculated to 1985 directly by the method presented below in
Section 4.2.
4.1.1 Preferred Method
This method is the same as that used in the development of the original
implementation plans, i.e., a source-by-source tabulation of emissions
allowed under the applicable control strategies contained in the state's
implementation plan. Data should be presented and submitted in a form
similar to that presented in Appendix D of 40 CFR, Part 51.
For projections of new steam-generating power plants, it is recommended
that states contact electric utility companies directly. If time does not
permit this, use 1975 projections of new capacity in the latest edition of
"Steam-Electric Plant Factors" published by the National Coal Association.
32
-------
After the source-by-source tabulation of allowable emission has been
computed, tabulate the allowable emissions into the following categories,
and use the recommended projection parameter to account for growth to
1975.
Recommended BEA
Category Projection Parameter*
Fuel combustion (excluding power plants) Total earnings
Industrial processes Manufacturing earnings
Solid waste Population
Miscellaneous Total earnings
Emissions from these four categories and power plants can be recorded
in Table 4-1.
4.1.2 Back-up Method
The following technique is based on 1970 summary NEDS data, and uses
average emission reduction factors derived from analysis of point source
*EPA's recommendation that these parameters be used was based upon avail-
able information and was not the result of a statistical analysis to
determine an accurate correlation between emissions from a particular
category and an economic or demographic parameter. Furthermore, the user
of these projections should be aware that it is not known what relation-
ship exists between an increase in an economic indicator and an increase
in emissions from a particular category. Another complicating factor is
the present energy situation—it is not known what effect the current
situation will have on long-term growth.
33
-------
emissions 1n six AQCRs (St. Louis, Denver, Washington, D.C., Seattle,
Indianapolis, and Boston). These factors represent reductions 1n emissions
resulting from Imposition of typical regulations under the SIP process.
Power plant emissions are calculated separately from other sources because
(1) of the Importance of their emissions, (2) different emission reduction
ratios must be applied to them, and (3) projections of new power plants are
readily available. Obviously, SIP emission limitations vary widely, and
thus the factors may over- or underestimate results 1n some cases. In the
interest of alleviating a time-consuming burden, however, EPA offers this
technique as a substitute for a detailed source-by-source and detailed
category analysis only in those states where time does not permit use of
the "preferred" method.
4.1.2.1 Step A - Determine 1970 Emissions - Using emissions summaries, or
NEDS data bank, obtain and record 1970 emissions for each pollutant by point
and area source category, i.e., fuel combustion, industrial processes, solid
waste, transportation, and miscellaneous sources. Show emissions for power
plants separate from other fuel combustion sources. Emissions can be recorded
1n this manner as shown in Table 4-1.
4.1.2.2 Step B - Determine 1975 Power Plant Emissions - Calculate power
plant emissions from existing and new plants using data from Steam-Electric
2
Plant Factors, published yearly by the National Coal Association.
2
Steam-Electric Plant Factors. National Coal Association, 1130 Seventeenth
St., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036.
34
-------
4.1.2.2.1 Power plants existing in 1970 - Multiply 1970 SIP emission
factors in Table 4-2 (or more specific factors, if available) to get 1975
controlled emissions. This reduction applies only to those plants that
were not controlled to SIP regulations in 1970. For power plants that were
under control in 1970, extend 1970 emissions unchanged to 1985.
4.1.2.2.2 New power plants - It is preferable that the state contact
electric utility companies directly to obtain projections of new power plants.
If time does not permit this, use 1975 projections of new capacity in the
latest edition of Steam-Electric Plant Factors. Calculate emissions in
1975 for additional capacity over 1970 using appropriate factors for losses
allowed by Federal New Source Performance Standards, or SIP regulations in
the event the SIP regulations either take effect earlier or are more
stringent than the NSPS.
4.1.2.3 Step C Determine 1975 Emissions from Other Sources - Determine
allowable emissions in 1975 for point and area sources (other than power
plants and transportation sources) by source category using the emission re-
duction factors given in Table 4-2. If it is likely that state regulations
or those of a local agency within state boundaries would result in values
significantly different from those produced by use of the factors in Table
4-2, then the state should use its own regulations or those of the appropri-
ate local agency in determining 1975 emissions. Such regulations should be
documented. Since this estimate does not account for growth between 1970
and 1975, the results of usinq Table 4-2 must be modified by the projected
growth in emissions for each source category.
4.1.2.4 Step D - Project Growth Rates for 1970 to 1975 - To obtain emissions
for all sources except power plants, multiply emissions determined in Step C
35
-------
Table 4-2. EMISSION REDUCTION FACTORS
(Ratio of 1975 allowable emissions to 1970 emissions)
Source Category
Fuel combustion
Point sources minus power generation
Area sources
Power generation sources
Industrial processes
Solid Waste
Point sources
Area sources
Transportation
Miscellaneous
Point sources
Area sources
Particulate
matter
0.44
0.48
0.50
0.43
0.29
0.28
1.0
1.0
1.0
S0x
0.43
0.57
0.43
0.37
1.0
0.82
1.0
1.0
1.0
HC
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.47
1.0
0.88
b
0.48
1.0
CO
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.10
0.53
0.88
b '
1.0
1.0
NOX
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
b
1.0
1.0
aThese emission reduction factors for 1975 as compared to 1970 are based on
a composite of expected and existing conditions and emission control regu-
lations in St. Louis, Denver, Washington, D.C., Seattle, Indianapolis, and
Boston. All agencies should develop such factors for conditions in each
area under consideration whenever possible. The factors above should be
used only when such specific factors cannot be prepared.
Calculated by different method; see text.
36
-------
above by growth factors obtained from available data or BEA projections, deter-
mined as follows:*
1. For fuel combustion sources, except power plants (where the method
of calculating growth has been previously explained), it is suggested
that the growth rate be based on the percent increase in total earnings
from 1970 to 1975 for the particular SMSA.
2. For the industrial processes, the growth rate can be based on the
percent increase in manufacturing earnings.
3. For solid waste emissions, the growth factor can be based on the
percent increase in population for 1970 to 1975.
4. For miscellaneous emissions, the growth factor can be based on the
increase in total earnings as was suggested for the category of fuel
combustion sources.
5. For particulate matter and SO emissions from transportation, the
X
growth factor can be based on the increase in population. These growth
factors can be inserted in Column C-l.
4.2 PROJECTING 1985 EMISSIONS
For transportation sources, the following formula may be used to compute
1985 emissions using 1972 baseline data for N0« and 1970 baseline data for all
other pollutants. (It is not necessary to make a calculation to determine the
level of 1975 emissions for transportation sources):
Q1985 = «Wl Gi Ei
*CO, HC, and NO emissions from transportation sources can be calculated to
1985 directly by the method presented in Section 4.2
37
-------
where Q-jggg = Projected 1985 emissions
^base^i = Baseline emission from source category i.
G.. = Growth factor for source category 1.
E.J = Emission factor ratio for source category i.
Project 1985 emissions from 1975 emissions for all source categories
other than transportation using the formula:*
F. = Cj (1 + D.E.)
where: F = 1985 emissions from source category i
D = Growth rate of emissions between 1975 and 1985 for source
category i
E = Emission factor adjustment for source category i (applied only
to industrial process sources - for all other categories E. =•!)
Growth rates (D in Equation 4-2) for emissions between 1975 and 1985
are the same as those used to project 1975 emissions (see footnote in
Section 4.1.1). That is, the percent increase in total earnings projected
for 1975 to 1985 may be used to project emissions from fuel combustion; the
percent increase in manufacturing earnings may be used for industrial pro-
cessess; the percent increase in population may be used for solid waste
emissions and particulate matter and SO emissions from transportation; and
/>
the percent increase in total earnings may be used for the miscellaneous
category. For power plants, it is again recommended that the state contact
electric utility companies directly. If time does not permit this, the percent
increase in total earnings projected for 1975 to 1985 may be used to project
1985 power plant emissions since it appears to be most closely related to the '
*This formula is not to be used for power plants if actual existing and pro-
jected emissions are available.
38
-------
o
increased demand for electric power. Add these power plant emissions to
the emissions extended unchanged from 1970 to get total 1985 emissions from
power plants.
An adjustment will be needed to account for control between 1975 and
1985 of new industrial process sources because of forthcoming new source
performance standards. Generally, these standards will be more stringent
than limitations presently contained in the SIPs. The adjustment needed
to account for future new source performance standards would be the ratio
of the estimated percent allowable emissions under the future new source
performance standards to the percent allowable emissions under the current
SIP control strategy. These ratios, of course, vary widely among industrial
categories. Furthermore, EPA has only a rough idea of what the standards
will eventually be. It is suggested, therefore, that a composite adjustment
factor of 0.40 be used as the "E" value in Equation 4-2 for industrial process
sources for each pollutant. Bear in mind that this "E" value applies only
to industrial process sources. For other source categories, use E=l. Examples
of the method of projecting 1985 emissions and air quality, using the "back-
up" method of projecting 1975 emissions, are enclosed in Appendix B of these
guidelines.
39
-------
5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELING AIR QUALITY CONCENTRATIONS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section of the guideline presents information concerning models
recommended for use in predicting 1985 air quality, once 1985 emissions
have been calculated. After this air quality prediction has been made,
the designation of AQMAs can be made, i.e., those areas that are pre-
dicted to exceed the standard can be selected.
5.2 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR CARBON MONOXIDE
Once carbon monoxide (CO) emissions have been projected to 1985, using
techniques found in Chapter 4 of this document, air quality concentrations
for CO can be determined with the aid of the following techniques.
High CO concentrations are observed primarily near areas of high
traffic density. "Rollback" models for CO have been criticized for
giving undue weight to stationary source CO emissions and to vehicle emis-
sions growth in the suburbs as compared to vehicle emissions arowth on
streets in the fully developed parts of urban areas where most existing air
sampling sites are located. The following model mitigates these problems by
giving the most weight (80 per cent) to local traffic near the air sampling
station and relatively less weight (20 per cent) to total regional emissions.
The model divides the observed CO concentration into two parts:
that attributable to local traffic, and that attributable to the entire
urbanized area. Changes in emissions from each of these components are
projected, and the 1985 concentration is predicted using modified roll-
back techniques. The model equations are: '
F = F + F + b (5-1)
41
-------
FL PL Gf EL + PH Gfj EH
0.8(B-b) = PL + PH(5-2)
FU . PL 6L EL * PH GH EH * PS GS ES
0.2(B-b) T00%'(5-3)
where: FT = Total future (1985) CO concentration
F, = Future concentration attributable to local traffic
F.. = Future concentration attributable to urban emission
b = Background concentration
B = Baseline concentration (measured or estimated),
P. = Percent emission from light-duty vehicles (gross
vehicle weight < 6000 Ib)
PH = Percent emission from other mobile sources (gross
vehicle weight > 6000 Ib)
P = Percent emission from stationary sources
G = Growth factor over the projection period, G* f G
E = Expected ratio of 1985 emission to baseline emission
for a composite source (Obtained from Table 5-1)
G* = Growth factor for traffic on local streets near
critical air sampling stations.
Equations 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3 may be used to estimate 1985 CO concentra-
tions in those areas that cannot be eliminated by using the initial desig-
nation criteria. The information needed to apply the equations is listed
as follows:
1. Baseline air quality (b). Second highest 8-hour average, during most
recent year at a site where the public has access for at least 8 hours.
2. Background CO concentration (b). Use 1 ppm if data to the contrary
are unavailable.
42
-------
3. Percentage contribution of light- and heavy-duty vehicles and
stationary sources to the baseline year emission inventory (same
year as air quality data). This information should be computed
from the latest emission inventory available locally. If local data
are unavailable, the National Emissions Data System (NEDS) data file
contains emissions data by county which may be used. The users of
equations 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3 must distinguish between two sets of P.
and Pu values for the local traffic and general urban cases: in the
n
calculation of F. , use the P. and P., values used in the application
of the initial designation criteria for CO; in the calculation of F..,
use the P, and P.. values corresponding to the general urban area.
4. Growth rates from past trends for the source categories. Ideally,
the growth rates should be based on a direct indicator of emission
potential such as vehicle miles, material processed, kilowatts
generated, etc. It may be necessary to use an indirect indicator
such as the BEA projections of population and economic activity.
Growth in population is recommended as a logical choice of estimator
of mobile source emissions.
5. Emission factor ratios. Nationwide emission factor ratios for motor
vehicles are presented in Table 5-1. If local mobile source emission
factors are expected to differ from the national by virtue of
transportation controls, unusual vehicle life expectancy, or other
reasons, local emission factor ratios may be used. The procedure
for calculating composite vehicle emission factors is presentedMn
43
-------
Table 5-1. EMISSION FACTOR RATIOS3
Year
1970b
1975
1980
1985
1970b
1975
1980
1985
Heavy-duty
vehicles
Carbon monoxide
1.00
0.96
0.94
0.93
Hydrocarbons
1.00
0.92
0.82
0.79
Light-duty
vehicles
1.00
0.59
0.29
0.08
1.00
0.50
0.25
0.07
aRatio of emissions in given year to 1970 base year.
bFor data bases other than 1970 (such as 1971, 1972, 1973) for CO and
HC, interpolate between 1970 and 1975 values.
44
-------
the publication EPA-450/2-73-003, An Interim Report on Motor Vehicle
3
Emission Estimation.
The emission factor ratio for stationary sources will depend
on the particular source mix in the area and on state regulations
for stationary source CC emissions. If such information is unavail-
able, then the following emission factor ratios may be used:
CO Emission Factor
Source Ratio, 1970-1985
Power plants 1.0
Industry 0.5
Area Sources (stationary) 1.0
The overall stationary source emission factor ratio is calculated
from
Composite = PPP EPP + PI EI * PA EA
PPP + PS + PA
5.3 RELATING OXIDANT CONCENTRATION TO HYDROCARBON EMISSIONS
Appendix J to 40 CFR Part 51 "Requirements for Preparation, Adoption,
and Submittal of Implementation Plans" (published in the August 14, 1971,
and republished in the November 25, 1971, Federal Register) presents an
estimate of the hydrocarbon emission reduction needed to obtain the NAAQS
for photochemical oxidant. This estimate is based on an "envelope curve"
that encloses data points for nonmethane hydrocarbon and oxidant concentra-
tions in several cities.
There is evidence to suggest that HC/NOx ratios should decrease as a
result of emission control regulations in force and anticipated. There
Kircher, D.S. and Armstronq, D.P. "An Interim Report on Motor Vehicle
Emission Estimation," EPA-450/2-73-003, Research Triangle Park, N.C.
October 1973.
45
-------
should also be some oxidant reduction, although the amount of additional
reduction cannot be quantified at present. Therefore, Appendix J must
be considered a conservative estimate in that it may require more HC
reduction than needed.
Appendix J should be used as follows:
1. Project 1985 HC emissions as shown in Steps A through D of
Section 4.1.2.1 through 4.1.2.4.
2. Determine the expected emission change by
Rexpected = Ebase " E1985 x 100%
Ebase
3. Determine the required percentage hydrocarbons emission reduc-
tions using Appendix J and the highest observed 1-hour oxidant
concentration durinq the baseline year.
4. If R required from Step 3 is greater than R expected from
Step 2, the area should be designated an AQMA for oxidant.
This will be especially true if RexDec-ted ^s a neqative number.
5.4 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR OTHER POLLUTANTS-RELATING PROJECTED EMISSIONS
TO AIR QUALITY
5.4.1 Proportional Roll -forward Model
Present air quality may be projected to 1985 for pollutants other than
oxidants and CO (i.e., air quality may be projected for TSP, S09, and NOV)
•i ' '* L. X
using the proportional rollforward model as shown in the following formula.
C1985 = b +
Where: ' C^g85 = projected concentration
b = background concentration
46
-------
C. = baseline concentration
base
^1985 = ProJecte(* emission
0. = baseline emission
base
While the proportional roll-forward technique is a potential means
for selecting which counties or SMSAs to designate as AQMAs, it has
several shortcomings which may render it unsuitable, or impossible, to
apply. There are:
1. Base year air quality observations are required.
2. The monitoring data must be representative of the area of
interest (i.e., a monitor dominated by a single point source or
a small number of select sources may result in anomalous pre-
dictions).
3. The meteorology occurring during the base period must be simi-
lar to that which is of interest during the period being
modeled. As a result of these limitations, it may be necessary
to designate AQMAs using analytical techniques which:
a. Do not require previous air quality observations,
b. Take some explicit account, at least in a rough sense,
of meteorological differences.
Where the above conditions apply with particular force, it may be
appropriate to use the Miller-Holzworth model described in the next
section.
5.4.2 Miller-Holzworth Model
The Miller-Holzworth Model Can be used only for the calculation of
annual averages of suspended particulate matter and sulfur dioxide. The
47
-------
Mill er-Holzworth Model 1-3 for area sources assumes concentrations to be a
function of emission density, wind speed, atmospheric mixing depth, and city
size. The model Implicitly assumes that the atmosphere is slightly unstable
(between Turner Stability Classes C and 0). Stability assumptions cannot
be varied. The model, as formulated below, estimates the city-wide average
concentration for the sampling time of interest. The relationship among
average city-wide concentration, emission density, city size, wind speed,
and mixing depth is:
S-0.011Q [l.m0-™ + agOj . (5.5 x IP"5) UH1-26] (5-4)
Where x = average city-wide concentration,
o
Q = emission density, tons/yr-mi
H = mixing depth, m
S = along-wind distance of the city (miles). When this 1s
not known, assume S =
-------
b. For annual standards such as the NAAQS for nitrogen dioxide,
5
refer to Figures 1 and 11 in OAP Publication AP-101 showing the
mean annual morning mixing depths and wind speeds for the United
States. Select the values of "H" and "U" which are appropriate
for the c^ea of the country being analyzed. Use these in
Equation (5-4) or Equation (5-5)
c. For short-term (1-hour to 24-hour) standards, refer to Figures
2 and 12, in Reference 3 showing mean winter morning mixing
depths and wind speeds. Use the indicated values in Equation
(5-4) or Equation (5-5).
2. If air quality data are available
a. Take emission projections obtained as shown in Section 4 of
these Guidelines.
b. Subtract present emission density from projected emission
density.
c. Aoply the Miller-Holzworth Model as described above except use
the difference between projected and present emission densities
in Equation (5-4) or (5-5) to obtain
AX = 0.01UQ [3.61H°-13 + °°S- (5.5 x IP"*) uH1-26] (5-6)
or A x~ = 0.01UQ (1600 S/u)°'115 (5-7)
d. Add A x^ to the observed air quality levels
Holzworth, G.C., "Mixing Heights, Wind Speeds, and Potential for Urban Air
Pollution Throughout the Contiguous United States," OAP Publication AP-101,
January 1972.
49
-------
3. Use of Calibrated Miller-Holzworth Model
Wherever possible, it would be preferable to use a version of the
model that has been calibrated with observed data. Figure 1 in
Appendix A of the 40 CFR Part 51 is such a version that has been
calibrated for annual TSP and SOp concentrations in cases where
mixing depth is unimportant. Such cases would occur when
1600 S/u < 0.471 H1'13
t '
In many cases, mixing depth remains relatively unimportant for
t
1 13
pollutant travel times greater than 0.471 H . Thus, if the
annual concentration of TSP or S02 concentrations is of interest,
Figure 1 in Appendix A of 40 CFR Part 51 should be used instead
of Equations (5-4), (5-5), (5-6), (5-7).
5.4.3 Estimating Short-Term Concentrations for Sulfur Dioxide and Particulates
It is necessary that the short-term standards for SO^ and TSP be main-
tained as well as the annual standards. Two methods may be employed to
estimate compliance with short-term standards: roll forward and the log-
normal relationship.
5.4.3.1 Roll forward - The proportional model given in Section 5.4.1 may be
' j _^
applied directly to" sftort-term concentrations. The second highest 24-hour
or 3-hour concentration* observed in the AQMA entered as Ck:. . and the cal-
,.-..' .- . ' - . •-.- •' - /^*^fe^ •
culated C-|g85 is compared with the appropriate short-term standard/ '
5.4.3.2 Log-Normal - Log-normal model is an empirical relationship developed
by Dr. Larsen of EPA. The model allows the estimation of short-term maximum
concentrations given the annual average and a characteristic parameter of the
*Short-term standards are not to be exceeded more than once per year. Thus,
it is the second highest value that must meet NAAQS.
50
-------
concentration distribution called the Geometric Standard Deviation (GSD).
Table 5-2 1s taken directly from R. I. Larsen's A Mathematical Model for
Relating A1r Quality Measurements to Air Quality Standards. AP-89. Using
this table, the peak concentration may be calculated from the annual average
provided the GSD 1s knovo. The GSD 1s routinely calculated for air quality
data in the SAROAD data bank.
5.5 COMPARISON OF PROJECTED AIR QUALITY WITH NAAQS
After air quality concentrations have been projected to 1985, a compari-
son to the NAAQS presented in Section 2.8 can be made. If the projected air
quality of an area exceeds a NAAQS, the area should be designated an AQMA
for that pollutant; conversely, 1f the projected air quality does not exceed
a NAAQS, the area does not have to be designated as an AQMA for that pollu-
tant.
NOTE: Examples of the method of projecting 1985 emissions and air quality
using the "back-up" method of projecting 1975 emissions are enclosed
in Appendix B of these guidelines.
51
-------
Table 5-2,. RATIO OF EXPECTED ANNUAL MAXIMUM POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION
TO ARITHMETIC MEAN CONCENTRATION FOR VARIOUS AVERAGING
TIMES AND STANDARD GEOMETRIC DEVIATIONS
Standard geometric deviation for
averaging times of:
1sec
.00
.07
.14
.21
.29
.36
.44
.51
.59
.67
.75
.83
.91
.99
208
2.16
2.25
2.34
2.42
2.51
2.60
2.69
2.78
2.87
2.97
3.06
3.15
3.25
3.34
3.44
3.54
3.64
374
3.83
3.93
4.04
414
4.24
4.34
4.45
4.55
4.66
476
4.87
4.97
5 min
1.00
1.06
1.11
1.17
1.23
1.29
1.34
1.40
1.46
1.52
1.58
1.64
1 70
1.76
1.82
1.88
1.94
2.00
2.06
2.12
2.19
2.25
2.31
2.37
2.43
2.50
2.56
2.62
2.69
2.75
2.81
2.88
2.94
3.00
3.07
3.13
3.20
3.26
3.33
3.39
3.46
3.52
3.59
3.65
3.72
1hr
.00
1 .05
.10
.15
.20
.25
.30
.35
.40
.45
.50
.55
.60
.65
.70
.75
.80
.85
.90
1.95
2.00
2.05
2.10
2.15
2.20
2.25
2.30
2.35
2.40
2.45
2.50
2.55
2.60
2.65
2.70
2.75
2.80
2.85
2.90
295
3.00
3.05
3.10
3.15
3.20
3hr
100
1.05
109
1.14
1 19
1.23
1 28
1.32
1.37
1.42
1.46
151
1.55
1.60
1.64
1.69
1.74
1.78
1.83
1.87
1.92
1.96
2.00
205
2.09
2.14
2.18
2.23
2.27
2.32
2.36
2.41
2.45
2.49
2.54
2.58
263
2.67
2.71
276
2.80
284
2.89
2.93
2.98
8hr
1.00
1.04
.09
.13
.17
.22
26
1.30
1.34
1.39
1.43
.47
.51
.55
.59
.63
.68
.72
1.76
1.80
1.84
1.88
1.92
1.96
2.00
2.04
208
2.12
2.16
2.20
224
2.27
2.31
2.35
2.39
2.43
2.47
2.51
2.55
2.59
2.62
2.66
2.70
2.74
2.78
1day
1.00
1.04
08
.12
.16
.20
.24
1.27
1.31
1.35
.39
.42
.46
.50
.53
1.57
1.61
1.64
1.68
1.71
1.75
.78
.82
.85
.89
.92
96
1.99
203
206
2.09
2.13
2.16
2.19
2.23
2.26
2.29
2.33
2.36
2.39
2.42
246
2.49
252
2.55
4 days
1.00
1.04
1.07
1.10
1.14
1.17
1.20
1.24
1.27
1.30
1.33
1.36
1.39
1.42
1.45
1.48
1.51
1.54
1.57
1.60
1.63
1.66
1.69
1.72
1.74
1.77
180
1.83
1.85
1.88
1.91
1.93
1.96
1.99
2.01
2.04
2.07
2.09
2.12
2.14
2.17
2.20
2.22
2.25
2.27
1 mo
1.00
103
1.05
1.08
1.10
.12
.15
.17
.19
.21
.24
.26
.28
.30
32
.34
.36
.38
.40
1-42
1.44
1.46
1.47
1.49
1.51
1.53
1.55
1.56
1.58
1.60
1.62
1.63
1.65
1.67
1.68
1.70
1.71
1.73
1.75
1.76
1 78
1.79
1.81
1.82
1.84
Ratio of annual maximum concentration to mean
concentration for averaging times of:
1sec
1.00
1.44
2.04
2.83
3.86
5.18
685
8.94
11.53
14.69
18.53
23.14
28.65
35.16
42.83
51.78
62.18
74.18
87.96
103.70
121.61
141.88
164.73
190.39
219.09
251.07
286.61
325.94
36937
417.15
469.60
527.00
539.67
657.92
732.07
81247
899.45
993.34
1094.51
1203.31
132011
1445.27
1579.16
1722.17
1874.68
5 min
1.00
1.27
1.59
1.97
2.42
293
3.51
4.18
4.93
5.77
6.71
7.76
8.92
10.19
11.58
13.11
14.76
16.56
18.50
20.59
22.83
25.24
27.81
30.55
33.47
36.56
39.84
43.31
46.97
50.82
54.88
59.14
63.60
68.28
73.17
78.28
83.61
89.16
94.94
100.94
107 17
113.64
120.34
12728
134.46
1 hr
1.00
1.20
1.43
1.69
1.97
228
263
3.00
3.41
3.84
4.32
4.82
5.37
5.95
6.56
7.21
7.90
8.62
9.39
10.19
11.03
11.91
12.83
13.78
14.78
15.81
16.89
18.00
19.15
20.34
21.57
22.84
24.14
25.49
26.87
2829
2975
31.24
32.78
34.35
35.95
3760
39.28
40.99
42.74
3hr
1.00
1.17
1.37
1.57
1.80
2.05
2.31
260
2,90
3.22
356
3.92
4.30
4.70
5.12
5.55
6.01
6.49
6.98
7.49
803
8.58
9.15
9.74
10.34
10.97
1161
12.27
12.94
13.64
14.35
15.07
1582
1658
17.35
18.14
18.95
19.77
20.60
21.45
22.32
2320
24.09
25.00
25.92
8hr
1.00
1.15
1.31
1.48
1.66
1.86
2.06
2.28
2.51
2.75
3.00
3.26
3.53
3.81
4.10
4.40
4.71
5.03
5.36
5.70
6.04
6.40
6.76
7.14
7.52
7.91
8.30
8.71
9.12
9.54
9.97
1040
10.84
11.28
11.74
12.20
12.66
13.13
13.61
14.09
14.58
15.07
1557
16.07
16.57
1day
1 00
1.12
.25
.38
.52
67
.82
1.98
2.14
2.31
2.46
265
2.84
3.02
3.21
3.40
3.60
3.80
4.00
4.21
4.42
4.64
4.85
5.07
5.29
5.52
5.75
5.98
6.21
6.44
6.68
6.92
7.16
7.40
7.64
7.89
813
8.38
8.63
8.88
9.13
938
9.64
989
10.15
4 days
1.00
1.09
1.18
1.27
1.36
1.46
1.56
1.65
1.75
1.85
1.95.
2.05
2.15
2.26
2.36
2.46
2.57
2.67
2.77
2.88
2.98
3.09
3.19
3.30
3.40
3.51
3.61 .
372
3.82
3.93
4.03
4.13
4.24
4.34
4.44
4.5,5
4.65
4.75
4.86
4.96
5.06
5.16
5.26
5.36
5.46
1 mo
1.00
1.04
1.08
1.12
1.16
1.20
1.24
1.28
1.31
1.35
1.38
1.42
1.45
1.48
1 52
1.55
1.58
1.61
1.64
1.67
1.70
1.73
1.75
1.78
1.81
1.83
1.86
1.88
1.91
1.93
1.96
1 98
2.00
2.03
2.05
2.07
2.09
2.11
2.13
2.16
2.18
2.20
2.22
2.24
2.25
52
-------
Table 5-2 (Continued). RATIO OF EXPECTED ANNUAL MAXIMUM POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION TO ARITHMETIC MEAN CONCENTRATION FOR VARIOUS AVERAGING
TIMES AND STANDARD GEOMETRIC DEVIATIONS
Standard geometric deviation for
averaging times of:
1 sec
508
5.19
530
541
552
5.63
574
585
596
608
619
630
642
653
665
5 min
378
385
391
398
405
4 11
418
424
431
4.38
444
451
458
465
471
Ihr
325
330
335
340
345
350
355
360
365
370
375
380
385
390
395
3hr
302
306
311
3 15
3.19
324
328
332
337
341
345
350
354
358
363
8hr
281
285
289
293
297
300
304
308
3 12
315
319
323
327
330
334
1day
259
262
2.65
2.68
2.71
275
278
281
284
287
290
293
296
3.00
303
4 days
23t
2.32
2.35
237
239
242
244
247
249
2.52
254
256
259
261
263
1 mo
1 85
1 87
1 88
1 90
1 91
1 93
1 94
1 95
1 97
1.98
200
201
202
204
205
Ratio of annual maximum concentration to mean
concentration for averaging times of:
1 sec
2037.07
2209.73
2393 06
2587 45
2793 31
301 1 02
3241 01
3483 66
3739 39
4008 61
4291 72
4589 13
4901 25
5228 49
5571 26
5 min
141 87
14953
15743
16558
17397
18261
191 50
20063
21002
21965
22954
23967
25006
26070
271 59
Ihr
4453
4635
4820
5009
5201
5396
5595
5797
6002
6211
6422
6637
6855
7075
7299
3hr
2685
27 79
2875
2972
3071
3170
3271
3372
34 75
3579
3684
2790
3897
4005
41 14
8hr
17.09
1760
1812
18.65
19 17
1971
2024
2078
21 32
21 87
2242
2297
2353
2409
2465
1 day
1040
1066
1092
11 18
11 44
11 70
11 96
1222
1248
1274
13.00
1326
1353
1379
1405
4 days
556
566
576
586
596
605
615
625
634
644
653
663
672
682
691
1 mo
227
229
231
233
235
236
238
240
241
2.43
245
246
248
249
2.51
53
-------
6. PROJECTIONS OF DEMOGRAPHIC AND ECONOMIC INDICATORS BY SMSA
Table 6-1 presents the national projections of demographic and
economic indicators for the United States. These projections were taken
directly from Population and Economic Activity in the United States and
Standard Metropolitan Statistical Areas - Historical and Projected--
1950-2020, prepared by the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of
Economic Analysis (BEA) in July, 1972. Because of the large number of
SMSAs, the major users of this document (state air pollution control
agencies and EPA Regional Offices) received cooies of the projections for
the SMSAs located in their particular geographic areas of interest. If
the reader desires a copy of the projections for particular SMSAs, he
can request these from the representative responsible for matters con-
cerning maintenance of air quality standards in the appropriate EPA
Regional Office or the appropriate state air pollution control agency.
The BEA projection report is also located in U.S. Government depository
libraries under the GPO number EP 1.2:PS1/950-020.
This chapter also contains a list of states and the names of the
SMSAs located in each state (this list is of the SMSAs as of January 7,
1972, not the most current list), and a list of the SMSAs and the counties
which are contained within each SMSA (again, these are the SMSAs of
January 7, 1972)
Population and Economic Activity in the United States and Standard
Metropolitan Statistical Areas - Historical and Projected 1950-2020.
The U.S. Department of Commerce, Social and Economic Statistics
Administration, Bureau of Economic Analysis, Washington, D.C. GPO
Number EP 1.2.-P81/950-020. July 1972. 543 pages (may be purchased
from the Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C. 20402).
55
-------
UNITED STATFS TOTAL
Table 6-1.
POPULATION.
EMPLOYMENT. PFHSCNAL INCOME, AND EARNINGS BT INDUSTRY. HISTORICAL AND PWCJECTEO.
SELECTED »EARS, 1950 - 2O20
1950
1959
1971
2000
2020
POPULATION. MCYEAR
PER CAPtTA IKCOE (I96T1K
OCR CAPITA INCOME RELATIVE IUS'1.00)
TOTAL EMPLOYMENT
EMPLOYMENT/POPULATION RATIO
TOTAL PERSONAL INCOME •
IOT-.L EARNfNCS
AGRICULTURE. FORESTRY & FISHERIES
4GB I CULTURE
FORESTRY & FISHERIES
MINING
METAL
COAL
CRUDE PFTRGLEUT I NATURAL GAS
MONMETALLIC. EXCEPT FUELS
CONTRACT CONSTRUCTION
MANUFACTURING
FOCO 6 KINDRED PRODUCTS
TEXTILE* ""ILL PRODUCTS
Ul APPAREL I OIHfO FASH 1C PRODUCTS
O\ LUMBER PRODUCTS 6 FURNITURE
PAPER & ALLIED PRODUCTS
PRINTING (, PUBLISHING
CHEMICALS & ALLIED PRODUCTS
PETROLEUM RFFININi
PRIMARY PETALS
FABRICATED METALS I, ORDNANCE
MACHINERY. EXCLUDING ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL MACHINERY t SUPPLIES
TOTAL MACHINERY 11950 ONLYI
MOTOR VEHICLES & ECuIPMENT
TRANS. ECUIP., EXCL. MTR. VEHS.
OTHER MANUFACTURING
TRANS.. COPM. & PVBLIC UTILITIES
WHOLESALE & RETAIL TRACE
FINANCE. INSURANCE & REAL ESTATE
SERVICES
GOVERNMENT
CIVILIAN GOVERNMENT
ARMEC FORCES
ISI.8T1.000
2.06)
1.00
57.47*. 912
.18
I11.S69.016
258.7*7.759
JJ.S97.264
21.131.448
465.815
3.1*5.232
5*7.307
2. 28*. 452
1 .734.785
562.8*1
15.483.087
7*. 817, 598
g. 050. 358
5.090.329
4.533.807
4.7*9.61*
2.507.683
*. 237, 267
1.653.572
1.433.283
6.696.415
5.481.271
11.872. 190
4.6IA.238
2.629.937
9.151.692
21.131.028
48.9J9.6U
10.911.2)4
28.904.J44
29. 818.158
23.910.883
5. 887.*75
177.124.000
2.4*1
1.00
66.172.6*9
.37
,
412,1*9.206
155.766.60*
17.0*2.151)
I6.ft91.115
351.021
5.1*9.26*
645.480
1.260.481
2.157.008
885.796
21.852.640
IO7.25S.071
10.570.806
«. 2*1. 7*7
4.995.059
5.222.119
1.896.797
6.0*6.717
6.198.112
1.8)5.808
9.141,450
9.099.187
10.651.411
9.394.820
5.167.607
7.572.118
13. 014, 674
27.192.019
61.499,623
IB. 109. 611
45.2*4.956
»O. 221. 0*0
40-409.800
9,811.2*0
199.793.000
3.104
1.00
660.045.911
529.659.95?
18.415.005
18.111.177
281. 82«
S.274,946
7U.22J
1.182.615
2.449.220
921.808
31.676.705
155.607.01*
12.576.266
5.180.17*
6.775.178
6.69'.94i
5.409.171
8. 257. 066
9.672.34]
2.405.777
12.273.UO
14.058.155
17.«24.50*
15.285.178
10.170.327
11. 00*. 595
18.018.226
16.552.9*0
87.077.150
2T.TI9.8O*
TT. 2*5. 516
90.070.855
74.970.068
15.100.787
2O1.791.00C
J.466
l.OC
IN TnOUSAKCS
7 Oe.. 33. .032
560.322.137
18.5*9.767
IB. 276. 1*4
273.623
5.819.015
87H.776
1.4)9.282
2.592.123
908.83*
34.1*9.356
155.664.386
11.057.862
5.306.2*8
6.*76.77C
6.537.772
5.637.776
8.829.307
10.204.935
2.519.078
12.299.121
13.512.701
ID. 001. -05
15. 48*. 661
7.961.916
11.275.556
18.517,056
19.713.207
93.266.90*
29.160.297
85. 17*. 919
99.104.48*
84.120.212
1*. 984. 272
218. 629. TOO
».1C5
1.00
OF 1967 I
897. 199 .600
714.962,500
19,940,800
19,600.500
111 .7CO
6.368.700
892 ,6OO
l,50d.4CO
2.841,100
1.122. 900
43.261.100
201.011.000
15.015.000
6.529.500
8.250.500
8.181.600
T, 159. 600
10.879.200
12.990.600
2.870,700
14.599,100
18.8*2.200
21. 116. <-00
21.124.500
12.0*6.400
15.025,000
23. 96-, 600
47.666.400
119.099.40O
16.776,100
111.912.700
127.857.800
110.135.800
17.191.800
2 14.208. 000
4.765
I. 00
91.B20.0OO
.40
1.I15.89R.300
881.560.000
19.855.100
19.**9.200
4O6.100
7.2R4.1OO
970.100
1.755.000
1.210.200
1.1*8.800
52. 480.600
240.19i.JOO
17.114.700
7.536.000
9.704.300
9. O1.000
8.699.5OO
13.0S0.10O
16.041.000
1.234.200
16.171.70O
21.174.500
27,852.400
27.0*0.100
15.187.500
17.101.800
29.175.000
96.816.900
1*8.561.600
45.110.800
1*5.219.500
165.229.JOO
1*6.178.400
18.850.800
251.J55.700
5.420
1.00
1O0.155.00O
.40
1.162.435.800
1.070.861.900
20.704:000
20.236.500
*65.)00
7.96.1.800
1.089.200
1.871.800
1.452.200
1.550.000
61.7*1.700
285,86.. 800
19,2*9.500
8. 5**. 500
11.1*2.900
10.797.800
10.431.900
15.612.300
19.*46.900
1.634.000
17.9)2.700
28.402.500
13.167.JOO
31.611.500
17.892.600
20.577.100
35.065.500
67.416.000
ISO. 821.400
5*.185.OOO
182.751.700
206. 6O 1.000
185.024.700
21.472.200
269.759.0in
6.16t
l.OR
106.91 7. fOC
.40
l.663««JV.3CC
1.1O0.804.20C
2i.saa.->cr
21.055.500
533. ICO
B.713.20C
1.221.00C
I. 996. *00
1.712.500
1.781.300
77.*10.20C
139.090.700
21.625.200
/. 689. 001
42.795.100
12.127.300
12.509.200
18.634.600
23.575,900
4.083.100
19. 882. HOC
34.512.100
39.973.900
41.784.900
21.O79.50C
24.472.80C
42.1*5.300
80.019.100
22o.oao.aoo
65.565.700
229.988.500
258.331.700
233.873.700
24.458.000
1O6.782.00C
8.289
l.OC
124.641.000
.41
2.5»i.«»').5OC
1.97C.738.60C
25.493.3OC
24.78..0OC
709,1011
10.7I0.80C
1.575.100
2. lie. *00
4.162. JOO
2.4*2.500
117.117.60C
492.557.40C
28.070.90C
12.84J.30C
17.4l3.30C
16.5eb.oOC
18.536.20C
27.381.100
35.595.50C
5, 299. IOC
25.017.40C
52.1C0.10C
59.115.40C
65.708.700
10.217.800
15.712.800
62.699.80C
116.J98.00C
135.48I.20C
98.040.200
168.579.200
406.360.00C
174.582.20C
31.777.700
199.013.0OC
14.260
1.00
16J.622.00C
.41
5t69t:.073,.OO
4.347.216.OOO
44, .57.5OO
43.2*1.400
1.216.100
16.013.5OO
2.606.10O
3.09..7OO
5.751.2OO
4.56I.4OO
256.404.0OC
l.O20,<;C-.:3C
47. 001, ,30
22. 501.c,00
32.314.900
30.017,000
39. 616. 900
57.774.500
78.190.500
8. 905.40O
39. 051. BOO
115.375.20O
125,8*4,600
153.810.10O
61.292.500
74.542.10O
134.663.103
2*1.305.600
7*6. »67. BOO
212.159.200
876.784,700
932.716.100
879.295.900
$3.420.200
-------
Table 6-2 lists SMSAs alphabetically by states. Table 6-3 lists the
Standard Metropolitan Statistical Areas and indicates the constituent
counties as of January 7, 1972. The projections of demographic and eco-
nomic indicators, done by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), Depart-
ment >of Commerce, were mac* on the basis of SMSAs as they were defined
as of January 7, 1972.
The following SMSA designation differs from the official designation
of the Office of Management and Budget in one respect: SMSAs in the
New England States are officially defined on a township, rather than a
county basis; BEA projections for these New England SMSAs, however, are
based upon geographic areas which are defined on a whole-county basis.
Thus, for example, the Fitchburg-Leominster, Mass. SMSA and the
Worcester, Mass., SMSA are combined in the BEA projections into one area,
Worcester County, even though the Fitchburg-Leominster SMSA officially
includes several townships from another county (Middlesex), and portions
of Worcester County are not officially located in either SMSA.
57
-------
Table 6-2. SMSAs LISTED ALPHABETICALLY BY STATE
STATE
B.E.A SMSA COOC AND TITLE
INDEX OF TABLES
SNSA'S LISTED ALPHABETICALLY BY STATE
PAGE STATE B.E.A SMSA CODE AND TITLE
PAGE
ALABAMA
CONNECTICUT
ALASKA
ARIZONA
32) BIRMINGHAM, ALA.
34) COLUMBUS. GA.-ALA.
595 FLORENCE. ALA.
370 GADSOENt ALA.
384 HUNTSVILLE. ALA.
424 MOBILE. ALA.
426 MONTGOMERY, ALA.
509 TUSCALOOSA, ALA.
531 ANCHORAGE, ALASKA
450 PHOENIX, AR|2.
506 TUCSON. ARI2,
ARKANSAS
366 FORT SMITH, AftK.-OK.LA.
1,01 LITTLE COCK.NO^IH LITTLE ROCK. ARK.
418 MtMPHlS, TENN.-ARK.
451 PINE BLUFF, ARK.
501 UXARKANA, TEX..ARK,
CALIFORNIA
308 ANAHEIM.SANTA ANA-GARDEN GROVE. CALIF.
316 BAKERSFUIO. CALIF.
369 FPESNU. CALIF.
409 LOS ANGfLCS-LOMG BEACH. CALIF.
542 MODESTO. CALIF.
«45 OXNARO-SIM1 VALLEY-VENTURA, CALIF.
«T6 MivERsiut.sAN BERNAOINO.ONTARIO, CALIF.
461 SACRAMENTO, CALIF.
533 SALINAS.SC.ASIDE.MONTERCY. CALIF,
477 SAN DlCfall, (.ALIF. .
478 SAN FRANCISCO-OAKLAND, CALIF.
474 SAN JOSt, CALIF.
481 SANTA 8APBAKA.SANTA MARIA-LOMPOC. CALIF,
965 SANTA CPU,!, CALIF.
44ft SANTA ROSA, CALIF.
496 STOCKTON. CALIF.
511 VALLEJO-FAIRFULO-NAPA. CALIF.
72
118
164
178
210
296
304
412
36
354
476
I/O
262
2KB
396
470
34
S4
1/6
2b»
300
340
386
396
406
414
4)6
418
440
422
424
498
488
932
931
933
BRIDGfcPORT-NOR*ALK-STAMFORD. CONN.
HAHTFORb-HtH aHITAlN. CONN.
NEK HAVEN.WAURBURV-MEAIDEN, CONN.
NORWICH-GRGTON-NEW LOMOON, COM.
DELAWARE
D. C.
FLORIDA
GEORGIA
HAWAII
921 WILMINGTON, DEL.-N.J.'ND.
913 WASHINGTON, D.C.-MO.-VA.
553 DAVTONA BEACH, FLA.
369 FORT LAUOEHOALE-HOLLYWOOOt FLA,
556 FORT MYtRS. FLA.
940 GAINESVILLE, FLA.
388 JACKSONVILLE, FLA.
599 LAKELAND»NlNTER HAVEN. FLA.
571 MELBOURNE.TITUSVILLE-COCOA, FLA.
420 MIAMI, FLA.
444 ORLANDO. FLA.
447 PENSACOLA, FLA.
567 SARASOTA. FLA,
499 TALLAHASSEE. FLA.
500 TAMPA.ST. PETERSBURG. FLA.
516 WEST PALM BEACH, FLA.
302 ALBANY, GA.
312 ATLANTA, GA,
314 AUGUSTA, bA.-S.C.
337 CHATTANOOGA, TENN.-GA.
343 COLUMBUSi GA..ALA.
414 MACON, GA.
482 SAVANNAH, GA.
381 HONOLULU. HAWAII
80
202
314
326
310
494
130
166
168
ieo
218
242
286
290
336
346
426
464
466
448
20
46
50
102
118
276
428
204
COLORADO
34| COLORADO SPRINGS, COLO.
350 UENVER, COLO.
459 PUEBLO. CULO.
112
11*
372
IDAHO
325 BOISE CITY, IDAHO
ILLINOIS
324 BLOOM1NGTON.NOHMAL. ILL.
58
-------
Table 6-2 (Continued).
STATE B.C.* SMS* CODE AND TITLE
ILLINOIS CONTINUED
393 CHANPAI&N.UR8ANA, ILL.
338 CHICAGO. ILL.
347 DAVENPORT.ROCK 1SLANO-MOLINE. IOWA-ILL.
3*9 DECATUH. ILL.
»»• PEORlAi ILL.
467 ROCKFORD, ILL.
471 ST. LOUIS. MO.>ILL.
4»0 SPRINGFIELD, ILL.
PAGE
9*
106
126
132
3*8
39*
402
448
STATE
LOUISIANA
MAINE
B.E.A SMS* CODE AND TITLE
CONTINUED
485 SHREVEPORTi LA.
PAGE
4*0
439
LEWISTON-AU8URN, MAINE
PORTLAND-SOUTH PORTLAND. MAINE
254
362
INDIAN/.
I OK A
KANSAS
309 ANDERSON. IHD. 31
3)9 CINCINNATI. OHIO-KIT.-INO. 108
359 EVANbVILLE, INU.-KY. 154
367 FORT WAYNE. INO. 172
372 GAHY-HAMMOND-EAST CHICAGO, INU, 184
383 INDIANAPOLIS, INO. 212
529 LAFAYETTE-NEST LAFAYETTE, INO. 2,38
410 LOUISVILLE. KY..INO. 270
427 MUNCIE, IND. 306
488 SOUTH BEND. INO. 442
SOI TERRE HAUTE. INO. 468
332 CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 92
347 DAVENPORT-ROCK ISLANO.MOLINE. IOWA-ILL. 126
351 DES M01NES, IOWA 136
353 DUBUUUE. IOWA 140
443 OMAHA. NEBR.-IOWA 334
486 SIOUI CITY, IUWA-NEBR. 438
515 WATERLOO. IOWA 496
392 KANSAS CITY, MO..KANS. 226
504 TOPEKA, KANS. 474
S18 WICHITA, KANS. 502
MARYLAND
317 BALTIMORE. MO.
513 WASHINGTON, D.C.'MO.'VA.
521 WILMINGTON, DEL.-N.J.-MD.
MASSACHUSETTS
934
935
936
937
938
MICHIGAN
BOSTON, MASS.
FALL RIVER-NEW BEDFORD. MASS.
PITTSFIILD. MASS.
SPRINGF|ELD-CHlCOPEE-HOLYOKE. MASS.
WORCESUR-FITCMSURG-LEOMlNSTEIi, MASS.
310 ANN ARBOR, MICH.
552 BATTLE CREEK, MICH.
319 BAY CITY. MICH.
352 DETROIT. MICH.
364 FLINT, MICH.
37) GRAND RAPIOS, MICH.
386 JACKSON. MICH.
391 KALAMAZOO. MICH.
398 LANSINb-EASr LANSING, MICH.
428 MUSKtGOS-MUSKEGON HEIGHTS, MICH,
469 SAGINAW, MICH.
503 TOLEDO, OHIO-MICH.
56
494
510
78
156
360
454
514
40
60
62
133
162
18b
214
224
246
30B
398
472
KENTUCKY
MINNESOTA
339 CINCINNATI, OHIO-KY.-IND.
359 EVANSVILLE. INU.-KY.
383 HUNTINGTON-ASHLAND, H.VA..KY.-OHIO
404 LEXINGTON, KY.
410 LOUISVILLE, KY.-IND.
543 OWENSBORO. KY.
ioa
154
208
256
270
338
354 OULUTN.bUPtKluR, MINN.-WIS,
361 FAROO.MOORtMtAO. N.DAK.-MINN.
423 MINNEAPOLIS-M. PAUL, MINN.
545 ROCHESTER, MINN.
142
158
296
390
MISSISSIPPI
LOUISIANA
351
318
395
396
423
434
ALEXANDRIA, LA.
BATON ROUGE, LA.
LAFAYEITE. LA.
LAKE CHAHLES, LA.
MONROE, LA.
NEW ORLEANS. LA.
26
58
236
2.0
302
316
MISSOURI
535 BILO«I-C>ULFPORT. MISS.
387 JACKSON, MISS.
539 COLUMBIA, MO.
68
216
114
59
-------
Table 6-2 (Continued).
JTATE B.E.A SHSA CODE AND TITLE
MISSOURI CONTINUED
392 KANSAS CITY. MO.-KANS,
470 ST, JOSEPH, MO.
471 ST. LOUIS, MO.-ILL.
491 SPRINGFIELD. MO.
PAGE STATE B.E.A SMS* CODE AND TITLE
NEW YORK CONTINUED
«6 563 POUGHKEIPSIE, N.Y.
*00 »6i ROCHESTER, N.Y.
*02 »97 SYRACUSE. N.Y.
*SO 510 UTICA.ROME, N.Y.
PAGE
366
392
460
466
MONTANA
NEBRASKA
NORTH CAROLINA
321
JT4
BILLINGS. MONT.
GREAT FALLS. MONT.
406 LINCOLN. NEBR.
443 OMAHA, NEBH.'IOWA
466 SIOUX CITY, IOWA-NEBR.
NEVADA
400
463
LAS VEGAS,
RENO. NEV.
NEV.
NEW HAMPSHIRE
941 MANCHESTER, N.H.
NEW JERSEY
309 ALLENTOWN-BETHLEHEM.EASTON. PA..N.J.
313 ATLANTIC CITY. N.J.
369 JERSEY CITY, N.J.
560 LONG BRANCH.ASBURY PARK, N.J.
561 NEW BRUNSWICK.PERTH AMBOY.SAVREVILLEl N.J.
436 NEWARK. N.J.
446 PA1ERSON.CLIFTON-PASSAIC. N.J.
449 PHILADELPHIA. PA..N.J.
505 TRENTON, N.J.
536 VINELAND.M1LLVILLE.BR10GETON. N.J.
521 WILMINGTON, DEL..N.J.-MD.
MEN MEXICO
304 ALBUQUERQUE, N.MEX.
66
190
260
334
438
250
380
280
28
48
220
264
312
320
344
352
476
490
510
24
311 ASHEVILLE. N.C.
336 CHARLOTTE, N.C.
355 DURHAM, N.C.
362 FAYETTEVILLE. N.C.
557 GASTONIA, N.C.
376 GREENSBORQ-WINSTON-SALEM.HIGH POINT,N.C.
461 RALEIGH, N.C.
522 WILMINGTON, N.C.
NORTH DAKOTA
361 .FARGO.MOOREHEAD, N.DAK..MINN,
OHIO
OKLAHOMA
301 AKRON, OHIO
331 CANTON, OHIO
339 CINCINNATI, OHlO'KY..)ND.
340 CLEVELAND. OHIO
344 COLUMBUS. OHIO
348 OAVTON. OHIO
378 HAMILTON-MIODLETOWN, OHIO
383 HUNTlNGTON.ASHLAND. W.VA.>KY..OHIO
405 LIMA. OHIO
408 LOHAIN-ELYK1A. OHIO
530 MANSFIELD. OHIO
562 PARKEHSBURG-MAHIETTA, W.VA.-OHIO
492 SPRINGFIELD, OHIO
495 STEUBENVILLE.WEIRTON, OHIO-W.VA.
503 TOLEDO, OHIO-MICH.
517 WHEELING, W.VA..OHIO
526 YOUNGiTOWN-WARREN. OHIO
366 FORT SMITH, ARK..QKLA.
402 LAMON, OKLA.
4*2 OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLA.
507 TULSA, OKLA.
44
100
144
160
186
194
376
512
1*8
18
90
108
110
120
128
198
208
258
266
282
3*2
452
456
472
500
520
170
152
312
480
NEW YORK
OREGON
303 ALBANY.SCHENECTADY-TROY, N.
322 BINGHAMTON. N.V..PA.
330 BUFFALO. N.V.
554 ELMIRA, N.V.
435 NEW YORK, N.V.
22
70
86
148
318
358 EUGENL-SPKINGfIELO* ORES.
456 PORTLAND, UKEG.-WASH.
472 SALEM. OREG.
152
J64
404
60
-------
Table 6-2 (Continued).
STATE
B.E.A SHSA CODE AND TITLC
PACE
STAU
B.E.A SMSA CODE AND TITLE
PAGE
PENNSYLVANIA
109 ALLENTOWN-BETHLEHtM.EASTON. PA..N.J
J06 AL'TOONA, PA.
ill BJNGHAMTON. N.Y..PA.
357 ERIE. PA.
379 HARR1SBUR6. P».
190 JOHNSTOWN, PA.
til LANCASTER, PA.
444 PHILADELPHIA. PA.-N.J.
452 PITTSBURGH, PA.
462 READING. PA.
483 SCRANTON. PA.
520 WILKES-6AHRE.HA2LETON, PA.
969 HILLIAMSPOOT, PA.
S2S YO«K, PA.
RHODE ISLAND
942 PROVIDENCE-PAHTUCUT-WARWICK. R.I.
TfXAS
28
30
70
ISO
200
422
244
352
196
178
410
906
508
168
UTAH
CONTINUED
421 MIDLAND, TEX.
»*0 ODESSA, TLX.
<,7* SAN ANGELOi TEX.
«7S SAN ANTONIO, TEX.
53* SNERMAN-DtNISUN, TEX.
502 TEXARKANA, TEX. .ARK.
S09 TYLEO, UX.
912 HACOt TEX.
919 WICHITA fALLS. TEX.
»»l OGDEN, UTAH
458 PPOVO-OREM. UTAH
»71 SALT LAKE CITY. UTAH
292
328
410
412
434
470
484
492
904
330
170
408
VCRNONT
SOUTH CAROLINA
114 AUGUST*. GA..S.C.
13* CHARLESTON, s.c.
302 COLUMBIA. i.C.
377 GREENVILLE) S.C.
568 SPARTANBUNG, J.C.
SOUTH DAKOTA
487 SIOUX FALLS, S.DAK.
SO
96
116
196
444
440
VIRGINIA
92T BURLINGTON. VT.
«13 LYNCHBURb, VA.
437 NfhPORT NENS-HAMPTON. VA.
Oft NORFOLK-PORTSMOUTH, VA.
9*4 PETERSBuftG-HUPENELL, VA.
464 RICHMOND, VA.
465 HOANOUE, VA.
911 WASHINGTON. D.C.-MD..VA.
88
274
322
324
390
384
388
494
TENNESSEE
WASHINGTON
337 CHATTANOOGA, TENN.-GA,
194 KNOXVILLE. TENN.
418 MEMPHIS. TtNN.-ARK.
429 NASHVILLE. TENN.
102
232
288
310
456 PORTLAND, ONEG..WASH.
564 R|CHLAN,U>KtNNe*lOU HASH.
484 SEATTLE.EvtRETI. HASH.
489 SPOKANE, NASH.
498 TACOMA. HASH.
970 YAK|HA, HASH.
164
382
432
446
462
916
TEXAS
300 ABILENE, TEX. 16
307 AMARILLO. lt«. 32
119 Al/STIS. TtX. 52
320 BEAUMONT-PUNT ARTHUR.ORANGE, IEX. 64
329 UROWNSV1LLE-HARLIN6EN.SAN 6ENITO. TEX. 82
538 BRYAN.COLLEGE STATlUN, TEX. 84
345 CORPUS CHRIST I, TEX. 122
346 DALLAS, TtX. 124
356 EL PA!>0. TtX. 146
368 FORT WUPTH, TE«. 174
3M QALVESTON.TEXAS CITY. TEX. 182
382 hot5IONi TtX. 206
558 KILLEEN.TtMPLE, TEX. 230
399 LAREDO. TtX. 248
•12 LUBBOCK. TtX. 272
932 MCALLEN.PHARR.tDlNHURG, TEX. 284
NEST VIRGINIA
339
383
562
495
517
CHARLESTON, k.VA.
HUNT INGTON-ASHLAND, H.VA..KY..OHIO
PARKERSBURO.MARIETTA. H.VA..QHIO
STEUBENVlLLE'HEIRTON. OHIO'H.VA.
WHEEL I NO. H.VA..OHIO
WISCONSIN
537 APPLETON.OSHKOSH. HIS.
194 OULUtH.SUPERIOH, MINN..HIS.
175 GREEN BAY, Hlb.
193 KCNOSHA, HIS.
18
208
342
496
500
42
142
192
228
61
-------
Table 6-2 (Continued).
STATE B.C.* SMS* CODE AND TITLE PACE
WISCONSIN CONTINUED
5*1 LA CROSSE. WIS. 23*
»15 MADISON, WIS. 278
422 MILWAUKEE! WlS. 29*
460 RACINE. WIS. 37*
WYOMING
528 CHEYENNE• WVO. 10*
62
-------
Table 6-3. COUNTY COMPOSITION OF SMSAs LISTED IN BEA CODE NUMBER ORDER
JOO ABILENE* TEX.
313 ATLANTIC CITY. N.J.
301
302
303
304
309
306
307
308
309
310
311
JONES
TAYLOR
AKRON* OHIO
PORTAGE
SUMMIT
ALBANY* GA.
DOUGHERTY
ALBANY-SCHENECTADV-TROY, N.Y.
ALBANY
RENSSELAER
SARATOGA
SCHENECTADY
ALBUQUERQUE* N.M.
BERNALILLO
ALUNTOWN-BETHLEHEM-EASTON, PA,
WARREN
LEH1GH
NORTHAMPTON
ALTOONA, PA,
BLAIR
AMARILLO* TEX.
POTTER
RANDALL
ANAHEIM-SANTA ANA-GARDEN GROVE,
ORANGE
ANDERSON, INO.
MADISON
ANN ARBOR* MICH.
WASHTENAW
ASHEVILLE. N.C.
TEX.
TEX.
OHIO
OHIO
GA.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
314
315
916
317
ATLANTIC
AUGUSTA* GA.-S.C.
AIKEN
RICHMOND
AUSTIN* TEX.
TRAVIS
BAKERSF1ELD. CAL.
KERN
BALTIMORE* MD.
ANNE ARUNDEL
BALTIMORE
N.J.
S.C.
GA.
TEX.
CAL.
MD.
MD.
BALTIMORE (INDEPENDENT CITY) MD.
N.M.
-N.J.
N.J.
PA.
PA.
PA.
TEX.
TEX.
CAL.
CAL.
IND.
MICH.
318
319
320
321
322
323
CARROLL
HARFORD
HOWARD
BATON ROUGE, LA.
EAST BATON ROUGE
BAY CITY. MJCHr
BAY
BEAUMONT-PORT ARTHUR-ORANGE,
JEFFERSON
ORANGE
BILLINGS, MONT.
YELLOWSTONE
BINGHAMTON. N.Y. -PA.
BPOOME
TIOGA
SUSOUEHANNA
BIRMINGHAM, ALA.
JEFFERSON
SHELBY
WALKER
MD.
•MD.
MD.
LA.
MICH,
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
MONT,
N.Y.
N.Y,
PA.
ALA.
ALA.
ALA.
BUNCOMBE
312 ATLANTA, GA.
CLAYTON
COBB
GWINETT
OEKALB • FULTON
N.C.
GA.
GA.
GA.
GA.
324 BLOOMJNGTON-NORMAL, ILL.
MCLEAN
ILL,
63
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
325 BOISE Q&TY. IDA.
ADA
329 BROWMSVILLE.HARLINGEN.SAN BFNITO, TEX.
CAMERON ,
330 BUFFALO, N.Y.
EPIE
OHIO
331 CANTON. OHIO
STARK
IDA.
>t TEX.
TEX.
N.Y.
N.Y.
BOONE
CAMPBELL
KENTON
340 CLEVELAND* OHIO
CUYAHQGA
GEAUGA
LAKE
MEDINA
341 COLORADO SPRINGS, COLO.
KY.
KY.
KY.
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
EL PASO
342 COLUMBIA! S.C.
COLO.
332
333
334
33J
336
337
338
339
CEDAR RAPIDS, IA.
LINN
CHAMPAIGN-UPBANA. ILL.
CHAMPA i (IN
CHARLESTON, S.C.
BERKELEY
CHARLESTON
CHARLESTON, W.VA.
FAYETTE
KANAWHA
CHARLOTTE, N.C.
MECKLENBURG
UNION
CHATTANOOGA, TENN.-GA.
HAMILTON
WALKER
CHICAGO, ILL.
LAKE
COOK
DU PAGE
KANE
LAKE
MCHENRY
WILL
CINCINNATI, OHIO-KY.-1NU.
CLERMONT
HAMILTON
WARREN
DFARbORN
IOWA
ILL.
S.C.
S.C.
W.VA.
W.VA.
N.C.
N.Ct
TENN.
GA»
INDt
ILL.
ILL.
ILL.
ILL.
ILL.
ILL.
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
IND.
LEXINGTON
RICHLAND
343 COLUMBUS, GA.-ALA.
CHATTAHOOCHEE
MUSCOGEE
RUSSELL
344 COLUMBUS, OHIO
DELAWARE
FRANKLIN
PICKAWAY
345 CORPUS CHRISTI* TEX.
NUECES
SAN PATRK10
3*6 DALLAS, TEX.
COLL IN
DALLAS
DENTON
ELLIS
KAUFMAN
ROCKWALL
347 DAVENPORT-ROCK ISLAND-MOLINE*
HENRY
ROCK ISLAND
SCOTT
348 DAYTON. OHIO
GREENE
MIAMI
MONTGOMERY
PREBLE
349 DECATUR, ILL.
MACON
S.C.
S.C.
GA.
GA, '
ALA.
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
IA.-ILL.
ILL.
ILL.
IOWA
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
ILL.
64
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
950 DENVER« COLO.
364 FLINT* MICH.
951
952
953
95*
355
956
957
358
359
Ml
362
ADAMS
ARAPAHOE
BOULDER
DENVER
JEFFERSON
DES KOINES. IA.
POL*
DETROIT, MICH.
MACOMB
OAKLAND
WAYNE
DUBUQUE, I A.
OUBUOUE
DULUTH-SUPERIOR, MJNN.-WISC.
DOUGLAS
ST. UJUIS
DURHAM, N.C.
DURHAM
ORANGE
EL PASO, TEX.
EL PASO
ERIE, PA.
ERIE
EUGENE-SPRINGFIELD. ORE.
LANE
EVANSVILLE, IND.-KY.
VANDERBURGH
WARRICK
HENDERSON
FAR60»MOORHFAD, N.D.-MlNN.
CLAY
CASS
FAYETTEVILLE, N.C.
CUMBERLAND
COLO.
COLO.
COLO.
COLO.
COLO.
IOWA
MICH.
MICH.
MICH.
IOWA
MISC.
MINN.
N.C.
N.C.
TEX.
PA,
ORE.
IND.
IND.
KY.
MINN.
N.D.
N.C.
GENESEE
LAPEER
965 FORT LAUDERDALE-HOLLYWOOD, FLA.
BROWARD
966 FORT SMITH, ARK.-OKLA.
CRAWFORD
SEBASTIAN
LE FLORE
SEOUOYAH
967 FORT WAYNE, IND.
ALLEN
968 FORT WORTH, TEX.
JOHNSON
T ARRANT
369 FRESNO, CAL.
FRESNO
970 GADSDEN, ALA.
ETOWAH
371 GALVESTON-TEXA5 CITY, T£X.
GALVESTON
972 GARY-HAMMOND-EAST CHICAGO, IND.
LAKE
PORTER
373 GRAND RAPIDS, MICH,
KENT
OTTAWA
374 GREAT FALLS, MONT.
CASCADE
97$ GREEN BAY, W]SC.
BROWN
MICH.
MICH.
FLA.
ARK.
ARK.
OKLA.
OKLA.
IND.
TEX.
TEX.
CAL.
ALA.
TEX.
IND.
IND.
MICH.
MICH.
MONT.
wise.
976 GREENSBORO-WINSTON-SALEM-HIGH POINT, N
FORSYTH
GUILFORD
RANDOLPH
YADKIN
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
65
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
377 GREENVILLE. S.C.
GREENVILLE
PICKENS
378 HAM1LTON.MIDDLETOVIN, OHIO
BUTLER
379 HARRI56URG, PA.
S.C.
S.C,
OHIO
388 JACKSONVILLE. FLA.
DUVAL
389 JERSEY CITY, N.J.
HUDSON
390 JOHNSTOWN. PA.
381 HONOLULU, HAWAII
HONOLULU
362
HAWAII
KALAMAZOO
392 KANSAS CITY, HO.-KAN.
383
384
385
386
387
FLA.
N.J.
CUMBERLAND
DAUPHIN
PERRY
PA.
PA.
PA.
CAMBRIA
SOMERSET
PA.
PA.
MICH.
HOUSTON, TEX.
BRAZORIA
FORT BEND
HARRIS
LIBERTY
MONTGOMERY
HUNTINGTON-ASHLAND,
LAWRENCE
CABELL
WAYNE
BOYD
HUNTSVILLE, ALA.
LIMESTONE
MADISON
INDIANAPOLIS. IND.
BOONE
HAMILTON
HANCOCK
HENDRICKS
JOHNSON
MARION
MORGAN
SHELBY
JACKSON, MICH.
JACKSON
JACKSON, MISS.
HINDS
RANK IN
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
TEX.
W.VA.-KV.-OHIO
OHIO
W.VA.
W.VA.
KY»
ALA.
ALA.
IND.
IND.
IND.
IND.
IND.
IND.
IND.
IND.
MICH,
MISS.
MISS.
CASS
CLAY
JACKSON
PLATTE
JOHNSON
WYANDOTTE
393 KENOSHA, WJSC.
KENOSHA
39* KNOXVILLE. TENN.
ANDERSON
BLOUNT
KNOX
395 LAFAYETTE* LA,
LAFAYETTE
396 LAKE CHARLES, LA.
CALCASIEU
397 LANCASTER* PA.
LANCASTER
398 LANSING-EAST LANSING, MICH.
CLINTON
EATON
INCH AM
399 LAREDO, TEX.
MO.
MO.
MO.
MO.
KAN.
KAN.
wise.
TENN.
TENN.
TENN.
LA.
LA.
PA.
MICH.
MICH.
MICH.
WEBB
TEX.
66
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
400 LAS VEGASt NEV.
CLARK
402 LAWTONi OKLA.
COMANCHE
404
KY.
FAYETTE
NEV.
OKLA.
KY.
409 LIMA, OHIO
418 MEMPHIS* TENN.-ARK.
SHELBY
CRITTENDEN
420 MIAMIi FLA.
OADE
421 MIDLAND, TEX.
MIDLAND
422 MILWAUKEE, WISC.
TENN,
ARK.
FLA.
TEX.
406
407
408
409
410
412
413
414
415
ALLEN
PUTNAM
VAN WERT
LINCOLN, NEB.
LANCASTER
LITTLE ROCK-NORTH LITTLE ROCK,
PULASKI
SALINE
LORAIN-ELYRIA, OHIO
LORAIN
LOS ANGELES-LONG BEACH, CAL.
LOS ANGELES
ORANGE
LOUISVILLE, KY.-IND,
CLARK
FLOYD
JEFFERSON
LUBBOCK, TEX.
LUBBOCK
LVNCHBURG. VA.
AMHERST
CAMPBELL
MACON, GA.
BJBB
HOUSTON
MADISON, MISC.
DANE
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
NEB.
ARK.
ARK.
ARK.
OHIO
CAL.
CAL.
IND.
IND.
KY.
TEX.
VA.
VA.
GA.
GA.
WISC.
MILWAUKEE
OZAUKEE
WASHINGTON
WAUKESHA
423 MINNEAPOLIS-ST* PAUL, MINN,
ANQKA
DAKOTA
HENNEPIN
RAMSEY
WASHINGTON
424 MOBlLEt ALA.
BALDWIN
MOBILE
425 MONROE, LA.
OUACHITA
426 MONTGOMERY, ALA.
ELMORE
MONTGOMERY
427 MUNCIE, IND.
DELAWARE
428 MUSKEGON-MUSKEGON HEIGHTS*
MUSKEGON
429 NASHVILLE, TENN.
DAVIDSON
SUMNER
WILSON
434 NEW ORLEANS, LA.
JEPFtRSON
ORLEANS
ST. BERNARD
ST. TAMMANY
wise.
wise.
WISC.
WISC.
»
MINN.
MINN.
rflNN.
MINN.
MINN.
ALA.
ALA.
LA.
ALA.
ALA.
INC.
MICH.
MICH.
TENN.
'TENN,
TENN.
LA.
LA.
LA.
LA.
67
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
NEW YORK, N.V.
446 PATERSON-CLIFTON-PASSAIC, N.J*
NASSAU
ROCKLAND
SUFFOLK
WCSKHESTFR
NEW YORK CITY (5 BOKOUGHS)
BERGEN
ESSEX
HUDSON
MIDDLESEX
MORRIS
PASSAIC
SOMERSET
UNION
436 NEWARK, N.J.
ESSEX
MORRIS
UNION
437 NEWPORT NEWS-HAMPTON. VA.
YORK
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
VA.
BERGEN
PASSAIC
447 PENSACOLAt FLA.
ESCAM8IA
SANTA ROSA
448 PEORIA, ILL.
PEOHIA
TAZEWELL
WOODFORD
449 PHILADELPHIA* PA. •N.J.
t
BURLINGTON
CAMOEN
GLOUCESTER
BUCKS
CHESTER
DELAWARE
MONTGOMERY
PHILADELPHIA
N.J.
N.J*
FLA.
FLA.
ILL.
ILL.
ILL.
N.J.
N.J.
N.J.
PA.
PA.
PA.
PA.
PA.
438 NORFOLK-VIRGINIA BEACH-PORTSMOUTH, VA.
CHESAPEAKE CITY
VIRGINIA BEACH
440 ODESSA. TEX.
ECTOR
441 OGDEN, UTAH
WEBER
VA,.
VA.
TEX.
UTAH
450 PHOENIX, ARIZ.
MAR ICOPA
491 PINE BLUFF, ARK.
JEFFERSON
452 PITTSBURGH, PA.
445 QXNAPO-SlMt VALLEY-VENTURA, CALIF.
VENTURA CAL.
PUEBLO
460 RACINE. MISC.
RACINE
ARIZ.
ARK*
OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLA.
CANADIAN
CLEVELAND
OKLAHOMA
OMAHA, NEU.-IA.
POTTAWATTAMlt
DOUGLAS
SARPY
ORLANDO, FLA.
OPAN&t
SEMINOLE
OKLA.
OKLA.
OKLA.
IOWA
NEP.
NEB.
FLA.
FLA.
ALLEGHENY
BEAVER
WASHINGTON
WESTMORELAND
456 PORTLAND, ORE. -WASH.
CLARK
CLACKAMAS
MULTNOMAH
WASHINGTON
496 PROVO-OREM, UTAH
UTAH
-
459 PUEBLO, COLO.
PA.
PA.
PA.
PA.
WASH.
ORf.
ORE*
ORE*
UTAH
COLO.
wise.
68
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
461 RALEIGH, N.C,
WAKE
462 READINGi PA.
BERKS
463 RENO* NEV.
WASHOE
464 RICHMOND, VA,
469 5AGINAW, MICH.
5AGINAW
470 ST. JOSEPH, MO.
BUCHANAN
471 ST. LOUIS* MO.-ILL.
N.Ci
PA.
NEV.
472 SALEM, ORE.
MARION
' ' ''POLK
473 SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH
DAVIS
SALT LAKE
474 SAN ANGELO. TEX.
TOM GREEN
ORE.
ORE.
UTAH
UTAH
TEX.
469
466
467
468
CHESTERFIELD
HANOVER
HENRI co
ROANOKE, VA.
ROANOKE
ROCHESTER* N.Y.
LIVINGSTON
MONROE
ORLEANS
WAYNE
ROCKFORD, ILL.
BOONE
WINNEBAGQ
SACRAMENTO. CAL.
PLACER
SACRAMENTO
YOLO
VA.
VA.
VA.
(
VA.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
ILL.
ILL.
CAL.
CAL.
CAL.
479 SAN ANTONIO, TEX.
BEXAR
GUAOALUPE
TEX.
TEX.
476 RIVERSIDE-SAN BERNARDINO-ONTARIO, CALIF.
RIVERSIDE
SAN BERNARDINO
477 SAN DIEGO* CAL.
SAN DIEGO
476 SAN FRANCISCO-OAKLAND* CAL.
ALAMEDA
CONTRA COSTA
MARIN
SAN FRANCISCO
SAN MATED
SOLANO
479 SAN JOSE, CAL.
CAL.
CAL.
CAL.
CAL.
CAL,
CAL.
CAL.
CAL.
CAL.
SANTA CLARA
CAL.
MICH.
MO.
461 SANTA BARBARA.SANTA MAHIA-LOMPQC, CALIF.
SANTA BARBARA CAL.
482 SAVANNAH, GA.
CHATHAM
GA.
MADISON
ST. CLAIR
FRANKLIN
JEFFERSON
ST. CHARLES
ST. LOUIS
ST. LOUIS (INDEPENDENT CITY)
ILL.
ILL.
MO.
MO.
MO.
MO.
MO.
483 SCRANTON, PA.
LACKAWANNA
484 SEATTLE-EVERETT, WASH.
KING
SNOHOMISH
PA.
WASH.
WASH.
69
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
465 SHREVEPORT, LA.
500 TAMPA-5T. PETERSBURG, FLA.
486
487
486
469
BOSSIER
CADDO
SIOUX CITY, IA.-NEB.
WOODBURY
DAKOTA
SIOUX FALLS, S.D.
MINNEHAHA
SOUTH bENO, INC.
MARSHALL
ST. JOSEPH
SPOKANE, WASH.
LA.
LA.
IOWA
NEB.
S.D.
IND.
INO.
HILLSBOROUGH
PINELLAS
501 TERRE HAUTE, INO.
CLAY
SULLIVAN
VERMILLION
VIGO
502 TEXARKANAt TEX..ARK.
MILLER
BOWIE
509 TOLEDO, OHJO-MICH.
MONROE
LUCAS
WOOD
FLA.
FLA*
IND.
IND,
IND.
IND.
ARK.
TEX.
MICH.
OHIO
OHIO
SPOKANE WASH.
490 SPRINGFIELD. ILL.
SANGAMON
491 SPRINGFIELD, MO.
GREENE
492 SPRINbFIELD. OHIO
CLARK
495 STEUBENVILLE-WEIRTON, OHlO-W.VA.
JEFFERSON
BROOKE
HANCOCK
496 STOCKTON, CAL.
SAN JQAUUIN
497 SYRACUSE. N.Y.
MADISON
ONONDAGA
OSWEGO
498 TACOMA, WASH.
PIERCE
499 TALLAHASSEE. FLA.
LEON
ILL.
MO.
OHIO
OHIO
W.VA.
W.VA,
CALi
N.Y.
N.Y.
N.Y.
WASH.
FLA.
504 TOPEKA, KAN.
SHAWNEE
505 TRENTON, N.J.
MERCER
506 TUCSON, ARIZ.
PIMA
507 TULSA« OKLA.
CREEK
OSAGE
TULSA
508 TUSCALOOSA, ALA.
TUSCALOOSA
509 TYLER. TEX.
SMITH
510 UTICA-ROME, N.Y.
HERKIMER
ONEIDA
511 VALLEJO-FAIRFIELD-NAPA« CALIF.
NAPA
SOLANQ
KAN.
N.J.
ARIZ.
OKLA.
OKLA.
OKLA.
ALA,
TEX.
N.Y.
N.Y.
CAL.
CAL.
70
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
912 WACOi TEX.
MC LENNAN
$13 WASHINGTON, D.C.-MD.-VA,
MONTGOMERY
PRINCE GEORGES
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
ARLINGTON
FAIRFAX
LOUOOUN
PRINCE WILLIAM
919 WATERLOO, IA.
BLACK HAWK
916 WEST PALM BEACH, FLA.
PALM BEACH
917 WHEELING, W.VA.-OHIO
BELMONT
JEFFERSON
BROOKE
HANCOCK
MARSHALL
OHIO
918 WICHITA, KAN.
BUTLER
SEDGWICK
919 WICHITA FALLS, TEX.
ARCHER
WICHITA
920 WILKES-BARRE-HAZLETON, PA.
LUZERNE
921 WILMINGTON, DEL.-N.J.-MD.
SALEM
NEW CASTLE
CECIL
922 WILMINGTON, N.C.
BRUNSWICK
NEW HANOVER
923 WINSTON.SALEM, N.C.
FORSYTH
929 YORK, PA.
TEX.
MO.
MD.
D.C.
VA.
VA.
VA.
VA.
ADAMS
YORK
926 YOUNGSTOWN.WARREN, OHIO
MAHONING
TRUMBULL
927 BURLINGTON, VT.
PA.
PA.
OHIO
OHIO
IOWA
FLA,
OHIO
OHIO
W.VA.
W.VA.
W.VA.
W.VA.
KAN.
KAN.
TEX,
TEX,
PA.
N.J.
DEL.
MD.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C,
CHITTENOEN
928 CHEYENNE, WYO,
LARAMIE
VT.
WYOM.
929 LAFAYETTE-WEST LAFAYETTE* IND.
TIPPECANOE IND.
930 MANSFIELD, OHIO
RICHLAND OHIO
931 ANCHORAGE* ALASKA
THIRD JUDICIAL DISTRICT ALASKA
932 MCALLEN-PHARR-EDINBURG, TEX.
HIDALGO TEX.
933 SALINAS-SEASIDE-MONTEREY,' CALIF.
MONTEREY CAL.
934 SHERMAN-DEN 1 SON, TEX.
GRAYSON
939 BILOXI-GULFPORT, MISS.
HARRISON
TEX.
MISS.
936 VINELAND-MILLVILLE-BRIDGETON, N.J.
CUMBERLAND N.J.
937 APPLETON-OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN
CALUMET WISC.
OUTAGAM1E WISC.
WJNNEBAGO wise.
71
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
536 BRYAN-COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
BRAZOS TEX.
539 COLUMBIAi MISSOURI
BOONE
540 GAINESVILLE, FLORIDA
ALACHUA
541 LA CROSSEt WISCONSIN
LA CROSSE
942 MODESTO, CALIFORNIA
STANISLAUS
943 OWENSBOROt KENTUCKY
DAVIES
MO.
FLA.
wise.
CALIF.
KY.
956 FORT MYERS, FLA.
LEE
997 GASTONIA, N. C.
GASTON
998 K1LLEEN-TEMPLE* TEXAS
BPLL
CORYELL
FLA.
N.C,
TEX.
TEX.
544 PETERSBURG-COLONIAL HEIGHTS-HOPEWELL. VA.
DINWIDDIE + PETERSBURG VA.
PRINCE GEORGE * HOPEWELL VA.
559 LAKELAND-WINTER HAVEN, FLA.
POLK . FLA.
560 LONG BRANCH.ASBURY PARK, N. J«
MONMOUTH N.J.
561 NEW BRUNSWICK-PERTH AMBQY-SAYREVILLE* N.J.
MIDDLESEX N.J.
562 PARKEKSBUHG-MARIETTA, W.VA..OHIO
WASHINGTON OHIO
WOOD W.VA.
545 ROCHESTER* MINNESOTA
OLMSTEAD
546 SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SONOMA
991 ALEXANDRIA, LA.
RAPIDES
992 BATTLE CREEK, MICH.
CALHOUN
553 DAYTONA BEACH, FLA.
VOLUSIA
554 ELMIRA, N. Y.
CHEMUNG
559 FLORENCE, ALA.
COLBERT
LAUDERDALE
MINN.
CALIF.
LA.
MICH.
FLA.
N.Y.
ALA.
ALA.
963 POUGHKEEPSIE. N. Y.
DUTCHESS
964 RICHLAND-KENNEWICK, WASH.
BENTON
FRANKLIN
965 SANTA CRUZ, CAL.
SANTA CRUZ
967 SARASOTA, FLA.
SARASOTA
568 SPARTANBURG. 5. C.
SPARTANBURG
569 WILLIAMSPORT, PA.
LYCOMING
570 YAK I MA, WASH.
YAK I MA
N.Y.
WASH.
WASH.
CAL.
FLA.
S.C.
PA.
WASH.
72
-------
Table 6-3 (Continued).
971 MELBOURNE-!ITUSVIUE-COCOA, FLA.
BREVARD FLA.
930 BRIDGEPORT-NORWALK-5TAMFORD-DANBURY, CONN
FAIRFIELD CONN.
931 NEW HAVEN-WATERBURY-MERJDEN, CONN.
NEW HAVEN CONN.
932 HARTFORD-NEW BRITAIN-BRISTOL, CONN.
HARTFORD CONN.
933 NORWICH-GROTON-NEW LONDON, CONN.
NEW LONDON CONN.
934 BOSTON* MASS.
ESSEX
MIDDLESEX
NORFOLK
PLYMOUTH
SUFFOLK
MASS.
MASS.
MASS.
MASS.
MASS.
935 FALL RIVER-NEW BEDFORD* MASS.
BRISTOL MASS,
936 PITTSFIELD, MASS.
BERKSHIRE
MASS.
937 SPRINGFIELD-CHlCOPEE-HOLYQKEt MASS.
HAMPDEN
HAMPSHIRE
MASS.
MASS.
938 WORCESTER-FITCHBURG-LtOMINSTER, MASS.
WORCESTER MASS.
939 PORTLAND-SOUTH PORTLAND, ME.
CUMBERLAND ME.
940 LEWISTON-AUBURN, ME.
ANDROSCOGGIN ME.
941 MANCHESTER-NASHUA, N.H.
HILLSBOROUGH N.H.
942 PROVIDENCE.WARWICK-PAWTUCKFT, R.I.
BRISTOL
KENT
PROVIDENCE
R.I.
R.I.
R.Ii
73
-------
APPENDIX A - BASIS FOR INITIAL DESIGNATION CRITERIA
This Appendix provides the technical derivation of the initial desig-
nation criteria presented in Section 3 of this report.
A.I CARBON MONOXIDE
The variable exclusion criteria for carbon monoxide presented in Section
3 are derived by using the model for CO presented in Section 5 of these
guidelines. The criteria are in the form of a curve which specifies, for
a given local vehicle mix of light- versus heavy-duty vehicle emissions, a
critical CO concentration below which an SMSA can be excluded from consid-
eration as an AOMA, and above which the SMSA must be subjected to further
analysis using the techniques presented in Section 4 and 5 of this document.
The derivation of the criteria curve follows:
The CO model presented in Section 5 of this document is represented by
the three following equations:
0.8
FT= fl
FL
(B-b)
FU -
PL 6*
PL GL
t b
EL +
"L +
EL +
PH
PH
PH
GS EH
GH EH + PS GS ES
(A-l)
(A-2)
(A-3)
0.2 (B-b) 100%
where: FT = Total future (1985) CO concentration
F. = Future concentration due to local traffic
F.j = Future concentration due to urban emission
b = Background concentration
B = Baseline concentration (measured or estimated)
P. = Percent emission from light-duty vehicles (gross vehicle
weight < 6000 Ib)
75
-------
PU = Percent emission from other mobile sources (gross vehicle
weight > 6000 Ib)
PC = Percent emission from stationary sources
G = Growth factor over the projection period, G* + G
E = Expected ratio of 1985 emission to baseline emission for
a composite source.
G* = Growth factor for traffic on the local street of interest
The "future" air quality (FT) will be set equal to the CO standard, and
the light- versus heavy-duty vehicle mix will be varied for the local street
condition to yield corresponding critical baseline concentrations.
The following assumptions will be made in applying the model:
(a) Background concentration (b) = 1 ppm.
(b) The CO standard to be considered is the 8-hour standard of
9 ppm (= FT).
(c) The growth of mobile and stationary sources will be assumed
to be 5 percent annually (r) for urban areas. For a 1970
baseline, the projection period to 1985 is 15 years (n).
Thus, the growth factor is given by
G = (1 + r)n = (1 + 0.05)15 = 2.08
Therefore, a 1970-1985 growth factor of 2.0 will be used for
all urban sources, so
GL = GH = GS =2.0
(d) Growth of local traffic (G* = G*) will be less than total
urban growth due to "saturation" of local streets with current
traffic; assume G* = G* = 1.2.
76
-------
(e) The emission factor ratios from Table 5-1 will be used; no
control over stationary sources of CO will be assumed; thus
EL = 0.08
EH = 0.93
ES = i.o
(f) The percent contribution of CO emissions from stationary
sources is assumed to be 20. The percent contribution of
CO emissions from light- and heavy-duty vehicles for the
local street case will be treated differently than for the
urban case. For the local street case (F. ), the P. and Pu
L L n
values will vary; for the urban case (F,,), assume P. = 70
and PH = 10. In either case, since P<. = 20, P. + PH = 80.
For the local case, Equation (A-2) is used; inserting
the values assumed above yields
FL PL (1.2)(0.08) + Pu (1.2)(0.93)
0.8 (B-l)
FL
80
= (B-l)
P. (0.077) +
L
PU (0.89)
n
L 80 J
For the urban case, Equation (A-3) is used, yielding
(70)(2.0)(0.08) + (10)(
0.2 (B-l)" 100
FU (70)(2.0)(0.08) + (10)(2.0)(0.93) + (20)(2.0)(1 .0)
"
From Equation A-l ,
FT = FL + FU + b
Inserting the above values yields
fP (0.077)
9 = (B-l) |_- - 80
77
+ Pu (0.89)1
0 - - J
-------
, or
8
> (0.077) + Pu (0.89)1
L H + 0.140
80
Substituting varying values of P, and PH yields the corre-
sponding values of B given in Table A-l. From these values, the
criteria curve given as Figure 3 is derived.
There is no initial inclusion threshold for CO. As a result,
any area which is not automatically excluded must be subjected to
further analysis as indicated in Sections 4 and 5.
A.2 TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICULATES
Nationwide emissions of TSP are not expected to increase. The combina-
tion of SIP requirements for existing source emission reduction, attrition
of existing sources, and the requirement that new sources meet NSPS should
result in a continuing decrease in TSP emissions through 1985. Therefore,
areas in which all NAAQS for TSP are presently being met need not be desig-
nated as AQMAs for TSP.
There is no inclusion threshold for TSP other than the projected viola-
tion of a NAAQS in 1985. Those areas in which a "reasonable time" for
attainment of a secondary NAAQS for TSP extends beyond 1985 must be declared
AQMAs for TSP. For other areas currently exceeding NAAQS for TSP, the ana-
lytical techniques presented in Section 5 may be used to project TSP
concentration to 1985.
A.3 SULFUR OXIDES
Nationally, most SIP requirements for control of S02 in urban areas
have been implemented. Control methods for SO emissions are not as advanced
/\
as controls for TSP. Consequently, growth of SO sources may result in a net
78
-------
Table A-l. SOLUTIONS TO EQUATION
8
B = f PL (0.077) + PH (0.89)^
( 80 / V
1
Percent Contribution
of LDV Emissions to
Total Local Street
Vehicle Emisskis
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
n
PL
0
8
16
' 24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
- 0.140
n
PH
80
72
64
56
48
40
32
24
16
8
0
+1
B
8.8
9.4
10.2
11.2
12.3
13.8
15.7
18.3
22.1
27.8
37.9
79
-------
increase of SO emissions even though NSPS for SO are applied to new
J\ /\
sources. Therefore, an indicator of growth is contained in the exclusion
criteria for SOV.
X
If the product of the highest measured S02 concentration of each
averaging time and a growth factor based on projected SMSA total earnings
is less than any NAAQS for S02, the area may be excluded as an AQMA for S02-
Total earnings in the SMSA was selected as the best indicator of emission
growth potential that is readily available. The growth factor is computed
from
r (1 + r)n V85 '
6 = TO = V^~
Where
G = Relative growth factor
r = Growth rate, %/year
n = number of years between the base year and 1985
Vg5 = Value in dollars of total earnings in 1985
V. = Value in dollars of total earnings in base year
The inclusion criteria for SOp are identical to those for TSP.
A.4 PHOTOCHEMICAL OXIDANTS
All areas for which transportation controls are required for oxidants
must be designated AQMAs for oxidants. Although Mobile Source Performance
Standards (MSPS) and NSPS for hydrocarbons will lower oxidant concentrations
below NAAQS by 1985 in some areas, other areas, particularly those with high
stationary source HC emissions, may have difficulty meeting NAAQS without
further HC emission control. It is therefore considered prudent to subject
areas requiring special HC emission control (i.e., transportation control
80
-------
areas) to the air quality maintenance analysis required following AQMA
designation.
An area may be excluded from AQMA designation if (1) it is not a
transportation control area for oxidants, and (2) measured peak hourly
oxidant concentration is less than twice the NAAQS for oxidants (0.16 ppm
o
or 320/ig/m ). This latter exclusion threshold is arrived at through the
following reasoning.
The combination of MSPS, NSPS, and growth is expected to result in
about a 55 per cent reduction in HC emission from the average metropolitan
area by 1985. Both Appendix J and proportional models indicate that a 55
per cent HC emission reduction should produce a 55 per cent oxidant concen-
tration reduction. Furthermore, the reduction in the HC/NO ratio, which is
/\
the likely consequence of present and expected emission control regulations,
should reduce oxidant concentrations even more than predicted by Appendix J
or proportional modeling. It follows that an area presently exhibiting less
than double the NAAQS for oxidant should achieve NAAOS by 1985 provided MSPS
and NSPS are effectively applied and enforced.
o
Areas which exhibit oxidant concentrations above 320 /ug/m but are not
subject to transportation controls may estimate 1985 oxidant concentration
using the methods presented in Section 5.
A.5 NITROGEN DIOXIDE
Future N02 concentrations were projected by EPA for all regions likely
to exceed NOp NAAQS. These projections were made in connection with the re-
examination of the MSPS for NO . The results of this analysis indicate that
/\
NAAQS for N02 are threatened only in the Los Angeles, Chicago, New York, Den-
ver, and Wasatch Front AQCRs. Consequently, only the urbanized portions of
81
-------
these AQCRs need be designated ACftlAs for NCL. All other areas may be
omitted.
82
-------
APPENDIX B - EXAMPLES OF ANALYSES FOR A HYPOTHETICAL SMSA EMPLOYING THE
"BACK-UP" METHOD OF ESTIMATING EMISSIONS
This appendix presents example calculations for carbon monoxide, sulfur
dioxide, and hydrocarbons/photochemical oxidants. The hypothetical SMSA is
assumed to be located in a state which will be under a significant burden
and must resort to the "L,ack-up" method of calculating emissions allowed
after application of all SIP control strategies. As stated in Section 4 of
this guideline, however, the "preferred" method is to be employed in most
cases, rather than the "back-up" method. The "preferred" method is the
method used by the states in developing the control strategies for "example
regions", i.e., application of SIP regulations to all emissions, source by
source, to determine allowable emissions in 1975 (or 1977, if an extension
for attaining the NAAQS was granted). The "back-up" method is presented
here merely to demonstrate its use, but its use should be restricted to
those states which will be faced with a heavy burden in designating the air
quality maintenance areas. Before deciding to use the "back-up" method,
states should discuss the problems of using the "preferred" nethod with the
representative responsible for maintenance of standards in the appropriate
EPA Regional Office.
B.I. EXAMPLE 1 - CARBON MONOXIDE
1. Assume that the hypothetical SMSA has a current carbon monoxide air
quality of 30 ppm, second highest 8-hour average per year. Also assume
that the percent of local mobile source emissions contributed by light-
duty vehicles (LDV) is 80. This percentage is below the critical exclu-
sion concentration of 94 per cent shown on Figure 3-1. As a result of
83
-------
the 80 per cent assumption, the per cent of local mobile source emis-
sions contributed by heavy duty vehicles (HDV) would be 20 if the further
assumption is made that no stationary sources contribute carbon monoxide
in the local area around the samplers. Upon application of the initial
designation criteria found in Section 3 of the guideline, this air
quality does not qualify the area for automatic exclusion or inclusion
as an SMSA, since the exclusion cutoff value is 21 ppm for an 80 per cent
local mobile source emissions contribution by light-duty vehicles.
Therefore, emissions and air quality will have to be projected for the
area. Assume that the hypothetical area had the 1970 emissions of CO in
tons per year as shown in Table B-l.
The data from Table B-l are then entered in Columns A and B of
Table B-2 as shown.
2. Assume that the following annual growth rates were projected for the
hypothetical area (the 5-year (1970-1975) and 10-year (1975-1985) com-
pounded growth rates are also given).
Category Annual 5-year 10-year
Population 2.1% 11% 23%
Total earnings 4.5% 25% 55%
Manufacturing earnings 4.1% 22% 50%
3. Assume for the hypothetical area that new power plants would contribute
an additional 300 tons of CO per year in 1975.
4. Place the proper emission reduction factors from Table 4-2 in Column C.
5. The growth factor for 1970-1975 is inserted in Column C-l. This factor
is obtained from the 5-year demographic-economic parameters, and is
expressed as the ratio of the 1975 value to the 1970 value (i.e., 25 per
cent is expressed as 1.25).
84
-------
Table B-l. 1970 EMISSIONS OF CO FOR HYPOTHETICAL SMSA
SOURCE
Fuel combustion
Power plants
Point sources excluding power plants
Area sources
Subtotal
Industrial point sources
Solid waste disposal
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Transportation
LDV
HDV
Subtotal
Miscellaneous
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Total
CO EMISSIONS (Tons/year)
1,200
400
400
2,000
7,000
100
1,900
2,000
755,000
95,000
850,000
500
500
1.000
862,000
85
-------
Table B-2. EMISSION PROJECTION CALCULATION TABLE FOR CARBON MONOXIDE
00
A
Source
class
Fuel combustion
Power plants
Point sources (excl
Area sources
Subtotal
B C
Reduction
1970 factors
emissions (Table 4-2)
1,200 1.0
pp) 400 1.0
400 1.0
2,000
Industrial point sources 7,000 0.10
Solid waste disposal
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Transportation
LDV
HDV
Subtotal
Miscellaneous
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Totals
100 0.52
1,900 0.88
2,000
755,000
95,000
850,000
500
500
1,000 1.00
862,000
C-l D E
Growth Growth
*f flctov 1 975 F&tc
(1975/1970) emissions (1985/1975-1)
1500
(=1200+300)
1.25 500
1.25 500
2,500 0.55
1.22 900R 0.50
1.11 57
1.11 1,840
1,900R 0.23
1.25 .1,250 0.55
F G
Emission 1985
factor emissions
adjustment G = D(l + EF
1.00 3,900R
0.40 1,100R
1.00 2,300R
83,000R
121,000K
204,000R
1.00 1,900R
212,000R
R-indicates rounding.
-------
6. Column D is calculated for all categories except power plants and trans-
portation by taking the product of Columns B, C, and C-l . The 1975
power plant emissions are given by the product of Columns B and C, to
which is added the emissions from new power plants.
7. The appropriate 10-year growth rates are entered in Column E for all
categories except transoortation; these rates are expressed as the ratio
of the 1985 value to the 1975 value, minus unity (one).
8. The appropriate emission factor adjustments are entered in Column F.
9. Column G is computed for all categories except transportation by the
given equation.
10. Transportation emissions are then calculated by Equation 4-1 from Part 4:
Q1985 = * ((W GiEi
The growth rate for transportation emissions should be determined
from available data if such exist. If no such data exist, use the
growth rate for population. For the hypothetical area, this is 2.1
per cent. Therefore, G = (1 + 0.021) = 1.37. E values are found
in Table 5-1. For carbon monoxide, ELQV = 0.08; and EHDV = 0.93.
.'. Q85 = (755,000)(1.37)(0.08) + (95,000)0 .37)(0. 93)
= 83,000 + 121,000 = 204,000 tons per year
11. Total Column G for a grand total of 212,000 tons per year for 1985
emissions for carbon monoxide.
12. Carbon monoxide concentrations are calculated by the method given in
section 5.2. Assume a growth factor G* for local street traffic of 1.0
if an actual value is not known.
F = F + F + b
87
-------
= O.S(B-b)
PLG*EL t
For the local area assume:
B = 30 ppm
b = 1 ppm
PL = 80.0
G£=1.0
EL = 0.08
*. F, = 0.8
PH = 20.0
GO - i.o
EH = 0.93
20 (1.0)(0.93)
]
= 0.8(29) p
=5.8 ppm
For the entire urban area:
= 0.2(B-b)
rPLGLEL
TOOT
Assume:
PL = 87.6 PH = 11.0 (Refers to 1970 percentages calculated
from Table B-2.)
Since stationary source emissions for 1985 have already been computed,
P-GgEg = the ratio of 1985 stationary source emissions to total 1975
emissions or = 8,000/862,000 = 1%
GL = GH = 1.37 (=1970 to 1985 growth in population)
= 0.2(29)
100
* F
-------
= 5.8 +1.4 +1
= 8.2 ppm, second highest 8-hour average
B.I.I Conclusion
Since this concentration is below the standard of 9 ppm, second highest
3-hour average, this SMSA would not be designated as an AQMA for CO.
B.2 EXAMPLE 2 - SULFUR DIOXIDE
1. Assume that the hypothetical area has a most recent annual arithmetic
mean S02 concentration of 150/ig/m , but has been projected to attain
the S02 secondary standard before 1985. Since the current air quality
concentration for S02 is above even the primary standard, the area cannot
be automatically eliminated as an obvious non-problem area. Likewise,
since the attainment of the secondary NAAQS has been projected before
1985 due to the current control strategy, the area cannot be automati-
cally included as an obvious problem area. Consequently, the area must
be subjected to further analysis consisting of a projection of emissions
and air quality.
Note that if the current air quality concentration were below the
secondary NAAQS for S0p» one would compute the product of the current
concentration and the relative growth in total earnings between the base
year and 1985 (the relative growth = 1 + the percentage growth rate over
the period of interest). If this product is still below the secondary
NAAQS for SOp, the area could be automatically excluded as an AQMA; if
this product were above the secondary NAAQS for SOp, analysis would be
required for the area to determine if it should be selected as an AQMA-
Assume that the hypothetical area had 1970 emissions of SOp as shown
in Table B-3.
89
-------
Table B-3. 1970 EMISSIONS OF SULFUR DIOXIDE FOR HYPOTHETICAL SMSA
Source
Fuel combustion
Power plants
Point sources excluding power plants
Area sources
Subtotal
Industrial point sources
Solid waste disposal
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Transportation
LDV
Other mobile
Subtotal
Miscellaneous
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Total
Emissions (tons/year)
250,000
100,000
100,000
450,000
60,000
Meg
2,000
512,000
90
-------
The data from Table B-3 are entered into Columns A and B of Table B-4
as shown.
2. The same growth rates apply as in Example 1 above.
3. Assume for the hypothetical area that new power plants would contribute
an additional 20,000 tons per year in 1975. Of course, in actuality, it
is recommended that this figure be obtained from consultation with electric
utility companies.
4. Place the proper emission reduction factors from Table 4-2 in Column C.
5. The growth for 1970-1975 obtained from the 5-year demographic-economic
parameters is inserted in Column C-l, expressed as the ratio of the 1975
value to the 1970 value (i.e., 25 per cent is expressed as 1.25). For
particulate matter and SOp from transportation sources, assume the same
growth as that of population.
6. Column D is calculated for all categories except power plants and trans-
portation by taking the product of Columns B, C, and C-l. The 1975 power
plant emissions are given by the product of Columns B and C, to which is
added the emission from new power plants.
7. The appropriate 10-year growth factors are entered in Column E of all
categories. For particulate matter and S02 from transportation, assume
the same growth as population. The growth factors here are expressed as
the ratio of the 1985 value to the 1975 value, minus unity (one).
8. The appropriate emission factor adjustments are entered in Column F.
9. Column G is computed for all categories by the given equation.
10. Column G is totalled, yielding 1985 S02 emissions of 406,000 tons per
year.
91
-------
Table B-4. EMISSION PROJECTION CALCULATION TABLE FOR SULFUR DIOXIDE
A
Source
class
Fuel combustion
Power plants
Point sources'5
Area sources
Subtotal
Industrial point sources
Solid waste disposal
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Transportation
LDV
HDV
Subtotal
Miscellaneous
Point sources
Area sources
Subtotal
Totals
B
1970
emissions
250,000
100,000
100,000
450,000
60,000
Neg
2,000
0
512,000
C
Reduction
factors
(Table 4-2)
0.43
0.43
0.57
0.37
V «• M
1.00
C-l
Growth
factor
(1975/1970)
1.25
1.25
1.22
TI — —
1.10
...
D E
Growth
1975 rate
emissions9 (1985/1975 -1)
130,000
(=110,000 + 20,000)
54,000R
54,000
238,000 0.55
27,000R 0.51
0
2,200 0.23
- 0
F
Emission
factor
adjustment
1.0
0.4
__•
1.0
G
1985
emission
G = D(l +E6
370,000
34,000
2,000
406,000
R - indicates rounding.
Excluding power plants.
-------
11. S0? concentrations can now be calculated. Assume that the area has an
3
annual arithmetic mean SCL concentration of 150 pq/m . For this example,
the incremental version of the Miller-Holzworth Model (Section 5.4.2)
will be used to project air quality. Assume that this hypothetical SMSA
i
has an area of 1000 square kilometers. The urbanized area is hypothesized
2
to be 400 square kilometers (.160 mi ) and it is assumed that 85 per cent
of the emissions are emitted within the urbanized area.
Therefore, the 1970 and 1985 emissions from the urbanized area,
together with the emission densities are:
1970 1985
SMSA (tons/year) ' 512,000 406,000
Urban area (tons/year 435,000 345,000
Urban area emission density
(tons/year-mi2) 2,720 2,160
The incremental Miller-Holzworth Model is given by:
4 X • 0.011A Q [3.61H0-13 * S°°S . (S.SxIO^uH1'26] (B_,,
or
AX = 0.01UQ (1600 S/u)0-115 (B-2)
For the hypothetical SMSA, assume the following conditions:
- a mean annual morning mixing height of 500 m = H
- a mean annual morning wind speed of 5 m/sec =M
- a city size = \AoO km2 = 20 km = 12.4 mi = S
If 1600 S/u <0.471 H1'13, Equation B-2 is used.
1600 - = 3970
93
-------
0.471 H1'13 = 0.471 (5QQ)1'13 = 0.471 (.1100) * 518
Since 1600 S/u> 0.471 H1'13, Equation B-l is used.
A Q = (Q1985 ' ^1970* = 2>16° " 2'72° = "58° tons/yr-ml2
Inserting this AQ value in Equation B-l yields:
Ax -0.001 (-580) [3.61 (500)0'13, ^12.41 . (5.5 x lO'tooO)1'
= -6.38 [8.09 + 3.97-1.11 x 10"2]
= -6.38 (12.1)
= -77 /*g/m3
•'• X1985 = X1970 + Ax
= 150 - 77
o
= 73 ug/m annual arithmetic mean
12. To calculate the short-term concentrations, the log-normal model described
in Section 5.4.3.2 of the guideline is used. Assume that the most recent
standard geometric deviation of the hypothetical area is 2.05 for aver-
aging times of 3 hours, and the ratio of the annual maximum 3-hour concen-
tration to the mean concentration is 9.74. These values are underlined
for reference in Table 5-2. Therefore, the projected 3-hour maximum con-
centration is:
(73 vg/m3)(9.74) = 710 pg/m3
B.2.1 Conclusion
q
Since 710 vg/m (3-hour maximum concentration) is less than the standard
o
of 1300 yg/m (second highest 3-hour value per year) the area would not be
designated as an AQMA for SQ.
94
-------
B.3 EXAMPLE 3 - HYDROCARBONS AND PHOTOCHEMICAL OXIDANTS
1. Assume that the area has a current photochemical oxidant concentration
of 350 /ig/m , second highest 1-hour concentration per year, but the area
is not required to have a transportation control strategy. Therefore, it
cannot be automatically included or excluded based on the criteria pre-
sented in Section 3 of the guideline. The area must, therefore, be
subjected to further analysis consisting of an estimate of emissions and
air quality.
NOTE: The projection of emissions is not presented here, since it is done in
a fashion much the same as for carbon monoxide. Instead, it is assumed that
total 1970 hydrocarbon emissions were 170,000 tons per year and that 1985
hydrocarbon emissions are projected to be 100,000 tons per year.
2. Section 5 of the guideline presents the method for estimating photochemi-
cal oxidant concentrations. The expected emission reduction is given by
R - Ebase " E1985 „
"expected ' X
D - 170,000 - 100.000 Y ,nfw
"expected ~ 170,000 X IUU%
- 70.000 v inn*
170,000 X IOU%
= 41.2%
3. The required emission reduction is obtained from the plot in Appendix J
of 40 CFR Part 51 (published in the August 14, 1971 Federal Register ).
3
For a current photochemical oxidant concentration of 350 ftg/m (0.18 ppm),
second highest 1-hour concentration per year, Appendix J indicates that
a reduction of 60 percent is required.
95
-------
B.3.1 Conclusion - Since the required reduction of 60 percent is greater
than the expected reduction of 41.2, the area would be designated as an
AQMA for photochemical oxldants.
96
-------
APPENDIX C - LIST OF TASKS TO BE PERFORMED FOR MAINTENANCE OF STANDARDS
PROGRAM
This preliminary list of tasks is being provided for use by the states
to outline the work they must do in maintaining standards. The list can be
used to plan and schedule activities and to estimate manpower requirements.
A more detailed description jf the work to be done will be provided in the
guidelines which will follow. This list of tasks, however, should not be
construed as a final outline of the plan.
The tasks involved can be partitioned into three major groups:
I. Submit areas designated as AQMAs.
II. Analyze emissions and air quality—-1975 to 1985.
III. Develop and submit a 10-year plan for air quality maintenance.
C.I SUBMIT AREAS DESIGNATED AS AQMAs
The objective of this group of tasks is to determine which SMSAs and
other areas meet the criteria for designation of AQMAs. The tasks are:
1. Assemble information on emission inventory, air quality, emission
regulations, status of compliance, and future power plant construc-
tion and fuel-use patterns.
2. Apply initial designation criteria, using procedures outlined in the
guidelines, to arrive at designated AQMAs.
3. Conduct public hearings in designated AQMAs.
4. Submit designated AQMAs to EPA with back-up documentation.
C.2 ANALYZE EMISSIONS AND AIR QUALITY — 1975 to 1985
The objective of this group of tasks is to determine which areas are
really problem areas with regard to maintaining standards and, thus, which
97
-------
areas require maintenance plans. This determination will be done by conduct-
ing an in-depth analysis of all the major factors that will affect air quality
in the period 1975 to 1985 using guidelines and models to be issued by EPA.
The tasks to be performed here have a different purpose than those per-
formed in Group I above. In the case of Group I tasks, it was only necessary
to identify AQMAs on the basis of specific designation criteria. However,
Group II tasks must go beyond that and quantitatively evaluate the air pollu-
tion problem in each AQMA for the period 1975 to 1985. The tasks are:
1. Determine baseline emissions for each pollutant for which the AQMA
was designated:
a. By source category.
b. By location as required by EPA models.
2. Identify principal sources (baseline and projected to 1985).
3. Acquire all necessary data to determine growth in emissions from
1975 to 1985 by source category and location for each pollutant.
This would involve acquiring data on:
a. Past trends.
b. Planned and projected economic and demographic growth.
c. Projected control technology.
d. Present and future regulations for new and existing sources.
e. Meteorological data.
4. Project a detailed emission inventory for 1975 to 1985 by source
category for each pollutant.
5. Project 1975 to 1985 air quality using calibrated diffusion models
to be provided by EPA. Use these models to:
98
-------
a. Analyze the impact of indirect sources.
b. Analyze the impact of new sources.
6. Determine which AQMAs are problem areas and require 10-year mainte-
nance plans. (A problem area is any portion of an AQMA in which the
above analysis indicates any standard may be violated at any time
between the date of attainment of the standard and 1985.)
C.3 DEVELOP AND SUBMIT A 10-YEAR PLAN FOR AIR QUALITY MAINTENANCE
The objective of this group of tasks is to have the states develop and
submit a plan for maintenance of air quality in 1975 to 1985 in each AQMA
determined to be a problem area. The tasks to be performed by the states
can be inferred from the following outline of the content of the plan:
1. Plan overview -- Each state must prepare a plan overview document
summarizing the content of the plan; it should include the following:
a. A description of what the plan is about and why it is required,
so that lay citizens will have sufficient background knowledge
to participate in public hearings on the plan.
b. A list of documents that constitute the plan, with each document
or portion thereof identified according to the pollutant and
AQMA it deals with.
c. A list of any documents or portions of the SIP, as it will exist
immediately prior to the submission of the 10-year plan, that are
being revised, rescinded, or supplemented by the 10-year plan,
and a brief description of the salient features of such changes.
2. Required demonstrations
Each state must:
a. Certify that public hearings have been held pursuant to 40 CFR
51.4(d).
99
-------
b. Demonstrate the presence of legal authority to adopt and
implement the 10-year plan, pursuant to 40 CFR 51.11.
c. Provide documentation that the intergovernmental cooperation
required by 40 CFR 51.21(a) and 51.21(c) has been established.
Identify the local agencies pursuant to 40 CFR 51.21(b)(l) and
describe the distribution of responsibilities among state and
local agencies in preparing, submitting and implementing the
10-year plan.
d. Describe how the 10-year plan will provide for coordination of
air quality maintenance activities with other local environmental
protection activities including, but not limited to, the follow-
ing activities:
i. Water planning.
ii. Solid waste disposal planning.
iii. Comprehensive and environmental health planning.
iv. Review of transportation plans.
e. Describe the procedures designed to ensure that air quality main-
tenance activities and programs to be undertaken pursuant to the
10-year plan are coordinated with all other activities and pro-
grams being carried out in accordance with the applicable SIP.
f. Provide a description of the resources available to the state
and local agencies and the resources needed to carry out the
entire SIP during the ensuing 5-year period, pursuant to 40 CFR
51.20. This should include a general description of the staff
that will be required to prepare and implement the 10-year plan
for each AQMA, and a proposed budget showing the costs of all
100
-------
phases of the 10-year plan.
g. Provide timetables that specify the dates by which classes of
sources must comply with emission regulations. Also, provide
a timetable for attaining secondary standards in each AQMA for
each pollutant under consideration in the AQMA and, if the
timetable is different from the one already in the SIP, provide
an explanation of the difference.
h. Describe the procedures used for evaluating the air quality im-
plications of existing land use plans, transportation plans,
and zoning maps.
3. Maintenance strategies
a. The state shall provide a detailed description of the control
strategies to be used in the plan pursuant to 40 CFR 51.12(a)
through (d).
For each AQMA and for each problem pollutant within that
AQMA (as identified through analysis in Group II above), the
state shall describe the specific control strategy to be used,
and show how that strategy will maintain pollutant levels within
the standards.
b. For strategies that will have an area-wide impact on emissions,
the state shall provide a demonstration of that impact. All
National Ambient Air Quality Standards shall be considered.
Interrelationships among control strategies shall be discussed.
Needed legal authority that might be innovative, unusual, or
particularly difficult to obtain shall be described.
101
-------
c. The state shall provide results of all detailed analyses made
to determine growth of emission sources in 1975 to 1985 together
with the supporting rationale.
d. The state shall provide results of all detailed analyses made to
project emissions and air quality in 1975 to 1985, with the
rationale supporting the projections.
e. The strategies used in the plan may include the following con-
siderations as the state finds they are necessary and applicable:
i. Emission density zoning—a regulatory system in which the
maximum legal rate of emissions of air pollutants from any
given land area is limited by the size of the area.
ii. Emission allocations—a regulatory system in which the maxi-
mum legal rate of emissions of air pollutants from any given
political jurisdiction or other area is assigned by an allo-
cation procedure and suitable restrictions are imposed if an
area uses up its allocation.
iii. Transportation controls—including encouragement of mass
transit and strategies discussed in the Preamble to State
Implementation Plan Transportation Controls published in
\
the Federal Register on November 6, 1973, pp. 30606 through
30633.
iv. A methodology for controlling proposed new or modified
buildings, structures, facilities, or installation, includ-
ing municipal waste water treatment facilities.
v. Fuel and energy conservation objectives.
102
-------
vi. Regulatory and other types of strategies to integrate air
quality considerations into the development of area, point,
and line sources, including zoning and subdivision regula-
tions, sewer and water connection plans, rezoning and
building plans, capital improvement programming, and open
space reservations.
vii. Mechanisms to integrate air quality considerations into
revisions of local or regional development plans, and
mechanisms to ensure that development proceeds in accord-
ance with duly adopted plans.
viii. The effects of more restrictive emission controls and
new source performance standards.
ix. Application of emission charges.
x. Tighter control over construction activities, including
grading and burning.
xi. Any other pertinent strategies which are found to be neces-
sary and applicable.
103
-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
i
4
7
9
12
15
16
17
REPORTNO. , 2
EPA-450/4-74-001
TITLE AND SUBTITLE
Guidelines for Designation of Air Quality
Maintenance Areas
AUTHOR(S)
PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
Control Programs Development Division
Standards Implementation Branch
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Air and Water Programs
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
3 RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION-NO
5 REPORT DATE
January 1974
6 PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
8 PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO
OAQPS 1.2-016
10 PROGRAM ELEMENT NO
11 CONTRACT/GRANT NO
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
First of a Series
14 SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
SUPPLEMEN TARY NOTES
Document was revised by letter on February 14, 1974. These corrections and format
changes were made in April 1974.
ABSTRACT
These guidelines are to assist the states in identifying and proposing Air Quality
Maintenance Areas (AQMAs). They contain criteria which the states may use in
designating such areas. If the states fail to designate such areas within the
timetable specified by EPA regulations, EPA shall use the criteria developed in the
guidelines to establish AQMAs.
KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTORS b IDENTIFI
13
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT 19SECURI
Distribution unlimited N/A
20 SECURI
N/A
ERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS C COSATI Field/Group
rY CLASS (This Report} 21 NO OF PAGES
114
FY CLASS (This page) 22 PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (9-73)
104
------- | |